Rapid Eye. System Administrator Guide. Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder. Document V4 Rev A 03/10

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "Rapid Eye. System Administrator Guide. Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder. Document 800-02953V4 Rev A 03/10"

Transcription

1 Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder System Administrator Guide Document V4 Rev A 03/10

2

3 System Administrator Guide

4 Revisions Issue Date Revisions A 01/09 New preliminary document based on RevA. V1 Rev A 05/09 Updated document with engineering and beta feedback and with latest software build. V2 Rev A 05/09 Document updated for the RE3 Phase 2 software release. Features such as simplex audio, the virtual keyboard, archival policies and logs have all been added or updated. V3 Rev A 11/09 Document updated for the latest Rapid Eye V9.0 software release (12/09). New features include: full LocalView on Active Alert units, the ability to disable LocalView for improved system performance, and option to set the bandwidth throughput as High/Low. V4 Rev A 03/10 Document updated for the latest Rapid Eye V9.0 software release (02/10). 4

5 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Contents About This Document Overview of Contents Warranty and Service Related Documents Typographical Conventions The Administration of a Rapid Eye System Start Here About Using a PC to Operate Rapid Eye Units About Using LocalView Onsite About Rapid Eye Active Alert Units and LocalView Using a PC to Install Rapid Eye Software View Software Only (View Operators) Admin and View Software (Multi SA) Installing Rapid Eye Software on Windows Running Admin Software on First Use Using View Software for Site Maintenance For Questions Adding a Site to the Multi Database Adding a Site Icons and Alternate Command Access Another Site Name Updating a Site Renaming a Site Deleting a Site Physical Removal of a Site Other Site-Related Functions Grouping Sites in a Folder Creating a New Folder with Rapid Eye Admin Application Assigning a Site to a Folder Renaming a Folder Deleting a Folder Grouping Folders Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Working with Connections Setting Up a Connection Using LocalView to Modify the IP Address of a Rapid Eye Unit Testing a Connection Common Network Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Without DNS DHCP Reference Using an Internet Router for Network Address Translation Document V4 Rev A 5 03/10

6 Contents 6 Direct Connection to a Standalone PC Dial-Up Connection Irregular Use of Area Codes Forcing a Long-Distance Dial-Up Call Using a Local Area Code Forcing a Local Dial-Up Call Across Area Codes Dial-Up Technical Note Offering Many Dial-Up Connections to the Same Unit Many Connections to a Unit RAS Server Planning to Connect to One Unit at a Time Setting a Connection to a RAS Server Using a RAS Server Before Connecting to Units Connection Report Changing the Primary Connection Addressing Alarms to an Alarm Station Sequencing Site Alarm Stations Quickly Assigning a Site to Many Alarm Stations Setting a Site to Not Report Alarms to a Specific Station Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station Customizing the Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station Cancelling the Customization of a Telephone Number Unit Configuration Basics Maintenance Session Starting a Maintenance Session Support for Older Unit Models Making a Site Operational Unit Time Zone and Clock Setting the Time Zone of a Multi-Media Unit Conflicting Time Zones Setting the Clock Automatically with SNTP Setting the System Clock Manually Adjusting the Clock on a PC Running Rapid Eye Software Using a PC Clock to Set a Unit Clock Manually Adjusting the Time on an Operational Unit Correcting the Clock Securing a Site Rebooting a Unit Remote View Software Upgrade Maintenance Reference Ending Maintenance Using Apply Maintenance Topics Maintenance Tasks Feedback Box Reference Video Feed Setup Cameras Renaming a Camera Adjusting a Video Feed Re-Enabling a Camera Feed Re-Enabling All Newly Connected and Powered Cameras Disabling a Camera Resolution of Live Video in View Software Other Video Settings Recording Video with Continuous Recording Settings Enabling the Recording of a Video Feed Customizing Settings for Recorded Video Resolution Setting

7 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Frame Rate Setting Quality Setting Duplicating Settings Continuous Recording and Event Recording Estimating Storage Capacity Optimizing Recorded Video Automatic Maximization of DSP Performance Making Optimized Resolution and Frame Rate Settings The Enhanced Preview of Resolution Resolution Tips Comparing the Resolutions of Recorded Video Security and Presence Camera Tips for Visual Identification Resolution Gauge for Retrieval Session Recorded Video Resolution Reference Monitor Settings to Customize Windows for a PC PC Monitor Refresh Rate Microsoft Dual View Using Two Monitors Larger Monitors and Microsoft Windows Environmental Interference for Video Feeds Physical Compromise Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup Serial Device Settings for PTZ Assigning and Configuring a New PTZ Device Video Tab Settings for PTZ Enabling a PTZ Camera Using a PTZ Camera Displaying the PTZ Dartboard Control Using the Dartboard Control Toggling Between Zonal Mode and Pull Mode Pulling the Rubber-Band Using Zonal Mode Programming a PTZ Dome Configuring a Preset on a PTZ Camera Testing a Preset Behavior of PTZ After a Session Closes Support for RapidDome PTZ Features RapidDome PTZ Tours RapidDome Mimic Tour Testing a Mimic Tour on a RapidDome Camera RapidDome Preset Tour Setting Up a Tour of Presets on a RapidDome Camera Testing a Preset Tour on a RapidDome Camera Privacy Zones for RapidDome Setting a Privacy Zone Using ACUIX Domes Configuring the Intellibus Device for a Rapid Eye Unit Configuring an ACUIX Dome for PTZ Use Discovering ACUIX Domes Backing Up an ACUIX Configuration File to a PC Downloading a Configuration File to an ACUIX Dome Identifying the Model of the ACUIX Dome Upgrading the Firmware of an ACUIX Dome Enhancing Video Event Recording Configuration Using Higher Settings for Video Recorded During an Event Setting Lower Values for Continuous Recording Document V4 Rev A 7 03/10

8 Contents Using the Boost Button for Event Recording Automatically Recording Events of Interest Scheduling Configuration Using a Schedule Adding a Schedule Customizing a Schedule Assigning a Schedule to a Camera or Group of Cameras Using a 15-Minute Increment in a Schedule Renaming a Schedule Deleting a Schedule Alarms and Scheduling Notes on Holidays and Exceptions Adding Holidays and Exceptions Scheduling a Response to an Event of Interest Triggers and Events of Interest Displaying the Response Panel Used for Making Rules Checklist for Setting a Rule in the Response Schedule Renaming a Rule Rule Status Icons Managing the Response to a Rule Assigning a Schedule to a Response Rule Disabling a Response Rule Motion Detection Configuring Motion Detection Customizing Motion Detection with Masking Masking an Area of the Video Feed Masking Part of a Video Feed from Motion Detection False Positives Customizing Detection Scheduling Motion Detection Reference Motion Search Tamper Detection Configuring Tamper Detection Calibrating of Tamper Detection Scene Changed Tamper Detection Calculating the Length of the Video Archive Rapid Eye Storage Estimator Number of Cameras and Audio Frame Rate for Continuous Recording Quality Resolution Using Higher Values When Recording Video Obtaining Unit Statistics Multi-Media Unit Storage Statistics Configuring Other Hardware Working with Storage Clearing Storage Preventing Users from Clearing Storage Tracing the Clearing of Storage Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit System Files System Files and Associated Rapid Eye Settings Downloading a File from a Multi-Media Unit Uploading a File to a Multi-Media Unit System Tab in a Maintenance Session Logging System Messages System Monitor

9 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Making the Fault Relay Operational Camera Signal Format Enabling or Disabling Local Monitoring Setting a Bandwidth Throughput Option LAN/WAN Communications Changing Network Settings on a Unit Changing the Maximum Network Data Rate TCP Ports Default System Values for a Multi-Media Unit Setting Up a Modem Serial Device Viewing and Changing Modem Settings PPP IP Settings Reserved for Modem Connection Setting an External Modem PTZ Serial Device Assigning and Setting a PTZ Device Hardware Report Using Monitor Output 1 as a Public Display Monitor External Hardware Control of a Public Display Monitor Using LocalView as an Additional Public Display Monitor Customer Data and Customer Device Events Adding a Customer Device that Sends Data to a Unit Adding an Event Rule for a Data Recording Device Reference for Searching Rules and Regular Expressions NetPIT and PIT Devices Multi Audio Audio Hardware Using Multi Audio Audio Interference Using Audio with LocalView Enabling Audio for Onsite Use by LocalView Eagle Audio Multiple Operators Connecting to One Unit Sessions Streams Live Video One Operator Connecting to Multiple Units Managing User Accounts Key Facts Before Creating User Accounts Default User User Management Local User Management Central User Management Setting a Unit to Central User Management Using Admin and View to Create a User Account Language Grouping Accounts Basing Account Rights on Another User Updating an Account Creating an Account in LocalView Updating an Account in LocalView Granting More or Less Rights to an Account Customizing the Rights in an Account Right to Use ActivEye, by Honeywell Video Analytics User Rights and Security Denying Access Removing a User Account Deleting an Account Used to Access LocalView Onsite Document V4 Rev A 9 03/10

10 Contents 10 Security for a Multi-Media System Security Overview Securing the Multi System Security Priorities Limiting the Use of Admin Limiting Access to Admin Documentation Password Guidelines Passwords Multi Database Security SQL-Server Option SQL-Server Logon Reserved for Multi Operators System Password Road Map to Setting the System Password Changing the System Password Using Admin Changing the System Password on Each Multi-Media Unit Updating Users on System Password Changes Status Report Removing a System Password Remove Password from All Units Remove Password from One of Many Units System Password Extras Replacing a Unit Replacing a Unit when a System Password Is Enabled Last Valid Password If a Used Unit Comes from Another Multi System Re-Entering a Site Definition for a Unit with a System Password Checking if the Correct System Password Was Entered User Password Administrator Password Setting the Administrator Account s Password Rights of User Accounts Checking Rights Granted and Accessible Sites Right to Use Admin Granting Access to Admin Right to Use Maintenance Right to Use View Right to Access a Site Defining the Sites that Can Be Accessed Limiting the Time that a Unit Can Be Used Limiting the Use of Cameras and Other Devices by Partitioning High-Security Considerations Events Defined Setting an Event to Trigger an Alarm or To Be Logged Setting an Alarm Setting an Event to Report an Alarm Logging an Event Event Reference Tracing Events Using an Event Session to Search the Event Log Working with Search Results System Failure A Multi-Media Alarm Station Setting Response Priority for Alarm Notification PPP Connectivity Denying Access Denying Access to a User of Your Multi System Stopping a Session on a Networked Multi-Media Unit Removing Multi-Media Software

11 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 11 Multi-Media Alarm Stations Overview Checklist to Configure a Multi-Media Alarm Station Alarm Station Operator Requirements System Administrator Requirements Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports Identifying and Defining a Connection Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) Fields in an Alarm Station s Definition Network Connection to an Alarm Station Setting Up a Network Connection to an Alarm Station Network Address Translation for Alarm Stations Using Admin to Prepare a Multi-Media Unit for NAT Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station Preparing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station Setting Up a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station Entering Area Codes in Site and Alarm Station Definitions Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station Using a Local Call Across Area Codes Using Toll-Free Numbers Using a Long Distance Call in One Area Code Delaying the Speed of Dialing Telephone Exchange Delaying the Extension Suffix International Dial-Up Changing Long-Distance Prefixes RAS Connection to an Alarm Station Setting Up a Connection to a RAS Server Making an Alarm Station Operational Using More Than One Alarm Station Definition Creating Extra Alarm Station Definitions for the Same PC Disconnecting When Alarms Are in Progress Setting Up an Alarm Station for Alarm Callback Overview of Automatic Clip Creation and Rearm Features Setting Up Automatic Clip Creation Setting Up the Automatic Rearm Alarms Feature Removing an Alarm Station Disabling/Enabling the Dial-Up Server Alarms from a De-Listed or Unregistered Unit Tracing a Unit Sending an Alarm Stopping a Site from Reporting to a Specific Alarm Station Archival Policies Configuring an Archival Policy Using the Archival Policy Storing Archived Data Playing Back Archived Data Setting Up an Archival Server Discovering Sites on the Archival Server Playing Back Archived Video and Data Using Archival Logs Setting Up Archival Logs to be Recorded Viewing Archival Logs with the Admin Application Viewing Archival Logs with the View Application Touring Many Sites Preliminary Checklist Adding a Site Tour Changing the Default Time that a Unit Displays During a Site Tour Document V4 Rev A 11 03/10

12 Contents Customizing a Tour Changing the Order of Sites in a Tour Changing the Time Spent at a Site During a Tour Selecting Another Connection to a Site During a Tour Removing a Tour Alarm Log Viewing the Alarm Log Opening the Alarm Log Sorting the Log Selecting Log Items Printing the Log Filtering the Log Archiving the Log Removing Log Items Alarm Log Data Reference Multi Database Starting Admin Obtaining a Multi Database Using the Default Multi Database Contrasting Database Engines Converting to Another Database Using Another Multi Database Using a Database with View Creating a Multi Database Naming Restrictions Creating an Empty MS-Access Compatible Multi Database SQL Server Template Using Microsoft SQL Server with an Empty Database Using Admin to Create a SQL-Compatible Multi Database Database Based On Another Making a Copy of a Multi Database Renaming a Multi Database Multi Database for MinAdmin Software Upgrading a Multi Database Upgrading a Local Database Upgrading a Local Database Without Connecting to the Multi Database Producing a Local Database Making a Local Database Logging On Setting the Database with View Setting a Multi Database for View Refreshing a Local Database Refreshing a Local Database while Running View Deleting a Database Cannot Open a Database Appendix A End User License Agreement Index

13 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Figures Figure 1-1 Rapid Eye Multi-Media 9.0 Requirements to Setup Figure 1-2 Setuppad.exe Application Error Figure 1-3 Program Compatibility Assistant Figure 1-4 End-User License Agreement for Microsoft Software Figure 1-5 Microsoft ActiveX Control Pad Setup Figure 1-6 ActiveX Control Pad Setup Complete Figure 1-7 Restart Your Computer to Apply Changes Figure 1-8 Select Troubleshooting Option Figure 1-9 Program Compatibility Test Settings Figure 1-10 Program Compatibility Problems Noticed Figure 1-11 Program Compatibility Version of Windows Figure 2-1 Right-Clicking in the Right Pane Figure 2-2 Naming a Site Figure 2-3 LocalView Site Name Figure 2-4 Report of a Dynamic IP Assigned by DHCP Figure 3-1 Adding a Dial-Up Connection to a Site Figure 3-2 Setting-Up a Common Network Connection Figure 3-3 LocalView Network Settings: DHCP Figure 3-4 Inputting the Site Name from LocalView into a DHCP Connection Figure 3-5 Report of a Dynamic IP Assigned by DHCP to a Rapid Eye Unit Figure 3-6 DNS Setup in Microsoft Windows Figure 3-7 Connection Settings for NAT Use of an Internet Router Figure 3-8 Unit IP for Network Connection Using NAT Figure 3-9 Using a Direct Connection to Operate a Multi-Media Unit Figure 3-10 Adding a Dial-Up Connection Figure 3-11 Dial-Up Connection Figure 3-12 Irregular Use of Area Codes Figure 3-13 List of Connections to a Site Figure 3-14 Transparently Connecting to a Rapid Eye Through a RAS Server Figure 3-15 RAS Server Telephone Number and PPP Information Figure 3-16 Connecting to a RAS Server Before Running View Figure 3-17 Site Tab Primary Connections Report Figure 3-18 Customizing an Alarm Station Telephone Number Figure 4-1 Multi-Media Unit Serial Number and Software Version Figure 4-2 Unit Time Using SNTP as a Reference Document V4 Rev A 13 03/10

14 Figures Figure 4-3 Different Rules May Apply for DST in One Time Zone Figure 4-4 Manually Setting a Multi-Media Unit Clock Figure 4-5 Remote View Software Upgrade Figure 5-1 Video Tab Figure 5-2 Recording Tab with Six Cameras Recording Figure 5-3 Menu for Duplicating or for Restoring Recording Settings Figure 5-4 Estimating a Unit s Video Archive Figure 5-5 Load on DSP Resources Figure 5-6 Automatic DSP Performance Maximization Window Figure 5-7 Configure Automatic Optomizations Command Figure 5-8 Enhanced Preview Window Figure 5-9 Identifying a Subject Using High or Moderate Resolution Figure 5-10 Using Low Resolution (160 x 120, NTSC) to Show Presence Figure 5-11 Camera Placement Can Be more Important than High Resolutions Figure 5-12 Resolution Gauge for Recordings Made With NTSC Cameras Figure 5-13 Resolution Gauge for Recordings Made With PAL Cameras Figure 5-14 Microsoft Windows Screen Area Settings Figure 6-1 Assigning a PTZ Driver to a Port on the Multi-Media Unit Figure 6-2 A PTZ Camera Configuration Settings on the Video Tab Figure 6-3 Dartboard Control for PTZ Showing Command Feedback Figure 6-4 Changing the PTZ Control Mode Figure 6-5 Dragging the Mouse Pointer in a PTZ Camera Window Figure 6-6 Using PTZ Zonal Mode Figure 6-7 PTZ Dome with or without Auto-focus Figure 6-8 Programming a PTZ Preset Figure 6-9 Testing Presets on a PTZ Camera Figure 6-10 PTZ Camera: Behavior After Use Figure 6-11 Detail of PTZ Setup for the RapidDome Driver Figure 6-12 Right-Click Tour Programming Table Reveals Insert Option Figure 6-13 Location of the Program Vector Button Figure 6-14 Setting Up a Privacy Zone on a RapidDome PTZ Camera Figure 6-15 Communication Settings for Intellibus on the Serial Devices Tab Figure 6-16 Manage Files Dialog Box Figure 7-1 Continuous and Event Recording Settings Figure 7-2 Example of a Schedule Assigned to a Camera Figure 7-3 Customizing a Schedule Figure 7-4 Breakdown of an Hour into Fifteen-Minute Sections Figure 7-5 Specifying Holidays and Exceptions Figure 7-6 Rule with a Trigger, Response, and Schedule Figure 7-7 Customizing the Response for a Rule Figure 7-8 Status Icons for a Response Rule Figure 7-9 Motion Detection Configuration Figure 7-10 Motion Detection Mask Figure 7-11 Motion Detection Menu Figure 7-12 Tamper Detection Panel on the Video Tab

15 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 7-13 Calibration of Blind Tamper Detection Figure 7-14 Storage Estimator Figure 7-15 Statistics Tab Showing Storage Statistics Figure 8-1 Clear Storage Button on Statistics Tab Figure 8-2 Securing a Unit after Changing Passwords Figure 8-3 File Transfers to or from a Unit Figure 8-4 Downloading the System.log File from a Multi-Media Unit Figure 8-5 System Tab and Configuration Options Figure 8-6 Enabling the Fault Relay Changes the Output 6 Options Figure 8-7 Serial Devices Tab Showing Internal Port-Modem Data Figure 8-8 Monitor Out Tab, for a Unit s Monitor Output Figure 8-9 Some Devices Can Be Searched for Data Such as No Sale Figure 8-10 Cash Registers Connected to a Honeywell PIT Figure 8-11 A NetPIT Device on PORT 3 Showing Serial Interface Settings Figure 8-12 Expanded NetPIT Device on PORT 3, Showing Four POS Devices Figure 8-13 Audio Tab Figure 9-1 Changing User Management Figure 9-2 Adding a Night Operator Account Figure 9-3 Default User Account Rights and Site Access Figure 10-1 SQL-Server Login Figure 10-2 Securing a Unit Figure 10-3 System Password Figure 10-4 After Removing a System Password Figure 10-5 Use the LVP Utility when a Unit Replaces Another Figure 10-6 Example of Using LVP Utility to Reset System Password Figure 10-7 Summary of a User s Rights on the Users Tab Figure 10-8 Setting an Account s Session Time Limit Figure 10-9 Limiting an Account s Access to Devices Figure Identifying Camera Recording Status Figure Four Sources of Events Figure Alarms Are Entered into the Database after being Acknowledged Figure Search for Events Window Figure Denying Access and Updating Security for Sites Figure 11-1 Adding an Alarm Station Figure 11-2 Alarms Sent to an Alarm Station s IP Address Over a Network Figure 11-3 Receiving Alarms from a Unit Over a WAN or the Internet Figure 11-4 Connecting Through a WAN to an Alarm Station on a LAN Figure 11-5 Multi-Media Unit Calls an Alarm Station to Report an Alarm Figure 11-6 Area Code Needed to Connect to a Multi-Media Alarm Station Figure 11-7 Connection for an Alarm Station Shown in Site Definition Window Figure 11-8 Customizing the Dial-Up to an Alarm Station in the Site s Definition Figure 11-9 International Prefixes for Dial-Up in Rapid Eye Software Figure Sending Alarms Through a RAS Server to an Alarm Station Figure RAS Configuration for an Alarm Station Figure Alarm Handling Options Document V4 Rev A 15 03/10

16 Figures Figure 12-1 Archival Tab of the Admin Application Figure 12-2 Add Archival Policy Window Figure 12-3 Browse for Archival Server Location Figure 12-4 Scheduled Archive Policy Setup Figure 12-5 Adding Sites to an Archival Policy Figure 12-6 List of Sites Associated with a Policy Figure 12-7 Updating a Site Figure 12-8 Filled In Archival Policy Window Figure 12-9 List of Archival Policies and Servers Figure Archival Policy Properties Figure Archiving Progress Bar Figure Archival Server Tab of the Admin Application Figure Add Archival Server Window Figure Discovering Sites on an Archival Server Figure Archival Playback Select Date and Time Window Figure Select Streams for Archival Playback Window Figure Archival Playback Options and Controls Figure Options for the Admin Application Figure Archiving Log Report Figure Archival Log Filtering Options Figure Archival Logs in the View Application Figure 13-1 Adding a Tour Name Figure 13-2 Default Amount of Time for a Tour of Each Unit Figure 13-3 Customizing the Duration of a Multi-Media Unit in a Tour Figure 14-1 Viewing the Alarm Log Figure 14-2 Filtering the Alarm Log Figure 15-1 Data Flow from Admin to View Figure 15-2 Specifying the Multi Database Figure 15-3 Admin Logon and Creating a Database Figure 15-4 Copying Multi Database Data to Another Database Figure 15-5 Options for Generating a MinAdmin Multi Database Template Figure 15-6 The View Logon Window

17 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Tables Table 1-1 Customer Information Checklist Table 3-1 Router Mappings for NAT Operation of Rapid Eye Units Table 3-2 IP Defaults Used by Multi-Media Units Table 3-3 Multiple Dial-Up Connections Decision Chart Table 3-4 Automatic Connection Names For a Rapid Eye Site Table 4-1 Effect of Time Zone Setting on Display and Clips Table 4-2 Maintenance Reference Topics Table 4-3 Regular Maintenance Tasks Table 4-4 Maintenance Session Messages from a Unit Table 5-1 Frame Rate Values (Approximate IPS) for Multi-Media DSP Units Table 5-2 Event Recording Duty Cycle Cutoffs Table 5-3 Recording Resolutions for Multi-Media DSP (NTSC/PAL) Table 5-4 Recording Resolutions for Multi-Media LT (NTSC/PAL) Table 5-5 Display Properties for Optimal Video at Higher Resolutions Table 6-1 PTZ Drivers for Controllers and Domes Table 6-2 Position After PTZ Sessions Close Table 6-3 Intellibus Settings for ACUIX Domes Table 7-1 Status Icons for a Response Rule Table 7-2 Motion Detection Commands Table 7-3 Contrasting Motion Detection and Motion Search Table 7-4 Effect of the Number of Cameras on the Video Archive Table 7-5 Effect of Camera Scheduling on the Video Archive Table 7-6 Effect of Frame Rates on the Video Archive Table 7-7 Effect of Quality Settings on the Video Archive Table 7-8 Recording Resolution: Effect on Video Archive Table 7-9 Comparing the Available Storage for One Camera to Nine Table 7-10 Storage Statistics for a Multi-Media Unit Table 8-1 Rapid Eye Downloadable System Files and Settings Table 8-2 Default Network Communications Settings Table 8-3 System Tab Default Values Table 8-4 Default Modem and Dial-Up Communications Settings Table 8-5 Names of Temporary TCP/IP Addresses, for PPP Table 8-6 Inputs for External Control of Monitor Output Table 8-7 Special Characters Available for a Search Rule Table 8-8 Maximum Simultaneous Sessions Document V4 Rev A 17 03/10

18 Tables Table 8-9 Stream Availability from One Unit Table 8-10 Camera Groups Table 9-1 ActivEye Tasks and Rights of a User Account Table 10-1 Security Priorities Table 10-2 System Password: Status Table 10-3 Maintenance Tasks and Rights of a User Account Table 10-4 Security Situations Table 10-5 Event Reference, by Source and Tab Table 10-6 Event: Default Settings for Log and Alarm Table 11-1 Defining a Connection to an Alarm Station Table 11-2 Connection Information for a Rapid Eye Site to an Alarm Station Table 11-3 Router Mappings: Example for Unit Callback to Alarm Stations Table 11-4 Matching Area Codes for Sites and Alarm Stations Table 14-1 Logged Data Table 15-1 First Log On to Admin (Default Data for MS Access)

19 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide About This Document This document introduces the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder. It covers how to install and operate the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder. This document is intended for installers and system administrators. Overview of Contents This document contains the following chapters and appendixes: Chapter 1, The Administration of a Rapid Eye System, covers using a PC to operate Rapid Eye Units, using LocalView onsite, and installing Rapid Eye software. Chapter 2, Adding a Site to the Multi Database, provides procedures for connecting to a Rapid Eye unit. Chapter 3, Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit, describes working with connections to a Rapid Eye unit. Chapter 4, Unit Configuration Basics, covers maintenance sessions to keep your Rapid Eye system in top condition. Chapter 5, Video Feed Setup, provides procedures for receiving video from cameras, customizing your video settings, and configuring event recording. Chapter 6, Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup, describes programming connected PTZ cameras. Chapter 7, Enhancing Video, provides procedures for configuring scheduling, event recording, motion detection, and tamper detection. It also covers how to use the Rapid Eye storage estimator. Chapter 8, Configuring Other Hardware, covers setting up and using peripheral hardware. Chapter 9, Managing User Accounts, provides procedures for creating user accounts, customizing user rights and security, and removing user accounts. Chapter 10, Security for a Multi-Media System, describes how to secure a Rapid Eye multi-media system. Chapter 11, Multi-Media Alarm Stations, covers the various ways of connecting to an alarm system and making an alarm station operational. Chapter 12, Archival Policies, describes using the Archival policy feature to archive data immediately or on a scheduled basis. Archival logs are also covered. Chapter 13, Touring Many Sites, provides procedures for adding, customizing, and removing site tours. Document V4 Rev A 19 03/10

20 Chapter 14, Alarm Log, describes the alarm log. Chapter 15, Multi Database, covers obtaining a Multi database as well as crating and using Multi databases. Appendix A, End User License Agreement, contains the License Agreement for how Users may use the software. Warranty and Service Subject to the terms and conditions listed on the Product warranty, during the warranty period Honeywell will repair or replace, at its sole option, free of charge, any defective products returned prepaid. In the event you have a problem with any Honeywell product, please call Customer Service at CCTV for assistance or to request a Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) number. Be sure to have the model number, serial number, and the nature of the problem available for the technical service representative. Prior authorization must be obtained for all returns, exchanges, or credits. Items shipped to Honeywell without a clearly identified Return Merchandise Authorization (RMA) number may be refused. Related Documents This document is a necessary prerequisite for understanding the Rapid Eye system. For more information, please refer to the following documents that are available on the Documentation CD that came with your unit: Document title Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Common Operator Guide Rapid Eye Multi-Media DSP Unit Quick Start Guide Description Written for installers and new users to the Honeywell Rapid Eye DVR system, this guide describes how to install a Rapid Eye DVR system to optimize the performance. This guide is written for remote operators of Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVRs. This guide covers using View software to view live and recorded video, search for recorded motion, event, and alarm video, make video clips, and set up site tours. A short guide written for the security operator who uses the software for common daily surveillance tasks, such as live monitoring of events, and after-the-fact forensics searches. This guide is a quick reference for installing and setting up a new Honeywell Rapid Eye DVR system. 20

21 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Typographical Conventions This document uses the following typographical conventions: Font What it represents Example Helvetica Keys on the keyboard Press Ctrl+C Lucida Swiss721 BT Bold Values of editable fields that are mentioned in the body text of the document for reference purposes, but do not need to be entered as part of a procedure Text strings displayed on the screen Syntax Words or characters that you must type. The word enter is used if you must type text and then press the Enter or Return key. Menu titles and other items you select Buttons you click to perform actions The Time from field can be set to Hours:Minutes:Seconds. The message Unauthorized displays. (object) entered Enter the password. Double-click Open from the File menu. Click Exit to close the program. Italic Placeholders: words that vary depending on the situation user name Cross-reference to external source Cross-reference within document Refer to the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. See The Administration of a Rapid Eye System. Document V4 Rev A 21 03/10

22 22

23 The Administration of a Rapid Eye System 1 Start Here Means of Configuring a Rapid Eye Unit You have the option of configuring a Multi-Media DSP unit for CCTV use: Without using a personal computer (PC). By using LocalView, an interface that runs on the Multi-Media DSP unit, you can configure and operate a unit as needed. See About Rapid Eye Active Alert Units and LocalView on page 24 for information on LocalView limitations when using an Active Alert unit. By using a PC running Honeywell Rapid Eye Admin and View software to operate Rapid Eye units and manage system administration. Using either. Designated Personnel: a Multi SA from Your Organization To carry out the setup and supervision of Honeywell Rapid Eye Multi-Media DSP units, your organization should designate a System Administrator (Multi SA) for your Rapid Eye CCTV system. About Using a PC to Operate Rapid Eye Units Using One Rapid Eye Unit, or Many at Once Admin software is used to manage a central database (Multi db) of Rapid Eye Multi-Media DSP units. Older Rapid Eye units (Multi-Media and Multi models) are also supported. View software is used to further configure each of the Multi-Media DSP units for video, audio, POS devices, and so on. View software can connect to many Rapid Eye units at once for configuration, video (live and recorded), alarm sessions, and so on. The information in this guide deals almost exclusively with the use of a PC to configure Rapid Eye units. See the Rapid Eye Multi-Media DSP Unit Quick Start Guide, and LocalView online help for more information on LocalView configuration. Document V4 Rev A 23 03/10

24 The Administration of a Rapid Eye System About Using LocalView Onsite Interface for Operating One Rapid Eye Unit Configuration made using LocalView applies only to the unit on which LocalView is running. For help using LocalView, the interface offers a context-sensitive Help system. Network Connection If a unit is inserted in a common network, LocalView may be needed to enter the unit s IP address. To do so, a Quick Install wizard is available when using LocalView. For more information, refer to the Rapid Eye Multi-Media DSP Unit Quick Start Guide. For Added Security You have the option of preventing the unauthorized use of LocalView by using LocalView passwords to lock the interface. About Rapid Eye Active Alert Units and LocalView Availability of LocalView on V9 DVRs Offering Video Analytics LocalView is now fully supported by Rapid Eye s latest V9 software. Earlier V9 software cannot access full LocalView features; only network configuration is available. Visit to download the latest Rapid Eye software. Availability of LocalView on V8.1 DVRs Offering Video Analytics On Rapid Eye V8.1 units offering Video Analytics, LocalView can only be used to change the unit s network settings. Use the Admin and View applications to monitor video and make all other configuration changes. Using a PC to Install Rapid Eye Software Rapid Eye Admin and View software has been tested for and works on the following Windows Operating Systems: Windows XP Windows 2003 Server Windows Vista Business and Enterprise 24

25 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide If you install Admin and View software on a PC with another operating system (such as Windows Vista Home Edition) you may receive an error message asking you to download and install Microsoft ActiveX Control Pad. To resolve this error, you can: Download and install Microsoft ActiveX Control Pad. Go to (this link will be shown on the Admin View Installation error message). - or - Install Microsoft Office Note The Windows library file, FM20.dll, is required to run Admin and View software on your PC. This file is not re-distributable and therefore must be obtained by installing Microsoft ActiveX Control Pad or Microsoft Office. For details on the distribution and usage of FM20.dll, go to: View Software Only (View Operators) Personnel who operate Multi-Media DSP units to monitor video, respond to alarms, and make video clips only need View software on their PCs. Use the View CD-ROM to install the View application without the Admin application. Admin and View Software (Multi SA) The system administrator of your Rapid Eye system (Multi SA) needs access to Admin software and View software. Use the Admin CD-ROM that came with your unit to install both applications. If security is important to your organization, Honeywell recommends that the Admin CD-ROM be used only on your Multi SA s PC. Installing Rapid Eye Software on Windows 7 ActiveX Control Pad If Rapid Eye Admin and View software is installed on a PC running Windows 7 that does not have the FM20.dll file in folders C:\Windows\System32 or C:\windows\SysWOW64 requires ActiveX Control Pad to be installed on the PC. ActiveX Control Pad will need to be installed before the Rapid Eye Installer will continue installing the Admin and View software (see Figure 1-1). Document V4 Rev A 25 03/10

26 The Administration of a Rapid Eye System Note The Windows library file, FM20.dll, is required to run Admin and View software on your PC. This file is not re-distributable and therefore must be obtained by installing Microsoft ActiveX Control Pad or Microsoft Office. For details on the distribution and usage of FM20.dll, go to Figure 1-1 Rapid Eye Multi-Media 9.0 Requirements to Setup Installing ActiveX Control Pad To install ActiveX Control Pad on a PC running Windows 7, follow the instructions below: 1. Click Links (see Figure 1-1). 2. Click the Http link given in the internet explorer to download the Setuppad.exe file to install ActiveX Control Pad. 3. Once the download is complete, run Setuppad.exe. Setuppad.exe is a win32 cabinet self-extractor file. 4. If a Yes/No dialog box appears, click Yes to continue the ActiveX Control Pad installation. Caution The ActiveX Control Pad installation may fail here (see Figure 1-2). To solve the failure, see Application Error Workaround #1 on page 27, Application Error Workaround #2 on page 29, or Application Error Workaround #3 on page

27 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 1-2 Setuppad.exe Application Error Application Error Workaround #1 If you encounter this failure, Windows 7 may give you the following options (see Figure 1-3): Reinstall using recommended settings, This program installed correctly. Figure 1-3 Program Compatibility Assistant 1. Click Option 1: Reinstalling using recommended settings. The installation will continue with the following steps. 2. If a Yes/No dialog box appears, click Yes to continue the ActiveX Control Pad installation. 3. Click Yes to continue the installation (see Figure 1-4). Document V4 Rev A 27 03/10

28 The Administration of a Rapid Eye System Figure 1-4 End-User License Agreement for Microsoft Software 4. Click Continue (see Figure 1-5). Figure 1-5 Microsoft ActiveX Control Pad Setup 5. If needed, change the installation directory by clicking Change Folder. Then click on the icon next to Complete to complete the installation of the ActiveX Control Pad (see Figure 1-6). 28

29 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 1-6 ActiveX Control Pad Setup Complete Click icon to complete the installation. 6. Once the installation is complete, you will be prompted with a restart message (see Figure 1-7). Figure 1-7 Restart Your Computer to Apply Changes 7. It is recommended that you restart your PC. Click Restart Now. Application Error Workaround #2 Right-click on the downloaded Setuppad.exe file. Select Troubleshoot Compatibility from the list of options that appears. The Select troubleshooting option dialog box appears (see Figure 1-8). Document V4 Rev A 29 03/10

30 The Administration of a Rapid Eye System Figure 1-8 Select Troubleshooting Option Note Use Option A: Using Recommended Settings on page 30 or Option B: Using Troubleshoot Program on page 31 when selecting a troubleshooting option. Option A: Using Recommended Settings 1. Click Try recommended settings (see Figure 1-8). 2. The Windows compatibility mode (see Figure 1-9) may show Windows XP (Service Pack 2). Click Start the program to start the installation of ActiveX Control Pad. 30

31 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 1-9 Program Compatibility Test Settings 3. Follow step 3 to step 7 of Application Error Workaround #1, on page 27. Option B: Using Troubleshoot Program 1. Click Troubleshoot program (see Figure 1-8). 2. Select the first option, The program worked in earlier versions of Windows but won t install or run now, and click Next (see Figure 1-10). Figure 1-10 Program Compatibility Problems Noticed Document V4 Rev A 31 03/10

32 The Administration of a Rapid Eye System 3. Select either Windows XP (Service Pack 2) or Windows XP (Service Pack 3). Click Next (see Figure 1-11). Figure 1-11 Program Compatibility Version of Windows 4. The Windows compatibility mode (see Figure 1-9) may show Windows XP (Service Pack 2). Click Start the program to start the installation of ActiveX Control Pad. 5. Follow step 3 to step 7 of Application Error Workaround #1, on page 27. Application Error Workaround #3 1. Right-click on the downloaded Setuppad.exe file. Select Properties from the list of options that appears. 2. Select the Compatibility tab. 3. Select the first option, to choose Window XP (Service Pack 2) or Windows XP (Service Pack 3). Click OK. 4. Now run the downloaded Setuppad.exe file. 5. Follow step 3 to step 7 of Application Error Workaround #1, on page 27. Running Admin Software on First Use The purpose of Admin software is to manage information in a Multi database (Multi db). On first use, to start Admin software: 1. Double-click the Admin icon ( ). The Rapid Eye Multi-Media Admin - Logon window appears. 2. If Administrator is not in the User ID box, type it in. 32

33 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 3. Click OK. Rapid Eye Central Database A Rapid Eye central database (Multi db) contains information about: Each Rapid Eye site. Network and dial-up communication settings for each Multi-Media DSP unit. See Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit on page 41. Operator accounts. For Users of View software and Admin software, including passwords to user accounts, see Managing User Accounts on page 167. Rapid Eye alarm stations. PCs that receive alarms from Rapid Eye units. See Multi-Media Alarm Stations on page 217. Site tours. Lists of sites in the tours and the time spent at each one. Site tours only work if your organization has two units or more. See Touring Many Sites on page 253. Using View Software for Site Maintenance After units are installed and a Multi db is created, the View application is used to run a Maintenance Session. During a Maintenance Session, the following settings can be changed: Unit Time Zone and Clock. To identify recorded video, it is important to set a unit s time zone and clock. See Unit Time Zone and Clock on page 64. Video. See Video Feed Setup on page 75. Site hardware. See Configuring Other Hardware on page 141. For Questions In-Depth Reference Use the table of contents and index of this guide to locate the information that you need. This guide is also available in a PDF version while running Admin software, and can be viewed using Adobe Reader. Configuration Malfunctions For problems with camera positioning, wiring, and connecting to other hardware, see the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide, or contact the installer of your Multi system. Document V4 Rev A 33 03/10

34 The Administration of a Rapid Eye System Caution The names of places and people, the internet protocol (IP) addresses, and other data are for illustration only and should be used only as guidelines when setting up a Multi system. Calling Honeywell Call Multi technical support for help with training or general problems. Please have the information listed in Table 1-1 ready when you call. For the Honeywell technical support number, see the back cover of this publication. Table 1-1 Customer Information Checklist Information About Your Rapid Eye Multi System See Microsoft Windows Connection type Database Documentation The version used on the PC running Admin (for example, Windows XP). For a LAN connection, the Multi-Media unit s IP address, and so on. If you are using a dial-up connection to the unit, include a list of communication tools used on the PC running Multi software (fax, AOL, CompuServe, the type of modem, the telephone number used, and so on). Indicate whether SQL or Access is used for your Multi database. If you could not find information about the problem in the user guides. Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit on page 41. Obtaining a Multi Database on page 264. System password If in use. System Password on page

35 2 Adding a Site to the Multi Database Use Admin software to add, update or delete a site from the Rapid Eye Multi database. A Rapid Eye site refers to one Rapid Eye unit. Adding a Site Figure 2-1 Right-Clicking in the Right Pane Right-click on the right pane to bring up the menu. 1. Right-click the right-pane on the Sites tab of the Admin application. 2. Click Add on the menu that appears. The Add Site window appears (Figure 2-2). Figure 2-2 Naming a Site 3. Enter a name in the Site Name box. This name is used to identify a unit. 4. You have the option of adding a connection now or later. See Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit on page Click Save and Close. Document V4 Rev A 35 03/10

36 Adding a Site to the Multi Database Icons and Alternate Command Access Right-click an item to display a context-sensitive tool tip. Click Click Click to add an item. to update an item. to delete an item. For a list of keyboard shortcuts, use the Actions menu. Another Site Name LocalView In LocalView, the Site Name field shows the unit s computer name (also known as the network name). In Admin software, the Site Name is not the same. It identifies a unit when using the View application. Figure 2-3 LocalView Site Name In LocalView, the site name field shows the unit s computer name. In Admin, the site name is not the same. System Tab of a Maintenance Session When using a connection on a DHCP-enabled network, the Site Name on the System tab of a Maintenance Session can differ from the Site Name in a site definition. The LocalView Site Name is used in this situation (see Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, page 43). 36

37 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 2-4 Report of a Dynamic IP Assigned by DHCP The site name on the System tab can differ from the site name in a site definition. Updating a Site Double-click a site name. The Update Site dialog appears. Renaming a Site 1. Enter a name in the Site Name box, as needed. 2. Click Save and Close. This updates the name of the Rapid Eye unit on the Sites tab in the View software. Note For connections using DHCP, a different site name is shown on the System tab of a Maintenance Session. Do not change that site name; it serves a different purpose. See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, page 43. Deleting a Site Deleting a site in the Multi central database has no effect on the Rapid Eye unit. The unit continues to record video, send alarms, and so on. Document V4 Rev A 37 03/10

38 Adding a Site to the Multi Database 1. If a system password is not in use, skip to step 2. If a system password is being used, remove it before deleting the site; see Removing a System Password on page Right-click a site name. A menu appears. 3. Click Delete. 4. Confirm the deletion. Note An operator who deletes a site by mistake needs to re-enter that site s information (see Adding a Site on page 35). If a system password has been applied to a Rapid Eye unit and that site is deleted by mistake, you need LVP (see Last Valid Password on page 192). Physical Removal of a Site To physically disconnect a Rapid Eye unit from its means of communications, refer to the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. Other Site-Related Functions Cameras displays an empty list when adding a site after running a Maintenance Session, using View software, Cameras lists the names of the cameras connected to the unit. LVP. The last valid password utility is used only for replacement units, or for sites that are mistakenly deleted while a system password is in use. Caution Do not click LVP. Uninformed use of the LVP utility can make a unit unusable. See Last Valid Password on page 192. Change toggles user management. See User Management on page 169. To set up a connection, see Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit on page 41. To designate alarm stations, see Addressing Alarms to an Alarm Station on page

39 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Grouping Sites in a Folder Grouping sites is optional. Use folders to group sites in an Admin database. Creating a New Folder with Rapid Eye Admin Application 1. Using Admin, select the site tree on the Sites tab. The button replaces. 2. Click. 3. Enter a name for the new folder. 4. Save the name by pressing Enter. Assigning a Site to a Folder Using the mouse, drag a site icon and drop it on a folder. When the mouse button is released, the folder into which the site was dropped is opened. A site can be moved to another folder, but cannot be copied. To assign many sites at once, press Ctrl while selecting sites, and then drag the group of sites to a folder. Renaming a Folder 1. Right-click a folder. A menu appears. 2. Click Update. 3. Enter a name, as needed. 4. Press Enter. Deleting a Folder 1. Right-click a folder. A menu appears. 2. Click Delete, and then Yes to confirm. Document V4 Rev A 39 03/10

40 Adding a Site to the Multi Database Grouping Folders In a Rapid Eye database, folders can be dragged into other folders or back to the root of the database. A folder that holds other folders, displays + or to its left. Double-click a folder to expand or hide its contents. 40

41 3 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Working with Connections Coordinating with the Installer If a connection was set up by the installer and you are accessing the Multi db created by the installer, the connection will be listed under Connections to the Site (see Figure 3-1). One connection, or many, can be setup; for example, to operate a unit through a network, and by local dial-up. Using Admin Software Admin software is used to set up, or modify, a connection to a Rapid Eye unit. Figure 3-1 shows how to add a connection. Add a connection while Updating a Site, page 37, or while Adding a Site, page 35. A connection is made using the View software. Figure 3-1 Adding a Dial-Up Connection to a Site Document V4 Rev A 41 03/10

42 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Setting Up a Connection For a network connection, see Common Network on page 43. For connections through routers, some TCP ports need to remain open in your organization s firewall for connections to Rapid Eye units. Refer to the Firewall Reference in the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. For a Dial-Up Connection, see page 49. Access to Commands Right-clicking an item displays a context-sensitive tool tip. To update an item, select it and click. For example, to make changes to a connection, while Adding a Site, page 35, or Updating a Site, page 37, double-click the connection name. The Update Connection window appears. To delete an item, select it and click. Using LocalView to Modify the IP Address of a Rapid Eye Unit Before setting-up a network connection for remote PCs, the simplest way to change a unit s IP address or to enable DHCP is to use LocalView to access the unit s network settings. Do so by using LocalView to either: Access the network settings of the DVR. See the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. Use the Quick Setup Wizard. Refer to the Rapid Eye Multi-Media DSP Unit Quick Start Guide. Note For dial-up connections, LocalView is not needed. Note Rapid Eye units offering Video Analytics that run V8.1 or older V9 software can ONLY use LocalView to configure network settings. LocalView is now fully supported by Rapid Eye s latest V9 software. Download the latest software at Testing a Connection Use the View application to run a Maintenance Session on the Rapid Eye unit using that connection. See also Connection Report on page

43 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Common Network Use a common network connection on a network without DHCP. For DHCP, see Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol on page 43. Figure 3-2 Setting-Up a Common Network Connection Select to use the existing network connection and enter the static IP address provided by your network administrator While Working with Connections (page 41): 1. In the Add Connection window, click Use Existing Network Connection (see Figure 3-2). 2. In the IP Address field, enter the static IP address that was assigned to the unit by your network administrator or installer. 3. You have the option of entering a Connection Name, to rename the connection. 4. Click Save and Close. For a report, see Connection Report on page 56. Note To set Network Settings using LocalView, ensure that no one is running a remote Maintenance Session on the unit. Rapid Eye Active Alert units that run V8.1 or older V9 software can ONLY access network settings on LocalView. Rapid Eye DVRs with the latest V9 software have full LocalView access. Download the latest software at Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Use of DHCP with DNS is assumed. For DHCP without DNS, see page Use LocalView to enable DHCP on the Rapid Eye unit. See Figure 3-3. By default, the Site Name in LocalView shows REM[hyphen][unit serial number] and includes the leading zeroes. The unit serial number of the Rapid Eye unit is also printed on a sticker affixed to the unit. Document V4 Rev A 43 03/10

44 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit You have the option of changing the Site Name. If you do so, make a note of the new site name, for use in step 4 of this procedure. Figure 3-3 LocalView Network Settings: DHCP Note In LocalView, the Site Name field shows what can also be called a unit s computer name or network name in the Admin software. The Site Name assigned in Admin is a label to identify a unit when using the View application. 2. Click Refresh. Using the Admin software, start Working with Connections, page In the Add Connection window, select Use Existing Network Connection (see Figure 3-4). 4. In the IP Address field, enter the site name used in LocalView, as indicated in step 1 of this procedure. 5. You have the option of changing the connection name ([site name] -> Network), to indicate the use of a dynamic IP Address, by entering the Connection Name. For example, Figure 3-4 shows that DHCP was added. 6. Click Save and Close. For a report, see Connection Report on page 56. Figure 3-4 Inputting the Site Name from LocalView into a DHCP Connection Entered by the operator Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Without DNS While Working with Connections, page 41: 44

45 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 1. Use LocalView to enable DHCP on the Rapid Eye unit (see Figure 3-3). The Site Name is not used in this type of connection. 2. Click Refresh. 3. Make a note of the IP Address assigned by DHCP to the unit. The IP Address is needed for use in step 4 and step 5 of this procedure. 4. Using Admin, add a connection as you would for a Common Network, page 43. In the IP Address field, enter the IP Address used in LocalView, obtained in step Contact the administrator of your network to reserve the IP address obtained in step 3. DHCP can change an address if it is not reserved, compromising future attempts to connect to the unit. DHCP Reference Timeout on Network without DHCP If DHCP is unavailable on your network, a unit s request for DHCP services times-out after two minutes. DNS Registration The DNS registration of DHCP leases is made with the DNS specified by the DHCP server, and network card properties. Contact your organization s Network administrator to obtain the proper primary DNS entry for your local client if the name is not resolved. Leased IP Address To see the IP address that DHCP leased to the unit, use View to run a Maintenance Session, and then click the System tab. See Figure 3-5. Figure 3-5 Report of a Dynamic IP Assigned by DHCP to a Rapid Eye Unit IP address assigned to the unit by DHCP Document V4 Rev A 45 03/10

46 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Note Changing a unit s Use DHCP or Site Name while operating a unit locks out remote operators using the network connection to the unit until a new working connection definition is made. Configuring DNS in DHCP, Using Microsoft Server 2000 (or 2003) 1. Using Microsoft Windows, use the DHCP MMC. 2. Open the local DHCP Server Properties window (see Figure 3-6). 3. On the DNS (Dynamic Network Service) tab, select Always update DNS. 4. Select Enable updates for DNS clients that do not support dynamic update. 5. Restart the DHCP service. Figure 3-6 DNS Setup in Microsoft Windows Using an Internet Router for Network Address Translation 46 Step 1: Use a Router s Mappings in a Rapid Eye Connection While Working with Connections, page 41: 1. Obtain the outside IP address of the internet router from the network administrator or from the installer. 2. In the [Add/Update] Connection window, select Use Existing Network Connection. 3. In the IP Address field, enter the internet router s outside IP address (see Figure 3-7). 4. Enable Use Network Address Translation. 5. Match the Session value, under Source Port, to the source port values in the router s NAT map (or vice-versa). A value greater than 65,533 cannot be used for the Session source port. The Maintenance and FTP source ports are populated automatically. For an example of a NAT map, see Table 3-1.

47 READY ALARM HDD READY AL ARM HDD TM TM Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 6. You have the option of indicating that the connection is to a router, rather than a unit, by entering the Connection Name. 7. Click Save and Close. For a report, see Connection Report on page 56. Figure 3-7 Connection Settings for NAT Use of an Internet Router PC running Admin and View WAN Use the router s inside IP for the Gateway of each unit. Rapid Eye unit #1 Assign the router s outside IP to the IP Address of the connection. Values for the routing map, in the router, for unit #2. Rapid Eye unit #2 Router: Outside IP a Table 3-1 Router Mappings for NAT Operation of Rapid Eye Units Router: Destination Ports Rapid Eye Unit IP a Source Ports a (constant) b Use the router IP in the connection s IP Address for Rapid Eye unit #1 on Rapid Eye unit #1 Set to Session value, in -> Use the constant value the connection, 49,100 a for Rapid Eye: 10,000 Set to Maintenance d value, 49, c -> 10, Set to FTP d value, 49,102 -> Use the router IP in the connection s IP Address for Rapid Eye unit #2 on Rapid Eye unit #2 Set to Session value, in -> Map to Rapid Eye the connection, 49,200 a constant value: 10,000 Set to Maintenance d value, 49, > 10, c Set to FTP d value, 49,202 -> a The values for IP addresses and ports depend on system administrator of the remote LAN. b All Rapid Eye units have the same port values, and these cannot be changed. c Each unit needs a unique IP Address. d The Rapid Eye Multi Admin may need to indicate to the system administrator of the remote LAN that the Maintenance and FTP values are increments of the Session value, in a connection. See Figure 3-7. Document V4 Rev A 47 03/10

48 READY ALARM HDD TM Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Step 2: Match a Unit Gateway to the Internet Router Inside IP Change the IP Address of a unit onsite, using LocalView. Set the IP gateway on the Rapid Eye unit to the inside IP of an internet router. Use the View software to see a Rapid Eye unit s IP remotely by running a Maintenance Session and clicking the System tab. Figure 3-8 Unit IP for Network Connection Using NAT A unit s IP address on a remote LAN The router s inside IP is used for the Rapid Eye unit s Gateway Note Do not change a unit IP address or IP gateway while operating a unit connected using NAT; this locks out remote operators using that network connection to the unit until the change is mapped in the internet router. Direct Connection to a Standalone PC A standalone PC running Admin and View software is connected to one unit, by using a network crossover cable. Figure 3-9 Using a Direct Connection to Operate a Multi-Media Unit Rapid Eye Multi-Media unit Network crossover cable PC running Admin and View 1. Using Microsoft Windows, set the IP Address on the PC s network card to an address on the same subnet as the Rapid Eye unit (as shown in Table 3-2). To change a PC s IP address, see your Microsoft Windows documentation. 2. Using the Admin software, add a connection as for a Common Network (page 43). 48

49 READY ALARM HDD TM Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Table 3-2 IP Defaults Used by Multi-Media Units Point Rapid Eye Unit (Default Address) Operator PC (Network Card) IP Address Subnet Mask Dial-Up Connection Figure 3-10 Adding a Dial-Up Connection 1. Select Use Dial-up Networking. Leave the Country Code at (dialing same country). 2. Enter the unit Area Code (City Code) and Phone Number. 3. You have the option of changing [site name] -> Dialup by entering a new Connection Name (see Figure 3-10). 4. Click Save and Close. For a report, see Connection Report on page 56. Figure 3-11 Dial-Up Connection POTS or ISDN View operator s station Modem Modem Rapid Eye Multi-Media unit Note If a prefix number is needed to access an outside line, set the prefix the extra telephone keystroke such as a 9 or an 8 in Microsoft Window s Telephony program. Document V4 Rev A 49 03/10

50 READY AL ARM HDD TM Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Irregular Use of Area Codes Figure 3-12 Dial-up from a longdistance area code: Can the Multi-Media site be reached using a local call across area codes? Irregular Use of Area Codes Dial-up from a local area code: Is a long-distance call needed to reach the Multi-Media unit, within the area code? POTS or ISDN Irregular use of area codes occurs when making: A long distance call within one area code A local call to another area code You can easily deal with these scenarios (see Figure 3-12) by using Admin to modify or add another dial-up connection. If a prefix number is needed to access an outside line, set the prefix the extra keystroke such as a 9 or an 8 in Window s Telephony program. Forcing a Long-Distance Dial-Up Call Using a Local Area Code 1. While Working with Connections, page 41, click Use Dial-up Networking. 2. In the Connection Name box, you have the option of appending a few words such as force long distance call. It makes sense to do so, to avoid confusing operators of View. 3. Enter the telephone number needed to reach the unit in the Phone Number field, including country and long distance codes. 4. Leave the Country Code and Area Code (City Code) boxes empty. Steps 4 and 5 trick Windows Dial-up Networking into making a local call across different area codes. Click Save and Close. An Add Site/Update Site window appears. 5. Click Close. Look for the Primary Connection column on the Sites tab. The first letter of dial-up (d) appears in parentheses, followed by the telephone number used to connect to the Multi-Media unit. Forcing a Local Dial-Up Call Across Area Codes 1. While Working with Connections, page 41, click Use Dial-up Networking. 2. In the Connection Name box, append a suggestive name such as force local call. 3. Enter only the telephone number needed to reach the unit in the Phone Number box. 50

51 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 4. Leave the Country Code and Area Code (City Code) boxes empty. Steps 4 and 5 trick Windows Dial-up Networking into making a local call across different area codes. 5. An Add Site/Update Site window appears. 6. Click Close. Look for the Primary Connection column on the Sites tab. The first letter of dial-up (d) appears in parentheses, followed by the telephone number used to connect to the Multi-Media unit. Dial-Up Technical Note Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) During a dial-up connection, temporary TCP/IP network communications are established between the Multi-Media unit and the PC. These default point-to-point protocol (PPP) Internet Protocol (IP) settings can be changed should they conflict with other network devices (printers, scanners and so on). See Setting Up a Modem Serial Device on page 152. Adding an Alarm Station Should you plan to add one or more alarm stations using dial-up connections, Honeywell recommends that area codes be included in all telephone numbers. Dial-up connections between a Multi-Media unit and an alarm station running View are explained in Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 224. Offering Many Dial-Up Connections to the Same Unit More than one dial-up connection to the same Multi-Media unit may be needed. Table 3-3 lists configurations, and the number of connections for best results. For example, Windows Dial-Up Networking can give unwanted results when some View operators are inside the Multi-Media unit s local calling area and others are outside. Telephone companies can also force a Multi SA to setup an irregular local call (a local call across area codes). Table 3-3 Multiple Dial-Up Connections Decision Chart Operator PC (Location) Call to Unit (Type) Procedure (Name, Page) Number of Connections In unit calling area local Dial-Up Connection, page 49 1 irregular long distance: same area code irregular long distance: local call Irregular Use of Area Codes, page 50 Dial-Up Connection, page 49 and Irregular Use of Area Codes, page outside unit calling area long distance Dial-Up Connection, page 49 1 irregular local call: not requiring area code Irregular Use of Area Codes, page 50 1 Document V4 Rev A 51 03/10

52 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Table 3-3 Multiple Dial-Up Connections Decision Chart (cont d) Operator PC (Location) Call to Unit (Type) Procedure (Name, Page) Number of Connections some in, some out of unit calling area permutations of all of the above Dial-Up Connection, page 49 and Irregular Use of Area Codes, page 50 2~4 in another country international long distance Dial-Up Connection, page 49 1 some out of site country all permutations Dial-Up Connection, page 49 and Irregular Use of Area Codes, page 50 2~5 Many Connections to a Unit Depending on your organizational needs, there can be a mix of network and dial-up connections. One dial-up connection can be simultaneous with many network connections. TIP! Setting up many connections is optional. Primary Connection You can change the order by dragging an item to a different place in the list. The connection that you list first is the primary connection. The primary connection can be either a network or dial-up connection. Figure 3-13 List of Connections to a Site Change the connection order by dragging an item to a different place in the list. The connection listed first is the primary connection. 52

53 READY ALARM HDD TM Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide RAS Server There are two ways of connecting to Multi-Media units when using a Remote Access Service (RAS) server. You can connect to: Only one RAS-dependent unit at a time. A RAS server can be transparent to users of View by adding RAS server information to the site definition. This is ideal when there is only one Multi-Media unit on the network using the RAS server. See Figure Many units at once. Users dial-up the RAS server before using View. This is discussed in Using a RAS Server Before Connecting to Units on page 55. For both cases, a RAS is set up on a server that can access networked Rapid Eye Multi-Media units. Planning to Connect to One Unit at a Time You can use View to automatically connect to the site. A user has to end sessions with the unit before using another unit on that same network. From a security point of view, the View operator does not need to know the RAS username and password. A Connection that Behaves Like Dial-Up A session request behaves just as if you had reached the site s Multi-Media unit by connecting directly to it by dial-up. Such a connection behaves as if it were a simple dial-up connection. Two dial-up sites cannot be used at the same time with one modem. Sessions to a dial-up site have to be closed before using another dial-up site. What Your Network Administrator Needs Multi sessions (live, retrieval and alarm) are sent to port 10,000. This port should be left open in your organization s firewall for the sockets used by Multi. Figure 3-14 Transparently Connecting to a Rapid Eye Through a RAS Server Operator s station, running the View aplication POTS or ISDN Modem Modem Note When overriding PPP in the definition of a site, the other network s RAS server is transparent to an operator. The site responds as it would with a dial-up connection. RAS server, on another LAN Rapid Eye Multi-Media unit Document V4 Rev A 53 03/10

54 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Setting a Connection to a RAS Server 1. While Working with Connections, page 41, enter the Multi-Media unit s IP address in the IP Address box. 2. Click Use Dial-up Networking. The connection suffix changes to dial-up. 3. Change or leave the Country Code used to reach the RAS server by telephone, as needed. 4. Enter the RAS server s Area Code (City Code) and Phone Number obtained from your network administrator (also mentioned in Adding a Site, page 35). Figure 3-15 RAS Server Telephone Number and PPP Information TIP! If your telephone exchange needs a prefix number (an extra telephone key stroke such as a 9 or an 8) to access an outside line, set this in the Windows Telephony program used by the PC. For local calls that span area codes or long distance calls within one area code, see Irregular Use of Area Codes, page Select the Override PPP Settings checkbox (see Figure 3-15). If a connection is being added, a PPP is appended to the connection name. You have the option of either: Entering another name in the Connection Name box, such as adding RAS. - or - Leaving the connection name in the Connection Name box as it was automatically set by Admin. 6. Enter the PPP User Name and Password; these are obtained from the network administrator responsible for the network RAS server. 7. Enter the PPP Password a second time. 8. Click Save and Close. The Add/Update Connection window appears. 9. Click Close. The new connection appears in the tab s Primary Connection column. The first letter of PPP (p) appears in parentheses, followed by the telephone number to connect to a RAS server; then by (n) and the IP address used to connect to the Multi-Media unit. See also Figure

55 READY ALARM HDD TM READY ALARM HDD TM Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide TIP! A Multi-Media unit s own dial-up PPP username and password is used by default. Entering a PPP username and password in a site definition makes View use your entries for PPP instead of the Multi-Media unit s during a dial-up connection. Caution Technical warning for PPP: Changing the Rapid Eye Multi phone book entry in a dial-up program is ineffective. The phonebook entry is overwritten by data in the Multi database every time an automatic connection to a RAS server is attempted. Using a RAS Server Before Connecting to Units Figure 3-16 Connecting to a RAS Server Before Running View Operator s station, running the View application POTS or ISDN Modem Modem Note When connecting to a remote access server (RAS) before running View, remote sites respond as if on the operator s LAN, more slowly due to the dial-up connection. RAS server, on another LAN Rapid Eye Multi-Media sites on a LAN The two ways of using dial-up to connect to a Remote Access Service (RAS) server are: With many units at once. A View operator, using a dial-up program of his/her choice, dials-up the RAS server before using View. The definitions of Rapid Eye sites do not contain RAS or PPP information. The sites are meant to behave as if they were on a View operator s LAN. See Figure Using only one RAS-dependent unit at a time. See RAS Server on page 53. In both cases, a RAS server has been set up on a server that accesses Rapid Eye Multi-Media unit(s) on a network. Planning to Connect to Many Units For access to a RAS server in front of Rapid Eye sites on a network, the RAS server information is not recorded in the Multi-Media sites definitions. The RAS information must be known by the user of the PC and recorded in a Microsoft dial-up application. The user must use the dial-up utility to connect to the RAS server before using View to start a session at the site. Document V4 Rev A 55 03/10

56 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Preparation Use Admin to define the sites as network units (see Setting Up a Connection, page 42). You can then use a modem to connect to these sites using the Microsoft dial-up application to connect to the RAS server. Using an Outside Line Requires a Prefix Number A prefix is an extra telephone keystroke such as a 9 or an 8 that you should set in the Windows Telephony program running on the PC. What Your Network Administrator Needs Multi sessions (live, retrieval and alarm) are sent to port 10,000. This port should be left open in your organization s firewall for the sockets used by Multi. Connection Report Figure 3-17 Site Tab Primary Connections Report Report of unit s primary connection In the Admin application, the site tab reports the primary connection to a Rapid Eye site (see Figure 3-17). Connection Codes The codes used to identify the primary connection are listed in Table 3-4. Table 3-4 Automatic Connection Names For a Rapid Eye Site Site Tab Report Automatic Name Connection (n) IP address [site name] -> Network network (d) telephone number [site name] -> Dial-up dial-up (p) telephone number (n) IP address [site name] -> PPP dial-up to RAS 56

57 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Changing the Primary Connection If many connections to a unit are set up, drag the most commonly used connection to the first position in the Connections to the Site list, while Adding a Site, page 35, or Updating a Site on page 37. Addressing Alarms to an Alarm Station Prioritizing alarm stations is optional and applies only if many Rapid Eye alarm stations were created by your organization s Multi SA. Cascading Alarm Stations and Priority Your Multi system can have one or many alarm stations. With many alarm stations, cascading is automatic and customizable. You can specify which alarm stations your Multi-Media units try to reach first. Cascade Sequence To insure against alarm station unavailability, you can: Assign more than one alarm station to a unit Set the order in which alarm stations are called. Preparations Before you prioritize alarm stations: Create Alarm stations using the Alarm Station tab. See Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports on page 218. Set events to trigger alarms. An alarm station is ineffective until events are set to trigger alarms. See Events Defined on page 205. Sequencing Site Alarm Stations 1. While Adding a Site, page 35, the alarm station(s) that the site can call are listed. See the Report Alarms to these Alarm Stations pane of the Add/Update Site window. 2. To change the order of an alarm station, drag its name to the position that you want it to have in the list. 3. Click Save and Close to finish updating the site definition. The Admin window reappears, listing your system sites on the Site tab. 4. Use View to update security for the Multi-Media unit. See Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit on page 143. Document V4 Rev A 57 03/10

58 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Quickly Assigning a Site to Many Alarm Stations Using the Update Site Windows The Update Site window can be used as a shortcut to add a site to many alarm stations. Alternatively, each Multi Alarm Station can be opened and a site added to each (as explained in Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports on page 218). 1. Using Admin, click the Sites tab. 2. While Adding a Site, page 35, click in the Report Alarms to these Alarms Stations pane. The Add/Delete Stations to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box appears, displaying a list of alarm stations created on the Alarm Station tab. Stations already assigned to the site that you are editing are listed in the Report Alarms to column. 3. Select one or many station names in the column of available Alarm Stations. 4. To move the station names to the Report Alarms to column, either: Click the right-arrow (>). - or - Double-click the stations that you want to move. 5. Click Save and Close. The Add/Update Site dialog box reappears, listing the names of the alarm stations in the Report Alarms pane. The site is also added to the site list of each alarm station that you have assigned. 6. You have the option of ending the site edit. Click Save and Close. The Admin window reappears, listing your system s sites on the Site tab. 7. You need to use the View application to update security for the Multi-Media unit. See Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit on page 143. Setting a Site to Not Report Alarms to a Specific Station 1. Using Admin, click the Sites tab. 2. While Adding a Site, page 35, click in the Report Alarms to these Alarms Stations pane. The Add/Delete Stations to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box appears, displaying a list of alarm stations. Stations already assigned to the site are listed the Report Alarms to column. 3. To move alarm stations to the available Alarm Stations column, either: Select one or many station names in the Report Alarms to column; then click the left-arrow (<). - or - Double-click the alarm stations that you want to move. 4. Click Save and Close. The Add/Update Site dialog box reappears, listing the alarm stations in the Report Alarms pane. 5. You have the option of ending the site edit. To do so, click Save and Close. The Admin window reappears, listing your system s sites on the Site tab. 6. You need to use the View application to update security for the Multi-Media unit. See Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit on page

59 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station The Multi SA may need to customize the telephone number used to reach a Multi-Media Alarm Station. Preparation An alarm station s telephone number in the site definition is a copy of the number in the alarm station definition. Before customizing a dial-up connection, consider if the alarm station definition is correct, as explained in Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 224, and Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 227. Customizing the Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station 1. While creating or updating a site, select an alarm station. 2. In the Report Alarms to these Alarm Stations pane, click. See Figure The Update Station to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box appears. 3. Modify the telephone number so that it is as one would dial it. You have the option of: Removing/adding long distance country and area codes, OR Entering a prefix and commas, as needed to dial out of a site s exchange. 4. Click Save and Close. The modified telephone number appears in the Connection Method column in the Report Alarms to these Alarm Stations pane. An asterisk is added in parenthesis (*) to the entry s display, to indicate customization. 5. Update security for the unit. See Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit on page 143. Document V4 Rev A 59 03/10

60 Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit Figure 3-18 Customizing an Alarm Station Telephone Number Cancelling the Customization of a Telephone Number 1. While creating or updating a site, an alarm station with a customized telephone number shows an asterisk (*) in the entry s display. 2. In the Report Alarms to these Alarm Stations pane, click. The Update Station to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box appears (see Figure 3-18). 3. Click Default in the Update Station to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box. The telephone number returns to the one entered in the Alarm Station definition. 4. Update security for the unit. See Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit on page

61 4 Unit Configuration Basics Maintenance Session A Maintenance session is used to check the operation of a Rapid Eye Multi-Media unit and configure some of the unit s options. The View application is used to run a Maintenance session on a unit, not Admin. The Maintenance session is discussed in this Guide because the session is designed to be used by the system administrator (the Multi SA) designated by your organization, to maintain and supervise your Rapid Eye System. The Maintenance Session is used to configure: System hardware. Including cameras, multi audio, motion detection, scheduling, and other hardware connected to the unit. Security. Events that trigger alarms and other security settings. See also Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit on page 143. Scope of a Maintenance Session A Maintenance Session involves only the unit on which it runs. Use View to open a Maintenance Session on more than one unit at a time. Two operators cannot each run a Maintenance Session on the same unit. While a Maintenance Session runs, the unit s LocalView interface continues to display video but is unavailable for unit operation. A Maintenance Session is also used to: Make a site operational. Running a Maintenance Session is needed before operators can start using a site. See Making a Site Operational on page 63. Obtain a unit s statistics. See Hardware Report, page 155 and Obtaining Unit Statistics on page 139. Starting a Maintenance Session 1. Log on to View, using a central database. See Starting View in the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide for more information. 2. Using View, select a site on the Sites list to perform maintenance on. Document V4 Rev A 61 03/10

62 Unit Configuration Basics 3. To start a Maintenance Session, either: Right-click the site name to select Maintain from the shortcut menu. Select the site, then click the Maintain command on the Actions menu. Select the site, then click on the toolbar. 4. If the Connections dialog box appears, choose the network/dial-up connection that you need and click OK. The maintenance tabs appear. Site Feedback During maintenance, messages appear in the Feedback drop-down list at the bottom fo the Maintenance window. The messages System operational and Time zone updated indicate that you can proceed with the Maintenance session. For a list of messages, see Feedback Box Reference on page 73. Reboot Button in Maintenance Window The Reboot button reboots the Multi-Media unit, not your PC. Technical Note for Network Administrators For connections over a network, Multi Maintenance Sessions are sent to port 10,001. Leave this port open in your organization s firewall for sockets used by Multi. For other ports used by Multi, see the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. Support for Older Unit Models Setup and Maintenance Older-model Rapid Eye units are supported. If an older unit lacks a newer feature, the feature is not shown in a Maintenance Session. The interface appears as it did in the last available upgrade for older units. For example, a Recording tab does not appear when running a Maintenance Session on an older-model unit. Instead, the Video tab is used for the settings of recorded video. Availability of LocalView on V9 DVRs Offering Video Analytics LocalView is now fully supported by Rapid Eye s latest V9 software. Earlier V9 software cannot access full LocalView features; only network configuration is available. Visit to download the latest Rapid Eye software. 62 Availability of LocalView on V8.1 DVRs Offering Video Analytics On Rapid Eye V8.1 units offering Video Analytics, LocalView can only be used to change the unit s network settings. Use the Admin and View applications to monitor video and make all other configuration changes.

63 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Using Older Documentation For the setup and operation of older-model units, Honeywell recommends referring to the user guides that came with those units, as needed. Adobe PDF files of these older guides are available from Honeywell technical support. See the back cover of this guide for contact information. Making a Site Operational A Multi-Media unit is working within minutes of being turned on. There are a few crucial steps needed to make your Rapid Eye site an outstanding security tool. First Maintenance Session You run the first Maintenance Session at a site after: Adding that site to a Multi central database. See Adding a Site on page 35. Upgrading a Multi unit. Site Registration When the first Maintenance Session runs, the validity of the communication data to the site can be checked. If correct, the site is registered automatically, making it available to View operators who have the right to use it. Figure 4-1 Multi-Media Unit Serial Number and Software Version The result of registering a site Document V4 Rev A 63 03/10

64 Unit Configuration Basics The Multi-Media unit has a serial number and a software version. These numbers are displayed on the System tab (as illustrated in Figure 4-1) and on the Hardware tab. TIP! Someone has to run a Maintenance Session on a unit before he or any other View operator can run Live Sessions. One Maintenance Session is enough to register a site for all users of that site. Caution Honeywell recommends setting a unit to the correct time zone, time, and date before using the unit in your organization s operations. Security Considerations A Multi-Media unit is working within minutes of being turned on, however there are crucial steps to make your Rapid Eye unit a useful security tool: Set the time zone and time. See Unit Time Zone and Clock on page 64. Incorrect time stamps can make the identification of video impossible. Check the camera configuration. See Cameras on page 75. Cameras are detected automatically. You need to specify the drivers for PTZ (pan, tilt, zoom) cameras. Test the alarms. For events set to trigger alarms, test if these events give you the anticipated results. See Events Defined on page 205. Honeywell recommends using a system password. Without a system password, your Rapid Eye sites can be accessed by Admin users in other organizations. To avoid this situation, see Securing a Site on page 69. Scheduling Options By default, video is recorded all the time and alarms can be triggered at any time. You have the option of having cameras and alarms disabled on days and at times of your choice. To do so, see Scheduling Configuration on page 117. Unit Time Zone and Clock Crucial Settings Setting the Time Zone and System Clock on Multi-Media units is crucial to the correct identification of video. These settings also govern the scheduled recording and scheduled alarm features. Be sure to set the proper time and time zone. 64 Time Zone Your Multi SA needs to indicate in which time zone each Multi-Media unit is installed. Make this setting whether a Multi-Media unit s clock is set manually or automatically.

65 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Caution The unit Time Zone is crucial for correctly reporting on the video of events. Setting the Time Zone of a Multi-Media Unit 1. Using View, select a unit to set the time zone with. 2. Start a Maintenance Session. 3. Click the Time tab (see Figure 4-2). Figure 4-2 Unit Time Using SNTP as a Reference Using SNTP to automatically update the time Units need you to specify the time zone 4. If the zone indicated in the Time Zone field is incorrect, click the drop-down arrow in the box. A list of all time zones appears. 5. Scroll the list as needed to find the time zone in which the unit is installed. The time zone is set immediately; there is no need to reboot the unit. TIP! The time zone is set on a unit-by-unit basis. Repeat this procedure for every unit in your system. Table 4-1 Operator PC a Effect of Time Zone Setting on Display and Clips Unit Time Time Shown c : Zone b Sessions and Clips Showing 4:00 PM Eastern Time Showing 4:00 PM Eastern Time Eastern Time UTC - 05:00 Pacific Time UTC - 08:00 Show unit time and recorded video as 4 PM Show unit time and recorded video as 1 PM a To set the time zone on an operator s PC, use the Control Panel in Microsoft Windows. See also the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide, Selecting a Time Reference. b Set using View, while running a Maintenance Session. Document V4 Rev A 65 03/10

66 Unit Configuration Basics c Display can be changed for a session s duration to LTZ (the local time zone set on your PC), RTZ (a camera s remote time zone) or to UTC (universal time zone). See the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide. Conflicting Time Zones A Multi-Media unit s time zone can be changed without the knowledge of a View operator. It can be done at the unit, using LocalView, or through another Multi-Media database (Multi db). The View operator s next attempt to access the site is interrupted by a message (shown in Figure 4-3). The message also appears for areas within a time zone that have different rules for daylight savings time. For example: Indiana (East) in the Eastern time zone (GMT-5:00) differs from Eastern Time (US Canada), also GMT-5:00. To respond to a notification of conflicting time zones, select the time zone that indicates where the Multi-Media unit is installed and then click OK. Figure 4-3 Different Rules May Apply for DST in One Time Zone Setting the Clock Automatically with SNTP See your IT Administrator to find out if a Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) server is in use. Multi-Media units on a LAN can benefit from the automatic setting. It is accurate to within a fraction of a second. 1. Obtain the IP address of an SNTP server. You have the option of also obtaining the address of an alternate server. 2. Using View, select a unit whose clock needs to be set. 3. Start a Maintenance Session. 4. Click the Time tab. 5. If Automatic is not selected, click it. The Time tab appears as in Figure Select the Primary SNTP Server box and enter the IP address of the SNTP server obtained in step 1. You have the option of indicating an alternate in the Alternate SNTP Server box. 7. Click Refresh. The Multi-Media unit contacts the SNTP server and synchronizes the Multi clock to the SNTP time. 66

67 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 8. You have the option of either ending the maintenance session or continuing to configure the unit. See Ending Maintenance on page 71. Auto-Synch Statistics The statistics that appear are for Multi technical support, if they make a service call to your site. The Auto-synch statistics do not apply to a clock set to Manual. Last Synchronized at shows the last time that the SNTP server was used. Synchronization to SNTP occurs at least every 24 hours. Time Difference displays the accuracy of synchronization. Setting the System Clock Manually A Multi SA can synchronize the clock of a Rapid Eye Multi-Media unit using a PC s clock as reference. This is more useful for units connected only by dial-up, but can also be used for units on a LAN. TIP! Check/set the clock on an operator s PC before setting a unit clock manually. Adjusting the Clock on a PC Running Rapid Eye Software To adjust the PC time, date and time zone: 1. Click Start Control Panel Date and Time. 2. Check the accuracy of the time and the time zone on the PC and adjust it as needed. Using a PC Clock to Set a Unit Clock Manually 1. Using the View application, select a Multi-Media unit whose clock needs to be set. 2. Start a Maintenance Session. 3. Click the Time tab. If Manual is not selected, click it. The Time tab appears as in Figure Click Set Multi unit s clock. Document V4 Rev A 67 03/10

68 Unit Configuration Basics Figure 4-4 Manually Setting a Multi-Media Unit Clock Message indicating that the unit time and PC time are NOT synchronized. Click to synchronize the Multi-Media unit s time with your PC. Message indicating that the unit time and PC time ARE synchronized. Synchronizing Time Over Dial-Up Due to the nature of dial-up connections, the Multi-Media unit s time may still be off by a few seconds after synchronizing it. Adjusting the Time on an Operational Unit Caution If a unit s clock is set incorrectly (more than +/- a few seconds), Honeywell recommends setting a unit to the correct time (and date) as soon as possible. Human Error or Unauthorized Use Leaving the clock set to an incorrect time (more than +/- a few seconds) for a long length of time (an hour or more) on an operational unit, can create problems for operators who need to retrieve video when the clock is set correctly. During the span of incorrect time, video is not erased and continues to be recorded; however, two instances of video can be created at the same timestamps. Using the Seek or Jump controls shows the video of the first instance only. The second instance of video can only be played through or fast-forwarded. 68

69 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Correcting the Clock Whole Hours: Time Reference Check the Time Reference setting. If the clock of a unit in another time zone shows a time that is off by whole hours, the clock could be set to the correct time, but is using an optional display (GMT, operator s time zone, unit s time zone). Refer to the Selecting a Time Reference in Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide. Whole Hours: Time Zone Check the Time Zone setting. If the clock of a unit in another time zone shows a time that is off by whole hours, the clock could be set to the correct time, but is set to an incorrect time zone. See Unit Time Zone and Clock on page 64. Setting the Clock to the Correct Time A short span of incorrect time. If a unit s clock shows the wrong time (more than +/- a few seconds) for a short time period (a few seconds, a few minutes, up to an hour), you need to reset the clock correctly; either automatically or manually. A Follow-Up May Be Needed: Clearing Storage If the clock remains set to an incorrect time (more than +/- a few seconds) for a considerable length of time (many hours, days or weeks) it can become inconvenient and confusing for an operator who needs to play through that recorded video. For such an error: Set the clock correctly; either automatically or manually. Consider Clearing Storage, page 141. Securing a Site Securing the Multi System After Making a Site Operational, page 63, Honeywell recommends that you secure your Rapid Eye site by adding: A system password. Use Admin to set a system password to protect your sites from unauthorized accounts. See System Password on page and - A password for the Administrator account. Used to help prevent uncontrolled configuration of Multi-Media units, accidental clearing of a unit s storage, or unwanted removal of the system password. See Administrator Password on page 195. Document V4 Rev A 69 03/10

70 Unit Configuration Basics Be sure to update security after making these changes (see Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit on page 143). Rebooting a Unit 1. Start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Please wait until the System operational message appears. 2. Click Reboot. Reasons to Reboot a Multi-Media Unit Use of the Reboot button does not damage the unit. However, it does interrupt the recording of video for a few moments and should not be used unless Multi technical support instructs an operator to perform a reboot. A reboot can be traced to the operator who performed it. See Tracing Events on page 210. Caution The Reboot button is for rebooting a Multi-Media unit. Do not mistakenly reboot your PC when prompted to click the Reboot button in the Maintenance window. Automatic Reboot of Multi-Media Unit A Multi-Media unit reboots by itself when: Changes to a modem serial device are applied. Modem settings are explained in Setting Up a Modem Serial Device on page 152. System files are upgraded, as explained in System Files on page 144. Power to the unit is interrupted and restored. The system s video signal is changed between NTSC and PAL. Remote View Software Upgrade To upgrade the Remote View software on your PC, you will need to download the latest software release from the Honeywell website at: Follow this procedure to complete the upgrade: 1. Start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Wait until the System operational message appears. 2. Select the System tab in the Maintenance window. 70

71 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 3. Click Upgrade. You are warned that all users will be disconnected from the unit. Click Yes to continue. Figure 4-5 Remote View Software Upgrade 4. Click Browse. 5. Find and Open the software upgrade file you have downloaded. 6. Click Next. The message that opens describes the exact version that you are upgrading to. Click Next to start the upgrade. 7. The unit will reboot automatically once the upgrade has completed. Maintenance Reference Ending Maintenance To end a Maintenance Session, close the Maintenance window. Other actions can also close sessions: Click, OR Click Disconnect on the Actions menu, OR Close View Document V4 Rev A 71 03/10

72 Unit Configuration Basics Using Apply The Apply button is used after changes have been made to the IP address and other network settings, including DHCP, motion mask, and response rules. If the Apply button is active and you select another tab, the button remains active. Maintenance Topics Table 4-2 Maintenance Reference Topics Topic (alphabetical) Important for Action See Cameras video configuration page 75 Clearing Storage video archive action page 141 Customer Data and Customer Device Events log/alarms configuration page 157 Dial-Up Connection dial-up action page 49 Events Defined alarms action page 205 Feedback Box Reference system files report page 73 Hardware Report Honeywell report page 155 Motion Detection motion search configuration/action page 127 Multi Audio audio configuration page 162 Obtaining Unit Statistics Honeywel report page 139 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup video-ptz configuration page 95 Setting Up a Modem Serial Device System Tab in a Maintenance Session dial-up connection configuration page 152 LAN/WAN configuration page 147 System Files upgrades action page 144 Unit Time Zone and Clock all units action page 64 Using Monitor Output 1 as a Public Display Monitor public display configuration page 155 Setting a Bandwidth Throughput Option system performance / bandwidth configuration page

73 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Maintenance Tasks The tasks in Table 4-3 are carried out as you see fit. Suggestions are indicated in the When to Accomplish column. Table 4-3 Regular Maintenance Tasks Crucial Tab and Task When to Accomplish See To all units Time After creating sites or if time on a Multi-Media unit is wrong. For video Video - Image After creating sites and when adding/removing camera(s) at a site. For motion Video - Motion At user discretion; to prepare video for motion search and alarms. To restrict access Security After changing the system password, modifying user profiles or adding alarm stations. LAN/WAN System After creating sites or when enabling FAULT RELAY at a site. For PTZ Serial Devices and Video - PTZ To select a driver for cameras that pan, tilt and zoom (PTZ) and to enable PTZ-type camera(s) at a site. page 64 page 75 page 127 page 69 page 147 page 95 Multi audio Audio At user discretion. page 162 Alarms Events At user discretion; to set up logs or alarms triggered by events. n/a Serial Devices - Data recording At user discretion; to set up logs or alarms triggered by events. page 205 page 157 Honeywell technicians Statistics At user discretion; for troubleshooting. page 139 n/a Statistics - Clearing data When permanently closing a site. page 141 Upgrades System Files When upgrading a Multi-Media unit. page 144 n/a Eagle Audio Enable Eagle hardware. page 164 Feedback Box Reference Table 4-4 Maintenance Session Messages from a Unit Message Following See Activate System Failure Apply or Multi-Media unit reboot page 70 Activated System Apply or Multi-Media unit reboot page 70 Activating remote unit Multi-Media unit reboot page 70 Activating System Multi-Media unit reboot page 70 Clearing Storage Use of Statistics tab page 139 Document V4 Rev A 73 03/10

74 Unit Configuration Basics Table 4-4 Maintenance Session Messages from a Unit (cont d) Message Following See Clearing Storage, n% completed Use of Statistics tab page 139 Connecting to Remote Unit Start of Maintenance Session page 61 Getting statistics from Remote Unit Use of Statistics tab page 139 Opening media storage with full repair check, please wait Promoted temporary files Use of System Files tab page 144 Reboot System Failure Apply or Multi-Media unit reboot page 70 Recovering storage, n% completed Use of Statistics tab page 139 Recovering Storage Use of Statistics tab page 139 Requesting file transfer permission from the Remote Site Download of system file page 144 Reset System Apply or Multi-Media unit reboot page 70 and page 71 Resetting remote unit Multi-Media unit reboot page 70 Resetting System Multi-Media unit reboot page 70 Restarting System Multi-Media unit reboot page 70 Runtime System Failure Apply or Multi-Media unit reboot page 70 Starting remote unit Start of Maintenance Session page 61 Starting System Multi-Media unit reboot page 70 Statistics received Use of Statistics tab page 139 System Operational Time zone updated on unit and in central and local database Apply or Multi-Media unit reboot User makes a change to the unit time zone data page 61 and page 70 page 64 Time zone updated on unit Resolution of time zone conflict page 64 Time zone updated in central and local databases Resolution of time zone conflict page 64 Transfer sucessful Use of System Files tab page 144 Transferring file Use of System Files tab page 144 Updating security Use of Security tab page 71 74

75 5 Video Feed Setup Cameras Figure 5-1 Video Tab Renaming a Camera 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session, page On the Video tab, select the name of a camera in the Name column. Default camera names are Camera1, Camera2, and so on. 3. Click the name of the camera once more; a box appears around the name. 4. Enter a new name for the camera, if needed (maximum 40 characters). Press Enter. Document V4 Rev A 75 03/10

76 Video Feed Setup Adjusting a Video Feed 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session. 2. On the Video tab, select the name of a camera in the Name column. 3. Adjust Brightness, Hue, Contrast and Saturation, as needed. You can monitor changes on the video feed displayed. Your changes are saved as they are made. Caution Video feed adjustments cannot correct cameras that are badly-angled, out of focus, in the dark, and so on. If corrections are needed beyond adjustment, see Environmental Interference for Video Feeds on page 93. Re-Enabling a Camera Feed In the Name column, select the box next to the camera icon and name. The camera is enabled when a checkmark appears in the box. If no video appears, consider that the camera may be turned off, disconnected from the unit, not powered, or damaged. See Environmental Interference for Video Feeds on page 93. Re-Enabling All Newly Connected and Powered Cameras You have the option of either: Enabling the new cameras one-by-one - or - Cycle the unit s power so that cameras are auto-detected. Disabling a Camera 1. On the Video tab, select a camera in the Name column. 2. Clear the checkbox next to the camera s name. Caution Disabling a camera resets the recording settings and all other configurations to their default settings. The defaults are used when the camera is re-enabled. 76

77 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Resolution of Live Video in View Software Automatic Optimization of Resolution for Live Video Sessions View software optimizes the resolution of live video. The size of a camera window determines which resolution is used. As an operator makes a camera window larger (or smaller), the resolution of images is automatically adjusted for an optimal view of the video feed. See the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide, for more procedures and tips about live video. TIP! The resolution of recorded video is setup in a Maintenance Session and does not change when View software automatically optimizes the resolution of live video. Smoothing Video Video smoothing is an option of the View application, set by the View operator. It adds a load to the operator s CPU and can slow busy systems. The result of video smoothing is not recorded; it can be toggled OFF/ON while monitoring recorded or live video. In a Maintenance Session, video smoothing can be seen in the Enhanced Preview window. See The Enhanced Preview of Resolution on page 85. See also the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide. Note The resolution and quality of video displayed by the Remote View application can also be affected by the available bandwidth of the network the unit is installed in. See Setting a Bandwidth Throughput Option on page 149 to setup your system for high or low bandwidth. It is also possible to disable LocalView to improve system performance. If LocalView is not used in your system, see Enabling or Disabling Local Monitoring on page 149 to disable LocalView. Other Video Settings Color You have the option of specifying if a color video feed is viewed in color or in black and white (b&w). Removing the checkmark from the Color box on the Video tab shows the video feed in b&w (see Figure 5-1 on page 75). Color continues to be recorded and can be toggled on/off, as needed. Recording Settings Use the Recording tab to setup the Continuous video recording settings. The values are reported in Recording Settings on the Video tab. See Recording Video with Continuous Recording Settings on page 78. See Motion Detection on page 127. See Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup, page 95, and Using a PTZ Camera on page 98. Document V4 Rev A 77 03/10

78 Video Feed Setup Screen Area: Size of Camera Windows on a PC Monitor If the resolution settings for a Multi-Media unit take up too much or too little of the PC monitor s area, adjusting Microsoft Windows Display Properties for a PC monitor can have a positive effect. See Monitor Settings to Customize Windows for a PC, page 91. Recording Video with Continuous Recording Settings Making Use of a Maintenance Session To set up a video feed, continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site; how to do so is shown on page 61. Figure 5-2 Recording Tab with Six Cameras Recording Enabling the Recording of a Video Feed 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session. 2. On the Recording tab (illustrated in Figure 5-2) note that in the Record column, recording is OFF by default for all cameras, when the unit is new. Cells that are unavailable indicate that that camera port is not connected to a camera, or that the camera is disabled. 3. Select the cell in the camera s Record column. A menu appears. Select ON. The settings for Continuous and Event Recording become available to change. 78

79 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Note Remember to enable recording on all cameras, especially those where alarms are expected. If recording is not enabled, no alarm video will be recorded when the alarms are set off. Feedback on the Video tab On the Video tab, note that a red dot has appeared, between the camera s icon and its name ( ). The dot means that the unit is recording the video feed. Turning Recording OFF Camera settings are retained when recording is turned OFF. Caution Disabling a camera resets the recording settings and other configurations to default settings. The defaults are used when the camera is re-enabled. Customizing Settings for Recorded Video Flexibility Use the Recording tab to customize a Resolution, Frame Rate and Quality for each camera s Continuous recording and Event recording settings. The recording settings can be the same for all cameras or customized on a camera-by-camera basis. Making Settings Values for Event recording cannot be set lower than the settings for Continuous recording. Forecasting Results For Calculating the Length of the Video Archive, see page 134. To compare resolution settings, see Comparing the Resolutions of Recorded Video, page 87. Document V4 Rev A 79 03/10

80 Video Feed Setup Resolution Setting 1. On the Recording tab, select a cell in the Resolution column. 2. Select a value (pixels pixels) from the list. For comments about the values, see Optimizing Recorded Video, page 83, and Recorded Video Resolution Reference on page 90. The default values are (NTSC) and (PAL). TIP! Honeywell recommends optimizing the resolution of recorded video using the Automatic DSP Performance Maximization. Caution Honeywell does not recommended gauging the resolution of recorded video based on live video. Live video is always shown at an optimal resolution that could differ from the recording resolution. Frame Rate Setting 1. On the Recording tab, click a cell in the Frame Rate column. 2. Select an images per second (ips) value from the drop-down list that appears. The default value is 1 ips. Note The following frame rate values have been calculated using CIF resolution. If the resolution is raised, frame rates may have to be lowered. Table 5-1 Frame Rate Values (Approximate IPS) for Multi-Media DSP Units NTSC PAL Frame Rates on Multi-Media and DSP Units Rapid Eye DSP units. Rapid Eye DSP units have a maximum frame rate setting of 480 ips at CIF resolution (for NTSC units, 400 ips for PAL units). This maximum frame rate can be divided among connected cameras however needed. For example, each of 16 cameras can be set to 30 ips, or 8 cameras can be set to 60 ips, and so on. To automatically set the maximum frame rate and resolution of your system, see Making Optimized Resolution and Frame Rate Settings on page 84. Rapid Eye Multi-Media units. Rapid Eye Multi-Media units have a maximum frame rate setting of 120 ips at CIF resolution (for NTSC units, 100 ips for PAL units). This maximum frame rate can be divided among connected cameras however needed. For example, each of 16 cameras can be set to 7.5 ips, or 8 cameras can be set to 15 ips, and so on. To automatically set the maximum frame rate and resolution of your system, see Making Optimized Resolution and Frame Rate Settings on page

81 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Using Lower Frame Rates Frame rate and resolution Units can record up to 30 ips from each NTSC camera (up to 25 ips for PAL) at the default resolution. Setting a higher resolution may require lowering the frame rate. Slower fast-forward or rewind More images per second (ips) take more time to process. If recording rates of one or two ips are satisfactory, go ahead and use them. Security video and commercial video The movement of persons recorded at higher rates appear smoother than at lower frame rates. Consult your security personnel about what they require from video surveillance. Two or three frames per second may be wholly adequate for some security needs. Quality Setting 1. On the Recording tab, click a cell in the Quality column. 2. Select a value (a compression factor) from the drop-down list that appears. The values range from 6 to 10. The default value is 7. Quality and the Storage of Video Lower values take less storage space but can display block-like artifacts in the video. The highest Quality setting can double the use of storage space. Duplicating Settings Using One Camera as a Template For Others For convenience, recording settings can be copied to other cameras. Right-click in the row that you want to use as a template for the others. A menu appears for duplicating all settings, or only the settings for continuous recording, or event recording. See Figure 5-3. Restoring Defaults 1. Right-click on the Recording tab. 2. A menu appears. Click Reset All Cameras to Default Values. (see Figure 5-3). Figure 5-3 Menu for Duplicating or for Restoring Recording Settings Duplicate recording settings Restore Default settings Document V4 Rev A 81 03/10

82 Video Feed Setup Continuous Recording and Event Recording To use event recording, set different values for the Resolution, Frame Rate and Quality from those for continuous recording. See Event Recording Configuration on page 115. Authority The settings for recording video are made by your organization s Multi System Administrator (Multi SA) or by a user with the Modify Configuration right in their account. A Multi SA can consult View operators, security personnel and IT managers to find out if: The recorded video is satisfactory for the needs of your organization. The settings do not shorten the video archive to the point of making it unusable. Report The values selected on the Recording tab are also shown on the Video tab. Estimating Storage Capacity As higher values for Frame Rate, Resolution and Quality are set, the amount of time that video, audio and data can be stored in a unit (the video archive) shortens. The Estimated Storage Capacity reports a useful forecast (in days) of the capacity of the video archive. See Figure 5-4. Unit Video Archive Length The Event Recording Duty Cycle can add more precision to the estimate of the unit s video archive. Base the duty cycle on how often events and operators will be using the Event Recording settings (% of recording time). The estimated length of the video archive is shown (in days) next to the Event Recording Duty Cycle. 82

83 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 5-4 Estimating a Unit s Video Archive Table 5-2 Event Recording Duty Cycle Cutoffs Duty Cycle (% of Recording Time) Estimate for 0 Continuous recording only 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90 Mostly continuous recording (10), to mostly event recording (90) 100 Event recording only Rapid Eye Storage Estimator To make storage estimates using more parameters (scheduling, audio, motion and so on), Honeywell s Rapid Eye Storage Estimator is installed with Rapid Eye software. See page 134 for more information. Optimizing Recorded Video To optimize the many setup options quickly, use the Automatic Maximization of DSP Performance. Performance maximization can be performed using View software or LocalView. The Quality settings are not affected by it. The result of maximizing performance is shown on the Recording and Video tabs. Preparation: Contiguous Connections For optimizing the digital signal processing (DSP) of video and its storage, an installer needs to make camera connections contiguous, on the back of a unit. Connections are contiguous if they start at camera VIDEO INPUT 1 and continue sequentially. For example, connecting three cameras to inputs: #1, #2 and #3 is contiguous; connecting the cameras to inputs: #1, #3 and #4 is not; nor would using inputs: #2, #3 and #4. Automatic Maximization of DSP Performance Gauging the Processing Load The load on the DSP is reported on the DSP Bandwidth Utilization gauges and are updated as you use the Recording tab to customize the settings of recorded video (see Figure 5-5). Document V4 Rev A 83 03/10

84 Video Feed Setup Figure 5-5 Load on DSP Resources Automatic Display of Maximization Tool If settings are set too high, the Automatic DSP Performance Maximization window is displayed (see Figure 5-6). Figure 5-6 Automatic DSP Performance Maximization Window Automatic options for Performance Maximization The list of optimization options changes, depending on: The use of NTSC or PAL equipment. The number of cameras connected to the unit. Optimization cannot be used if the cameras are not connected contiguously. See Optimizing Recorded Video, page 83. Making Optimized Resolution and Frame Rate Settings In the Automatic DSP Performance Maximization window, double-click an automatic option (see Figure 5-6). Manual Display of Maximization Window To display the Automatic DSP Performance Maximization window, click Configure Automatic Optimizations, after right-clicking on the Recording tab. See Figure

85 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 5-7 Configure Automatic Optomizations Command The Enhanced Preview of Resolution 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 2. On the Video tab, select a camera name in the Name column. The Enhanced Preview button is available if the camera is recording. A camera that is recording is identified by a red dot between its icon and name. 3. Click Enhanced Preview. In Figure 5-8, the detail shows a feed recorded at a low resolution of 160 x 120, at the size that it would appear on a monitor. The outlines show the optimal size of a video feed on the PC s monitor for that resolution. The many highlighted resolution labels can be used to display another resolution. 4. You have the option of experimenting with: Viewing the video feed at optimal size for a resolution. Click the resolution labels, within a resolution outline or use the Resolution setting on the Recording tab. Stretching the video image. To compare resolutions at other image sizes, drag the lower-right corner of the video image. The Image Size box reports the size of the stretched image. Displaying or hiding outlines and labels on the video preview. Select the Show outlines and Show resolution labels options, as needed. Document V4 Rev A 85 03/10

86 Video Feed Setup Figure 5-8 Enhanced Preview Window Optimal sizes for a video feed Use to display another recording resolution Resolution Tips The following tips allow you to archive more video by lowering the resolution of recorded video. Do You Need to Establish an Individual s Presence or a Person s Identity? Presence may be sufficient. For tasks that only involve establishing if someone has entered the building, or counting cars in a parking lot, and so on, low resolution may be good enough to establish presence, helping to guarantee a longer video archive. Need to know how many cars? Objects can be effectively counted at low resolution and make using higher resolutions unnecessary. To identify unknown vehicles, a person s facial traits and so on, better camera positions and higher-resolution may be needed. Identification may not be as crucial when subjects are known, such as employees, uniformed personnel, and so on. You have the option of adjusting Microsoft Windows Display Properties for your PC monitor. See Monitor Settings to Customize Windows for a PC on page

87 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Comparing the Resolutions of Recorded Video Figure 5-9 Identifying a Subject Using High or Moderate Resolution Detail of recorded video, previewed at a resolution of 704 x 480, captured while optimally sized. Shown here as it would appear on a PC s monitor. Preview window Detail of recorded video, previewed at a resolution of 320 x 240, captured while stretched larger than optimal to compare with higher resolution. Shown here at stretched size. Security and Presence Before critical events occur, it is worthwhile to compare video recorded at Continuous settings with video recorded using Event settings. You can then establish if the resolution is high enough for your organization s security needs. Consult your security personnel to decide whether you need to establish the presence of known individuals. Lower resolutions are usually adequate and take less storage. Samples of low-resolution and high-resolution video images are shown in Comparing the Resolutions of Recorded Video on page 87. Video images are bitmaps. When a camera window is dragged to a larger size, the pixels are also enlarged. The image s sharpness is not preserved. More stretching can degrade the subject of an image beyond recognition. Compare Figure 5-9 and Figure A high resolution ( , NTSC) shows recognizable facial characteristics and very few artifacts, such as pixelation, color variance and so on. If storage time is an issue, recordings at a more modest resolution ( ) shows almost as much detail. Applications to establish presence or absence of personnel can use even lower resolutions. At 160 x 120 (NTSC) many facial characteristics of a known person are still recognizable even when the imaged is stretched, as in Figure Document V4 Rev A 87 03/10

88 Video Feed Setup Figure 5-10 Detail of recorded video, previewed at a resolution of 160 x 120 and stretched beyond recognition. Using Low Resolution (160 x 120, NTSC) to Show Presence Preview window Same detail of recorded video, not stretched, printed life-size. Some facial characteristics are recognizable. Retouching Still Images Bitmap editing tools and imaging software can be used to enhance video stills or screen captures. Although retouching may void the video as admissible evidence in a court of law, it can be of use to highlight a detail or trait. Commercial software for retouching bitmaps includes: Paint-Shop Pro, Corel Photopaint, Adobe Photoshop, and others. For screen captures, use Microsoft Windows, TechSmith s SnagIt, and so on. Screen Area: Size of Camera Windows on a PC Monitor Adjusting Microsoft Windows Display Properties for a PC monitor can have an effect on how resolution is perceived. See Monitor Settings to Customize Windows for a PC on page 91. Camera Tips for Visual Identification Figure 5-11 Camera Placement Can Be more Important than High Resolutions Detail of video recorded at 704 x 480. Printed at actual size. 88

89 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Camera placement can be a crucial factor when troubleshooting resolution issues. If higher Quality and Resolution values are insufficient for your video needs, consider consulting your camera installers about: Monitoring small or faraway objects. For license plates, facial traits, and so on, the closeness of a camera to its subject and its ability to zoom can matter as much as or even more than higher resolutions and higher quality. Using a gauntlet strategy. To identify vehicles by their license plate, try installing a camera at an entry or exit point, at ground level. Close camera shots coupled with high resolution give the best detail. Covering an area with a duo of cameras. For example, one camera at a payment counter can be zoomed to identify facial characteristics, while another can be installed a little farther away to survey more of the scene. Using higher Quality and lower Resolution. The results can be better, with less impact on the video archive capacity. Resolution Gauge for Retrieval Session The resolution gauge appears when running View software. The resolution gauge for recorded video differs from the live video gauge. The gauge for live video is explained in the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide. Gauge Indicates at Which Resolution the Recording Was Made When an operator runs a retrieval session, a resolution gauge is displayed on each camera window, indicating the resolution at which the video was recorded. NTSC Gauge The NTSC gauge is shown in Figure The image shows a dot that indicates the resolution of video. The dot changes position when recording settings switch between Continuous Recording and Event Recording settings. The dot placement depends on the Continuous and Event Recording settings. Figure 5-12 Continuous recording Event recording Continuous recording Resolution Gauge for Recordings Made With NTSC Cameras Here, 640 x 240 continuous, is shown for NTSC. While Event Recording occurs, the dot moves to the right. When the Event Recording stops, the gauge again shows the setting for continuous recording. PAL Gauge The gauge for PAL is shown in Figure The image shows a dot that indicates the resolution of video. The dot changes position when recording settings switch between Continuous Recording and Event Recording settings. The dot placement depends on the Continuous and Event Recording settings. Document V4 Rev A 89 03/10

90 Video Feed Setup Figure 5-13 Continuous recording Event recording Continuous recording Resolution Gauge for Recordings Made With PAL Cameras Here, 384 x 288 continuous, is shown for PAL. While Event Recording occurs, the dot moves to the right. When the Event Recording stops, the gauge again shows the setting for continuous recording. Recorded Video Resolution Reference Table 5-3 Recording Resolutions for Multi-Media DSP (NTSC/PAL) NTSC Resolution 160 x 120 Legacy a 320 x x x x 480 Comment Lowest NTSC resolution 320 x 192; default for upgrades from NTSC; set at legacy Default when new unit set for NTSC Also called half Also called full; highest setting for Multi-Media LT Highest NTSC setting Gauge in a Retrieval Session b PAL Resolution 192 x x x x 576 Comment Lowest PAL resolution Honeywell default for PAL, including upgrades Highest setting for Multi-Media LT Highest PAL setting Gauge in a Retrieval Session b a Legacy: used by older Multi units, is included for compatibility. There is no gauge for the NTSC legacy setting. The Legacy resolution is not shown in the Enhanced Preview. b Gauges are explained in Resolution Gauge for Retrieval Session, page 89. Table 5-4 Recording Resolutions for Multi-Media LT (NTSC/PAL) NTSC Resolution 160 x x x 240 Comment Lowest NTSC resolution Default setting for NTSC on a new unit Highest NTSC setting Gauge in a Retrieval Session a 90

91 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Table 5-4 Recording Resolutions for Multi-Media LT (NTSC/PAL) PAL Resolution 192 x x x 288 Comment Lowest PAL resolution Honeywell default for PAL, including upgrades Highest PAL setting Gauge in a Retrieval Session a a Gauges are explained in Resolution Gauge for Retrieval Session, page 89. Monitor Settings to Customize Windows for a PC Honeywell recommends that if you plan to use View s higher resolution settings, you should set the monitor screen area to 1280 by 1024 pixels or higher to run View. Microsoft Windows is used to set this value, not the View application. Recommended values are listed in Table 5-5. You can also change the PC Monitor Refresh Rate. See Larger Monitors and Microsoft Windows on page 92. Honeywell also recommends that you consider using two PC monitors at the same time if you plan to display ten or more cameras on a PC screen at once. See Microsoft Dual View Using Two Monitors on page 92. Table 5-5 Display Properties for Optimal Video at Higher Resolutions Screen Area (pixels) For Multi-Media DSP and Multi-Media units For Multi-Media LT units and over dial-up connections a 1600 x x x x 864 b 1024 x x 800 b a Dial-up connections using few cameras are faster, as is retrieval of video recorded at lower resolutions. Lower settings for the screen area may be sufficient for such use. b Video is visible and workable, even when using smaller screen area settings. See Figure Document V4 Rev A 91 03/10

92 Video Feed Setup PC Monitor Refresh Rate Higher refresh rates can alleviate eye fatigue when monitoring video over time. You can change the Refresh Frequency, and the refresh rate (Hertz), as needed. Not all monitors and video cards support the resolutions indicated in the preceding sections, nor do all offer various refresh rates. Consult the documentation supplied with Microsoft Windows, your monitor, and the video card. Microsoft Dual View Using Two Monitors Two monitors can be effectively used with Multi-Media View to display more camera feeds at once. To set up a Dual View system, see your Microsoft documentation. Hardware note: a second video card is needed on the View operator s PC for Microsoft s Dual View setup. Larger Monitors and Microsoft Windows Recommended resolution settings: Figure 5-14 Microsoft Windows Screen Area Settings 1280 x x 1200 Green screen areas use recommended settings and fit better in the Viewing Window (see the scrolling bars below). Resolution settings that are not recommended: 1152 x x 768 Setting Microsoft Windows Larger computer monitors and better video cards are assets when setting Microsoft Windows for high screen area settings. Note how in Figure 5-14, the change in size of the camera windows, as the screen area changes. A camera window is highlighted for 92

93 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide comparison. More cameras can be seen at once, and at higher resolutions (here five cameras at resolution) when a recommended setting is used, as in A or B. Even at settings that are not recommended, video can still be viewed, though: some camera windows can appear to extend beyond the monitor s surface. At any setting, camera windows can be dragged as needed and the player window scrolled. Environmental Interference for Video Feeds Checking your installation for hard-to-predict situations includes spot-checking: Live video. Run a Live Session on a regular basis. Such spot checks offer confirmation that sites have not been vandalized, rendered ineffective by the environment or tampered with by an operator. See Physical Compromise, below. Recorded video. After a day or two, run a retrieval session to look for artifacts in recorded video, at every half-hour or so, over a 24-hour period. The darkness of night or bright sunlight may indicate the need for changes in camera position or lighting. For outdoor cameras, it can be worthwhile to run such spot checks seasonally. See Physical Compromise, below. After use of PTZ. A camera with the ability to pan, tilt and zoom can be set to respond in a variety of ways after use and should be spot-checked. Run a video retrieval to do so. See Behavior of PTZ After a Session Closes on page 103. Scheduling. The video archive can be spot-checked for recorded video when cameras are scheduled to record. See Scheduling Configuration on page 117. Physical Compromise Even when cameras are set as recommended, changing environmental factors can compromise video at the source. Obvious factors include: Direct sunlight for short times during the day. Daybreak can interfere with recording for cameras aimed East, as can sundown for cameras pointing West. Dew, frost or kitchen grease. Check camera lenses or windows between the camera and the subject for transparency and cleanliness. Darkness. Without lighting or infrared cameras, indoor rooms and nighttime can make cameras ineffective. Cameras at an outside window, in a room that remains lit during evenings. Reflection from the window can hamper or block outside visibility. Opaque objects. Even small objects can obstruct a camera when they are near and hamper an operator s view of a site. Large mobile objects, such as a truck, can also be used to compromise video of an event. See vandalism, below. Power outage. Even when plugged into a UPS, prolonged power outages can compromise the recording of video. Vandalism. Tampering with cameras, Multi-Media units or other hardware, can be done by damaging hardware directly or indirectly interfering (by spraying paint, fog or moving objects into the way), or even through reconfiguration, using the View software. Document V4 Rev A 93 03/10

94 Video Feed Setup 94

95 6 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup Use of panning, tilting and zooming (PTZ) is optional, even with cameras that have the ability to pan, tilt and zoom. Not all cameras have PTZ features. Check with your installer if you are unsure. Preparations To prepare a Multi-Media unit to use PTZ cameras, a Multi SA needs to set up a Serial device for PTZ. A Multi SA can consult the installer to find out which serial ports of the unit are connected to the serial communications line of PTZ domes/cameras. On Multi-Media units with three or more serial ports, use any port for PTZ. For units that have only two serial ports, Honeywell recommends that you connect PTZ domes to port 2; other serial devices might only be assignable to port 1. Many domes, daisy-chained can be connected to the Multi-Media unit if they use the same PTZ Communications settings. For the address set on each camera, consult the installer. Other dome communications settings can be found in the dome manufacturer s documentation. Serial Device Settings for PTZ Assigning and Configuring a New PTZ Device 1. Find out which serial port on the Multi-Media unit is connected to the PTZ dome(s). The installers connected the Data In port of domes (an RS-485 connector) to either: One of the serial ports on a Rapid Eye unit. The port number for a dome can differ from that of another dome. A bus, connected to one of the serial ports on a Rapid Eye unit. The port number is the same for the domes on that bus. 2. Continue or start a Maintenance Session. 3. Click the Serial Devices tab. 4. Expand the New Devices group. Document V4 Rev A 95 03/10

96 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup Figure 6-1 Assigning a PTZ Driver to a Port on the Multi-Media Unit Drag the PTZ device to the appropriate port 5. Drag the PTZ icon to the Port that matches the unit serial port identified in step 1. If you drop the icon on a port that is already assigned to another device, the PTZ device replaces it; the displaced device is sent to the Unassigned Devices group. 6. You have the option of renaming the device in the Device Name field (maximum 32 characters, including numbers and spaces). 7. Select the serial interface protocol: RS-232, RS-485, or RS You have the option of: Selecting the Enable Controller Switch option. A checkmark sets the Multi-Media unit s OUTPUT 1 to send a signal whenever a PTZ camera is selected during a Live session. Installers can connect OUTPUT 1 to the external controller so that the signal disables the controller while a Multi-Media operator uses a PTZ camera. When a PTZ camera is not selected, the signal from OUTPUT 1 stops so that control of the PTZ serial bus is returned to the external controller. Assigning another PTZ device to another Port (or to the Unassigned Devices group). To do so, repeat steps 4 to 7. Video Tab Settings for PTZ Preparations Assign a PTZ serial device, as explained in Assigning and Configuring a New PTZ Device, page 95. The device can be assigned to either: One of the ports on the Multi-Media unit, OR The Unassigned Devices group TIP! The signal format for all cameras (NTSC or PAL) is set on the System tab. See System Tab in a Maintenance Session on page

97 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Using Many PTZ Domes/Cameras On One Serial Communications Iine If more than one PTZ camera share the same serial communications line, make a note of: The address set on each camera. The driver needed for the make and model of dome. If the domes require different drivers, they cannot share the same port/serial communications line. Enabling a PTZ Camera 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 2. Click the Video tab. Select the PTZ camera from the list of cameras. 3. Click PTZ (see Figure 6-2). 4. Select the Enable box. The PTZ boxes and the PTZ controller become available. The Enable box is not available if a PTZ serial device is not assigned. To assign a PTZ device, see Assigning and Configuring a New PTZ Device on page Select a driver that matches a PTZ camera. Drivers are listed in Table If more than one PTZ camera is sharing the device, select a Camera Address that matches the address set on the dome hardware. 7. Select the Port Attributes of the dome: Data Bits, Stop Bits, Baud Rate and Parity. 8. Select the position that a PTZ camera takes after a View operator closes a Live Session. Consult your security officer before changing the When Live/Response Ends value. See Behavior of PTZ After a Session Closes and Table 6-2, on page Cameras that have a command menu can be set up using the Camera Menu button. Use the dartboard control or the rubber band control to choose a command. Use the Select button to change a value. The PTZ controls are explained in Using a PTZ Camera on page 98. Figure 6-2 A PTZ Camera Configuration Settings on the Video Tab Select PTZ to view PTZ settings for a camera Set up the PTZ options Document V4 Rev A 97 03/10

98 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup Table 6-1 PTZ Drivers for Controllers and Domes Driver (name) a Baud Rate Support for Domes/Controllers/PIT Devices Bossware PIT device, to which domes are connected Honeywell Fixed Camera 9600 Honeywell HCU484 Intellibus-PTZ Honeywell ACUIX dome camera Javelin Javelin 308 Controller Kalatel 9600 or 2400 Kalatel KTD 312 Cyberdome Pelco D 4800, 9600, 2400 Pelco D Pelco P 2400 Pelco P Rapid Dome/Orbiter 9600 Honeywell RapidDome or Orbiter SensorMatic RS SensorMatic RS422: Delta and Speed Ultrak (using VCL) 2400 Honeywell Ultrak (configured as VCL) Ultrak KD6/Honeywell HD Honeywelll KD6, HD6, HD6i a The drivers are not listed alphabetically in the software. A driver can be used with domes other than those listed. For other domes, controllers or PIT devices, consult their accompanying documentation. Using a PTZ Camera Three PTZ controls are available to make PTZ commands: a dartboard-like control, a rubber-band control (also called pull mode control) and a zonal mode control. All are available while running a Live session or while using LocalView. The right to use a PTZ camera is granted in the operator s Multi-Media account (see Granting More or Less Rights to an Account on page 175). Displaying the PTZ Dartboard Control The PTZ dartboard control can be obtained in three situations: During a Maintenance Session, when you select PTZ, the PTZ control displays on the video tab. See the first steps of Enabling a PTZ Camera, page 97, above. During a Live session, select or add a video stream from a PTZ camera. Click Enable PTZ Control ( ). In LocalView, a PTZ button is shown when a Live tab is selected. It is available when a PTZ camera is selected. 98

99 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Using the Dartboard Control Figure 6-3 Dartboard Control for PTZ Showing Command Feedback Textual feedback of highlighted dartboard area 1. On the PTZ Control, click either Click or Hold. 2. Move the mouse pointer over the dartboard-like control to highlight areas of the dartboard. Each area on the dartboard offers textual feedback in the box below the control. See Figure Click when the command that you need is highlighted. If you are using the Hold option, press and hold the mouse button to make the command repeat as needed. Toggling Between Zonal Mode and Pull Mode 1. In a Live player, select a PTZ camera. 2. Select Options New Players in the Live Video Player s View menu. 3. Select the PTZ Control mode that you want to use. Figure 6-4 shows Pull Mode selected. 4. You can also select the Color and Style of the drag line that appears for Pull Mode. Figure 6-4 Changing the PTZ Control Mode TIP! The rubber band control cannot be used at the same time as the zonal mode control. Document V4 Rev A 99 03/10

100 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup Pulling the Rubber-Band Figure 6-5 Dragging the Mouse Pointer in a PTZ Camera Window On the video image, click and drag the mouse. A line is overlaid on the video. Lengthening the line increases the PTZ camera s panning or tilting speed. See Figure 6-5. Pan. To pan right and to tilt down, slightly, drag the pointer from the upper left to the lower right. In View, the line is a single color; here, it is highlighted for illustration. Zoom. Use the wheel on the mouse. If the mouse does not have a wheel, see Using the Dartboard Control on page 99. Presets and other commands. In a Live session and in LocalView, right-click on a PTZ camera s video to obtain a menu of PTZ commands and video resolution commands. In a Maintenance Session, use the commands on the dartboard. Using Zonal Mode Figure 6-6 Using PTZ Zonal Mode Move the mouse over the PTZ camera window until the pointer changes to a numbered arrow. Click the mouse to pan or tilt in that direction. Higher values make the camera pan or tilt more than lower values. 100

101 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide To pan or tilt, move the mouse through the PTZ camera s window until the pointer changes to a numbered arrow and click the mouse button. Figure 6-6 shows the Zonal Mode for panning left. For continuous panning or tilting, click the arrow furthest from the center. To stop continuous panning or tilting, move the mouse through the PTZ camera s window until the pointer changes to an octagon and click the mouse button. To zoom, use the wheel on the mouse. If the mouse does not have a wheel, see Using the Dartboard Control on page 99. Programming a PTZ Dome Figure 6-7 PTZ Dome with or without Auto-focus Without Auto-focus option With Auto-focus option. Click between the dots to toggle Auto-focus On/Off. PTZ Preset Presets are set during a Maintenance Session. A PTZ camera can be set to return to the first preset when a Live session ends and the camera is no longer in use. Auto-focus View supports an auto-focus control when two dots appear in the Focus + arc of the PTZ controller. Click between the dots to toggle auto-focus on and off. See Figure 6-7. Auto Iris View supports an auto-iris control when two dots appear in the Iris + arc of the PTZ controller. Click between the dots to toggle auto-iris on and off. Configuring a Preset on a PTZ Camera 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session. 2. Click the Video tab. Select the PTZ camera from the list of cameras. 3. Click PTZ. Document V4 Rev A /10

102 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup 4. In the Preset Programming area, click the drop-down arrow (see Figure 6-8). A list appears. By default, the list contains: Preset 1, Preset 2, Preset 3 and so on (to 127, total) TIP! Preset 1 may have already been set by an installer, to be used after a session is closed. See Behavior of PTZ After a Session Closes on page 103. Consult your site s installer or security officer before changing the first preset of a PTZ camera. 5. Click an item in the Preset Programming list. 6. If desired, you may rename the preset. 7. Set the camera pan, tilt and zoom values, as explained in Using the Dartboard Control on page 99. You can also select continuous panning. 8. Click Save Preset. The camera pan position, tilt angle and zoom value are saved. 9. You have the option of immediately: Setting up another preset. Repeat steps 4 to 8, using another preset in step 5. Testing the preset. See Testing a Preset on page 102. Setting presets for another PTZ camera at that site. Figure 6-8 Programming a PTZ Preset Select a preset from the drop-down list. You can change the name by entering one in the box. Click Save Preset when you are finished programming. Testing a Preset Figure 6-9 Testing Presets on a PTZ Camera Use the dartboard controls to test presets (see the following procedure) Test presets by starting a live session, right-clicking on video from a PTZ camera and selecting a preset 1. You have the option of running either: A Maintenance Session. Click the Video tab, select a PTZ camera to test presets with, and click PTZ. The PTZ dartboard controller displays. A Live Session. Select or add a video stream from a PTZ camera. Click Enable PTZ Control ( ). The dartboard controller displays. 102

103 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 2. On the dartboard control, set the drop-down arrow to Preset (see Figure 6-9). 3. Click the numbered buttons above the Preset box. The PTZ camera moves to the preset position. Check your configuration if the camera does not move. Either: A preset has not been set for that number. The preset duplicates the settings of the previously used preset. The camera is labeled as PTZ but is not. PTZ and Motion Detection When an alarm based on motion detection is enabled on a PTZ camera, use of PTZ functions will most likely trigger that alarm. You can limit the number of alarms triggered by using the Delay slider in the motion detection controls. The alarm schedule can also be changed to stop alarms at certain times, such as when PTZ use is anticipated. See Motion Detection on page 127 and Events Defined on page 205 for more information. Ultrak KD6i Domes Before an aperture setting can be changed manually on an Ultrak KD6i dome, you need to turn OFF the auto-aperture option. Auto-aperture is also known as auto-iris on the PTZ controller. The Return to auto-focus command has no effect on Ultrak KD6i domes. Kalatel Domes On Kalatel domes, the iris controls in View toggles harsh brighter/darker settings, not a gradual open or close. Auto-iris has no effect. Behavior of PTZ After a Session Closes Position of PTZ Camera When a Live Session ends, a security officer may need a PTZ camera to return to a set position and zoom value, while the camera is not being monitored by a View operator. Figure 6-10 Set the actions the PTZ takes when a live session closes. The PTZ can: go to a Preset, stay put, start a tour, and return to Auto Iris and Auto Focus settings. PTZ Camera: Behavior After Use 1. Using View, continue or start a Maintenance Session at a site where pan, tilt and zoom camera(s) need their post-session behavior set. Document V4 Rev A /10

104 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup 2. Click the Video tab. 3. Click PTZ. Check if the Enable box is selected. Post-session behavior cannot be set unless PTZ is enabled. 4. Click the When Live Closes drop-down arrow and select a post-session behavior (behaviors are listed in Table 6-2). Table 6-2 Position After PTZ Sessions Close At Session End Stay put Go to preset 1 Start tour 1 a Comment / Behavior The camera remains in the last position used by the operator. If it is panning, it keeps on panning; if it is not moving, it stays that way, and so on. The stay put behavior makes available the Return to Auto-iris and Return to Auto-focus options. The camera returns to preset 1 configured using Multi. See Configuring a Preset on a PTZ Camera on page 101 to configure the first preset of a PTZ camera. Some camera models can be programmed to move independently when not in use by an operator. For information on how to program a PTZ tour, see the documentation that came with the domes connected to the Multi-Media unit. a A PTZ tour differs from site tours (see Touring Many Sites on page 253) and local camera tours using a monitor at a Multi-Media site. PTZ and Motion Search Video recorded while a PTZ dome or camera can be searched for motion. When the camera is fixed, results are as expected (see Motion Search on page 130). However, motion search is ineffective on video recorded as a PTZ camera is panning, tilting or zooming. If you plan to use motion search on a PTZ camera, use Stay put or a preset after close of session. See Table 6-2. Motion search can also be used to find out when a PTZ camera was moved, if that camera should not be moving. Constant Panning and Video Archive Recording a video feed from a camera that pans constantly requires much more storage. If the duration of your video archive is a concern, see Quality on page 137. Ultrak KD6i Dome Restriction The return to auto-focus command has no effect on the Ultrak KD6i dome. Caution Do not use the Return To Auto-Iris command on Ultrak KD6i domes. 104

105 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Support for RapidDome PTZ Features A Multi SA can preset a RapidDome PTZ dome, using the View application, for: Mimic tours. A mimic tour recalls the commands to pan, tilt and zoom, that were sent to a RapidDome camera. Mimic tours are also known as path tours. Preset tours. A preset tour recalls a list of PTZ presets. A few presets should be set up before setting up a preset tour. Privacy zones. Use presets 100 to 127. The video feed is not displayed when a dome is positioned at these presets. Figure 6-11 shows details of a PTZ setup for the RapidDome Driver, on the Video tab, during a Maintenance Session. Details show controls for the mimic tour, preset tour and privacy zone. The selection of presets and tours is made using the list above the PTZ controller. In the list, Vector is used to select a preset tour. Figure 6-11 Detail of PTZ Setup for the RapidDome Driver Use the list to select presets or tours Select Presets to be set as Privacy Zones Use controls to program a Mimic Tour Use controls to program a Preset Tour RapidDome PTZ Tours 1. In the PTZ controller, click the drop-down arrow in the box under the row of numbered buttons to display a list, showing Preset, Tour, and Vector (see Figure 6-11). Document V4 Rev A /10

106 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup 2. Do one of the following: For mimic tours, select Tour. For preset tours, select Vector. 3. Click a button in the row of numbered buttons above the drop-down list. RapidDome Mimic Tour 1. While using View, select a site that has one or more RapidDome PTZ cameras. 2. Run a Maintenance Session; click the Video tab. 3. Select a dome camera. 4. Click PTZ. Check if the Driver is RapidDome/Orbiter. If not, this procedure cannot be used. In the Tour Programming section, Mimic Tour is selected by default. See Figure You have the option of selecting which of the four mimic tours you plan to setup. To do so, click the drop-down arrow above the End button. A list appears, showing Tour 1, Tour 2, Tour 3, and so on, by default. Select an item in the list. 5. Click Program. The message Tour Programming in progress appears below the buttons in the Tour Programming section (see Figure 6-11.) 6. Pan, tilt and zoom the camera, as needed. 7. Click End. 8. After the tour is programmed, you can: Click Test to test the mimic tour. Rename the mimic tour. Click inside the box in the Tour Programming section. Enter a name. Save the name by clicking the mouse outside of the box. 9. You have the option of programming another mimic tour for the dome camera; repeat step 5 to step 7, as needed. Testing a Mimic Tour on a RapidDome Camera 1. While using View, select the site at which you have programmed a mimic tour on a RapidDome camera, as shown in RapidDome Mimic Tour, page Run a Maintenance Session. On the Video tab, select the dome camera that is programmed with a mimic tour. 3. Click PTZ. Check if the Driver is RapidDome/Orbiter. If not, the wrong camera or site may have been selected and this procedure cannot be used. 4. In the Tour Programming section, select a mimic tour, using the drop-down arrow above the End button. By default, they are named Tour 1, Tour 2, Tour 3, and so on. 5. Click Test. 106

107 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide RapidDome Preset Tour Have some presets programmed before setting up a preset tour. See Configuring a Preset on a PTZ Camera on page 101. Figure 6-12 Right-Click Tour Programming Table Reveals Insert Option Setting Up a Tour of Presets on a RapidDome Camera 1. While using View, select a site that has RapidDome PTZ cameras. 2. Run a Maintenance Session; click the Video tab. 3. Select a dome camera. 4. Click PTZ. Check if the Driver is RapidDome/Orbiter. If not, the remaining steps in this procedure cannot be used. 5. In the Tour Programming section, click Preset Tour (Vector). While a preset tour is being programmed, the RapidDome dome does not move. You have the option of selecting which of the four preset tours you plan to set up. To do so, click the drop-down arrow above Dwell Time (see Figure 6-12). A list appears, showing Vector 1, Vector 2, Vector 3, and so on, by default. Select the Vector to be programmed. 6. To add a preset to the preset tour, right-click in the Tour Programming table. A menu appears, showing the Insert command (as in Figure 6-12). 7. Click Insert. A preset is added to the list. Speed. You have the option of setting the time (in seconds) that the dome will take to reach the preset. Select the Speed column cell that is on the line of the preset. A drop-down arrow appears. Click the arrow and select a value (from 0 to 127). See Figure Dwell. You have the option of setting the time (in seconds) during which the dome will stay in the preset position. Select the Dwell column cell that is on the line of the preset. A drop-down arrow appears. Click the arrow and select a value (from 0 to 255). Preset Name. You have the option of replacing the preset name with another. Select the Preset Name column cell that is on the line of the preset. A drop-down arrow appears. Click the arrow and select a value (from 1 to 127). Note Presets 100 to 127 can be designated as privacy zones. Document V4 Rev A /10

108 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup 8. Repeat step 7 above, as needed. While adding more presets, you also have the option of using the following commands: Move Up/Down. You have the option of moving a preset up or down the list, and keeping its Speed and Dwell times. Right-click in the # column cell that is on the line of the preset. A menu appears. Click Move Up or Move Down, as needed. Delete. You have the option of deleting one preset or many from the list. Right-click in the # column cell that is on the line of the preset. Click Delete on the menu that appears. To select many presets, press and hold Ctrl while selecting different lines in the # column. Test. You have the option of testing the preset tour by clicking Test. Click End to stop testing a preset tour. Rename tour. You have the option of renaming the preset tour. Click inside the box next to Preset Tour (Vector). Enter a name. In Figure 6-13, Entrances has replaced the default name of Vector Click Program Vector to send the tour of presets to the camera. To program another tour of presets for the dome camera, repeat step 6 to step 7, as needed. Figure 6-13 Location of the Program Vector Button Testing a Preset Tour on a RapidDome Camera 1. While using View, select the site at which you have programmed a Preset Tour on a RapidDome camera, as shown in procedure Setting Up a Tour of Presets on a RapidDome Camera. 2. Run a Maintenance Session and click the Video tab. Select the dome camera that is programmed with a Preset Tour. 3. Click PTZ. Check if the Driver is RapidDome/Orbiter. If not, the wrong camera or site may have been selected in step 1 and the remaining steps in this procedure cannot be used. 4. In the Tour Programming section, select Preset Tour (Vector). 5. Select the preset tour that you plan to test. To do so, click the drop-down arrow above Dwell Time and select a tour from the list that appears (by default, the list shows Vector 1, Vector 2, Vector 3, and so on). Click Test. 108

109 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Privacy Zones for RapidDome Figure 6-14 Setting Up a Privacy Zone on a RapidDome PTZ Camera Display of the video feeds for PTZ presets 100 to 127 can be toggled on and off. When the dome is at the preset s position and zoom value, and that preset is enabled, video will not be displayed for that Privacy Zone. Press Reset All to cancel the privacy applied to your presets. A confirmation dialog box appears. Click Yes. Setting a Privacy Zone Select the box next to the preset name so that it shows a check-mark. See Figure 6-14, above. Remove the checkmark to view Live and recoded video from that PTZ preset. Using ACUIX Domes An ACUIX PTZ dome with Intellibus protocol can be configured using Rapid Eye View software. In preparation, installers should: Set each ACUIX dome to Intellibus mode (IBus). Set DIP switches 5-8 to ON for each ACUIX dome. The Camera Address can then be set using rotary switches SW1 to SW4 on the PCB at the base of the dome. Connect the domes to a port on the Rapid Eye unit. Notify the Multi SA of the number of the port used on the Rapid Eye unit and the Camera Address used for each ACUIX dome. Configuring the Intellibus Device for a Rapid Eye Unit 1. Assign the Intellibus device to the port used by the installers, by dragging its icon from the Unassigned Devices to the Port used by the installers. Figure 6-15 shows the result when Port 4 is being used. Ports 3 through 10: Select RS-485 on the Serial Devices tab. Ports 1 or 2: Select RS-232 on the Serial Devices tab. Use a hardware converter for RS-232/RS-485 on these ports to translate communications to and from the ACUIX domes. Document V4 Rev A /10

110 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup 2. On the Serial Devices tab, select the values shown in Table 6-3. See also Figure Figure 6-15 Communication Settings for Intellibus on the Serial Devices Tab Shortcut for selecting all of the items listed in the table Table 6-3 Intellibus Settings for ACUIX Domes Communications Value Baud Rate Stop Bits 1 Data Bits 8 Parity Bits None Configuring an ACUIX Dome for PTZ Use 1. Run a Maintenance Session. 2. Click the Video tab. 3. Click PTZ. For information about enabling and configuring a PTZ dome, see Video Tab Settings for PTZ on page Select an ACUIX dome. 5. In Port Attributes, enter values for Baud Rate, Stop Bits, Data Bits and Parity (as shown in Table 6-3). 6. Do not use the same Camera Address for two ACUIX domes that share the same port. 7. Repeat step 4 to step 6 for each ACUIX dome in your system. 110

111 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Discovering ACUIX Domes You have the option of running the discovery routine if domes were added later or if the list of cameras seems incomplete. 1. Run a Maintenance Session. 2. On the Serial Devices tab, select the port to which an Intellibus device is assigned. 3. Click Discover to update the table of ACUIX domes. Backing Up an ACUIX Configuration File to a PC 1. Run a Maintenance Session. 2. On the Serial Devices tab, select the port to which the Intellibus device is assigned. 3. Click Discover to update the table of ACUIX domes. 4. Select one or more ACUIX domes. To select all of the items in the table, select the checkbox at the top of the Name column (see Figure 6-15). 5. Click Upload from Camera. The configuration file from each of the selected ACUIX domes is copied to the Multi-Media DSP unit. A configuration file for an ACUIX dome includes: PTZ tours, PTZ presets, privacy zones and all other camera settings. 6. Click Manage Files. The Manage Files dialog box appears (Figure 6-16), showing the ACUIX dome configuration files (*.bin). The configuration file naming convention is: camera name_camera address_year_month_day_hour_minute_second.bin; for example: Lobby_4_2007_06_16_8_0_0.bin. Firmware files may also be listed and can be ignored for this procedure; their extension is (*.ngd). 7. Select a configuration file. 8. Click Save. A standard file saving window appears, showing the drives and folders available on the operator PC. Click OK after selecting a saving location and filename. 9. Click Close in the Manage Files dialog box. Commands in the Manage Files Dialog Box This Manage Files dialog box shows only the files which are related to ACUIX domes, from among the files on the Rapid Eye unit. If there are no *.bin or *.ndg files, the Manage Files dialog box displays an empty list. Figure 6-16 Manage Files Dialog Box Document V4 Rev A /10

112 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup Save. Copies a file from the Rapid Eye unit to the operator s PC. See step 8 of Backing Up an ACUIX Configuration File to a PC, page 111, above. Delete. Click to delete a selected file. Click Yes on the confirmation dialog box to remove the file from the Rapid Eye unit. This does not remove the information from an ACUIX dome. Refresh. Click to update the report in the Manage Files dialog box. Close. Closes the Manage Files dialog box. Using LocalView A configuration file for an ACUIX dome can also be saved to a Rapid Eye unit by using LocalView. See the LocalView context-sensitive Help for more information. Downloading a Configuration File to an ACUIX Dome After Backing Up an ACUIX Configuration File to a PC, page 111, you can copy that configuration file to another ACUIX dome of the same make and model. 1. Run a Maintenance Session. 2. On the Serial tab, select the port to which the Intellibus device was assigned. 3. Click Discover to update the table of ACUIX domes. 4. Select one or more ACUIX domes. To select all of the cameras listed, click the checkbox at the top of the Name column (see Figure 6-15). 5. Click Download to Camera. A standard file opening window appears, showing the drives and folders available on the operator PC. 6. Select a configuration file (*.bin) for the ACUIX dome. 7. Click Open. The configuration file is downloaded to the ACUIX dome. Caution Do not upload an ACUIX configuration file from one model of ACUIX to another. For example, the configuration from an ACUIX dome with a FCB EX480C camera should not be uploaded to an ACUIX dome with a VK-S654 camera. For the procedure identify a camera, see Identifying the Model of the ACUIX Dome, next. Identifying the Model of the ACUIX Dome Honeywell recommends identifying the model of the camera in ACUIX domes, to avoid uploading an ACUIX configuration file from one model of ACUIX to another. 1. Run a Maintenance Session. 2. Click the Video tab. 3. Click PTZ. 112

113 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 4. Select an ACUIX dome. 5. Click Camera Menu. The model of the camera is listed. Upgrading the Firmware of an ACUIX Dome 1. Run a Maintenance Session. 2. On the Serial Devices tab, click the port to which the Intellibus device is assigned. 3. Click Discover to update the table of ACUIX domes. 4. Do one of the following: Select all of the ACUIX domes, by clicking the checkbox at the top of the Name column (see Figure 6-15). Select some of the ACUIX domes. If you are not upgrading all of the ACUIX domes, the cameras are upgraded one by one. See step 9 of this procedure. 5. Click Firmware Upgrade. A standard file opening window appears, showing the drives and folders available on the operator PC. 6. Select a drive, folder and a firmware file for the ACUIX dome. These files should have an *.ngd file extension. 7. Click Open. 8. A Maintenance Message dialog box appears to confirm your selection. Click Yes to proceed. 9. If there are many ACUIX domes connected to the unit, and all were selected in step 4 of this procedure, a Sequence for Upgrading Cameras dialog box appears. Select a sequence, and then click Continue. The upgrade of the cameras can be: Simultaneous. This will take approximately 10 minutes. One by one. Being more time consuming, this procedure takes about 10 minutes for each camera. This upgrade stops if a camera is off or if the connection fails. A warning appears for that camera if the upgrade stops. Caution If you select Simultaneous, and an ACUIX dome is off, or the connection fails, the upgrade appears to continue without warning the operator. Use this procedure again when all of the ACUIX domes are powered and the connection to them is operational. Document V4 Rev A /10

114 Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup 114

115 7 Enhancing Video Event Recording Configuration Using Higher Settings for Video Recorded During an Event Each camera has its own Event Recording settings. The settings for live video are independent of Continuous and Event Recording settings. Figure 7-1 Continuous and Event Recording Settings On the Recording tab, set higher values for Event Recording settings than for Continuous Recording. The following settings can be changed: Resolution (pixel pixel) Frame Rate (number of images per second) Quality (more or less compression) Each camera can have its own Event Recording values set independently. Document V4 Rev A /10

116 Enhancing Video Authorized Configuration Event Recording can be configured by your organization s Multi SA, or by other operators who have the right to run a Maintenance Session. Caution Using high values for Continuous Recording can shorten a unit s video archive to the point of making it unusable. See Using Higher Values When Recording Video on page 138. Automatic DSP Performance Maximization A Multi SA can optimize Event Recording settings. See Automatic Maximization of DSP Performance on page 83. Multi-Media LT On Multi-Media LT units, the maximum resolution for NTSC is , and for PAL. These maximum resolutions are lower than on Multi-Media DSP units. Live Video The settings for Continuous Recording and Event Recording are independent of those for live video. Setting Lower Values for Continuous Recording The settings for Continuous Recording need to be lower (or equal) to the Event Recording settings. If higher values cannot be set for Event Recording, the values that are being used for Continuous Recording may be set too high. Using the Boost Button for Event Recording Once Event Recording is set up, View operators have the option of clicking Boost ( ) while monitoring Live video. Clicking Boost triggers Event Recording. See the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide, for more information on the Boost button. Event Recording on Demand during a Site Tour In the View application, the Event Recording button is unavailable while a tour is running. Pause the tour to enable the button. 116

117 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Automatically Recording Events of Interest A storage area may be of little interest until someone enters it. A Rapid Eye unit can be set up to use Continuous recording until motion at the door to the storage area is detected. The unit switches to the Event Recording settings automatically once motion is detected. Another example: a camera is monitoring the access point of a parking lot. Motion detection can be used so that when a vehicle idles, waiting for the gate to rise, Event Recording can be enabled, to make effective use of a Rapid Eye unit s video storage capacity. Note In these examples, low quality Continuous recording settings record video until an event is triggered and the higher quality Event recording is enabled. An Outside World event, motion event or a Customer-device event can automatically trigger Event Recording. See Scheduling a Response to an Event of Interest on page 123 for more information. Continuous Recording may suffice while nothing of interest occurs. Scheduling Configuration Scheduling is optional, and can be shared by the Continuous Recording of video, the raising of Alarms and a Response Rule, or be used separately. Cameras and alarms can be scheduled before or after they are setup. Scheduling is performed unit-by-unit. You have the option of setting up a Multi-Media unit to record a video feed only for the days and times that you specify. For example, your organization might need to record video of a parking lot only on weekends and holidays, using only some cameras. You can customize schedules for specific cameras, or groups of cameras. Schedules can also be used with alarms (for example, to prevent them from ringing during business hours). Figure 7-2 Example of a Schedule Assigned to a Camera Document V4 Rev A /10

118 Enhancing Video Each camera or the triggering of alarms can be scheduled to either: Be Always ON. No schedule is used. Cameras using this setting record at all times. Use Schedule (default). The simplest way to simultaneously schedule all cameras and alarms is to customize the Default schedule; see Customizing a Schedule, page 119, and Notes on Holidays and Exceptions, page 122. Use Schedule (defined schedule). Use this option to schedule a camera, group of cameras, or alarms separately. See Adding a Schedule on page 119. Video Archive A benefit of using schedules for the recording of video feeds is that it spares storage on a Multi-Media unit. This helps an organization to maintain a potentially longer video archive. See Calculating the Length of the Video Archive on page 134. Live Video Live video is not affected by scheduling. Alarms The reporting of alarms is scheduled in the same way as Continuous video recording, using the Default schedule or another, defined schedule. See Alarms and Scheduling, page 121. Motion If Motion is enabled on a camera, the motion events are recorded only when a camera is scheduled to record. If motion is set up to trigger alarms, alarms will only be raised if the alarms are scheduled for that time and day. Audio Feeds Audio is recorded when it is enabled. Audio is not affected by the recording schedules. Data Streams The data from point-of-sales devices (POS) is always recorded and is not affected by the recording schedules. Using a Schedule You have the option of adding, customizing and deleting a schedule, using the Define Schedules option. A schedule can then be assigned to one or many cameras, to alarms or to a response. 118

119 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Adding a Schedule 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session. Click the Schedules tab. 2. Select Define Schedules. The tab displays the grid of the Default schedule. 3. Click in the Schedule box and enter a name for the new schedule. Click Add when the button becomes available. 4. Select or deselect cells in the Time/Day grid, as needed. Use the following options to set up the schedule: Cell-by-cell. Click the cells of the Basic schedule grid, as needed. Clicking the cells toggles a time from ON (dark) to OFF (light), or OFF to ON. See Figure 7-4. By a block of cells. Drag the mouse pointer over cells. When you release the mouse button, a menu appears showing the Fill Block and Clear Block commands. Click a command, as needed. Globally. Right-click the mouse button to display a menu of commands for customizing more than one cell at once (Clear Row, Fill Row, and so on). See Figure 7-3. Figure 7-3 Customizing a Schedule Customizing a Schedule 1. On the Schedules tab, during a Maintenance Session, select Define Schedules. The tab displays the grid of the Default schedule (see Figure 7-3). 2. Use the Schedule drop-down arrow to select a schedule that you want to customize. 3. Select or deselect cells in the Time/Day grid, as needed. The customization is saved automatically. Use the following options to set up the schedule: Cell-by-cell. Click the cells of the Basic schedule grid, as needed. Clicking the cells toggles a time from ON (dark) to OFF (light), or OFF to ON. See Figure 7-4. By a block of cells. Drag the mouse pointer over cells. When you release the mouse button, a menu appears showing the Fill Block and Clear Block commands. Click a command, as needed. Globally. Right-click the mouse button to display a menu of commands for customizing more than one cell at once (Clear Row, Fill Row, and so on). Customizing the Default Schedule By default, all of a Multi-Media unit s cameras and alarms are assigned to the Default schedule. Customizing the Default schedule is the quickest way to coordinate a unit for all cameras and alarms. Document V4 Rev A /10

120 Enhancing Video Assigning a Schedule to a Camera or Group of Cameras 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session. Click the Schedules tab. 2. Select Continuous. A list of cameras displays with a schedule grid (see Figure 7-2). 3. Select a camera from the list. If Always On is selected, select Use Schedule. 4. Click the Use Schedule drop-down arrow and select a schedule for the camera. 5. Repeat this procedure for other cameras that need a schedule assigned. Using a 15-Minute Increment in a Schedule 1. On the Schedules tab, during a Maintenance Session, select Define Schedules. 2. In the Time/Day grid, right-click an hour cell to display a menu. 3. Select 15 Breakdown. A 15 Breakdown window appears, showing four fifteen-minute cells for that hour, on that day (see Figure 7-4). 4. Click the cells, as needed, to schedule one or many of the fifteen-minute periods. 5. Click OK to save the setting. Figure 7-4 Breakdown of an Hour into Fifteen-Minute Sections Renaming a Schedule Note The Default schedule cannot be renamed. 120

121 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 1. On the Schedules tab, during a Maintenance Session, select Define Schedules. The tab displays the grid of the Default schedule (see Figure 7-4). 2. Use the Schedule drop-down arrow to select the schedule that you want to rename. 3. Enter a new name in the Schedule box. 4. Click Rename. Deleting a Schedule Note The Default schedule cannot be deleted. 1. On the Schedules tab, during a Maintenance Session, select Define Schedules. The tab displays the grid of the Default schedule (see Figure 7-4). 2. Use the Schedule drop-down arrow to select the customized schedule that you want to delete. 3. Click Delete. If the schedule is in use, it cannot be deleted. Assign another schedule to the cameras, alarms or rules that are using the schedule. Alarms and Scheduling Use of scheduling to disarm alarms is optional. If you assign a schedule to alarms, all alarms will use that schedule. Alarms cannot be scheduled independently. A schedule for the alarms can be independent from those used by cameras. For example, you can set events to trigger alarms only after business hours, while cameras keep recording. Assigning a Schedule to Alarms A schedule is assigned to alarms in the same way as for cameras. Alarms can be set to be: Always ON. No schedule is used. Alarms using this setting are always active. Use Schedule (default). The simplest way to simultaneously schedule all cameras and alarms is to customize the Default schedule. See Customizing a Schedule, page 119, and Notes on Holidays and Exceptions, page 122. Use Schedule (defined schedule). Use this option to schedule alarms for specific days and times. See Adding a Schedule on page 119. TIP! Settings for Holidays and Exceptions have a higher priority than the settings for the other days of the week. See Notes on Holidays and Exceptions on page 122. Note Setting events to trigger alarms is explained in Setting an Event to Trigger an Alarm or To Be Logged on page 206. Document V4 Rev A /10

122 Enhancing Video Notes on Holidays and Exceptions The dates of holidays and exceptions can be input by your organization s Multi SA, or by operators who have the right to run a Maintenance Session. The dates added to the Holiday/Exception list become part of every schedule. Settings for Holidays and Exceptions have higher priority than settings for the other days of the week. For example, if you set weekdays to not trigger alarms but Holidays are set to trigger alarms, the result would be that alarms are raised on holidays, even when that holiday falls on a weekday. Adding Holidays and Exceptions 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 2. Click the Schedules tab. 3. Select Holiday/Exception (see Figure 7-5). Enter a name for the holiday (or exception) in the Name field. 4. Choose whether to list the day as a holiday or an exception by selecting the option with the Type drop-down arrow. Figure 7-5 Specifying Holidays and Exceptions 5. Ensure that the Date you enter is unused and in the future. To enter a date, either: Enter a date. In the Date box, select the part of the date that you want to change. Use the arrow keys ( on your keyboard to change the number, or enter any number that you want. Use the calendar utility. Click the Date drop-down arrow to display the calendar utility. Find and select the date that you need in the calendar. Click the arrow keys at the top of the calendar to go to another month. 6. Click Add. The date is added to the list (see Figure 7-5). Note Make duplicate holiday records for each year that the system will be in use. 122

123 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Updating a Name or Type of a Holiday/Exception 1. Select the holiday/exception to be updated from the list (see Figure 7-5). 2. Change the Type or Name fields, as needed. Click Update. Correcting the Date of a Holiday/Exception 1. Select the holiday/exception with the faulty date from the list (see Figure 7-5). Change the Date field, as needed. 2. Click Add. This adds a new holiday/exception with the correct date and the same name. The old item with the faulty date remains on the list. 3. Select the holiday/exception with the faulty date. Click Delete. Scheduling a Response to an Event of Interest The Response schedule is used to make simple cause and effect rules, to program how a Multi-Media unit responds to events of interest. For example, Figure 7-6 shows: Trigger: = If camera 1 senses motion... Response: =... then the unit responds with Event Recording on camera 1 Schedule: = however, event recording should not occur outside of business hours. Event Recording will only occur on weekdays, during business hours (between 7 am and 7 pm). Figure 7-6 Rule with a Trigger, Response, and Schedule Document V4 Rev A /10

124 Enhancing Video Triggers and Events of Interest For example, an empty loading dock may be of interest when motion occurs. A Response Rule programs a unit to respond to Events of interest, such as: Motion in video Lost video signals An activated input (such as an alarm) Data from a POS device A Honeywell Video Analytics event or alarm Displaying the Response Panel Used for Making Rules 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 2. Click the Schedules tab (see Figure 7-6). 3. Click Response. Figure 7-6 displays for making rules and customizing a response. Authority Setting and customizing rules can be performed by your organization s Multi SA, or by other operators who have the right to run a Maintenance Session. Checklist for Setting a Rule in the Response Schedule Figure 7-7 Customizing the Response for a Rule Six steps to settings up a Rule in the Response schedule: 1. Create or select a rule Enable the rule for editing. 3. Set the trigger. 4. Set up the response. 5. Set the response to be logged or to raise an alarm Add a schedule. Note See the next section for more information

125 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 1. Create or select a rule. Click Add to create a new rule or select a rule from the list in the Response Rules box (see 1 in Figure 7-7). The Describe Rule command shows a description of the selected rule, listing all of the rule s components: trigger, response and schedule. You may also rename a rule (see Renaming a Rule on page 125). 2. Enable the selected rule for editing. To edit and customize a rule, start by selecting the checkbox next to the rule name (see 2 in Figure 7-7). The icon next to the checkbox changes as you customize the rule. See Rule Status Icons on page Set the trigger. Customize the rule s trigger(s), as needed, by selecting cells that are available in the Event rows of the Trigger table (see 3 in Figure 7-7), and in the POS pane if a POS device is in use. AE Alarms are obtained from an ActivEye client. 4. Set up the response. See 4 and 5 in Figure 7-7. Responses can include: Using Event Recording settings to record video. For this to have an effect, settings for Event Recording need to be higher than those for Continuous Recording. See Event Recording Configuration on page 115. Making a PTZ camera go to a PTZ preset or tour. Activating an Output on the Multi-Media unit (to activate a buzzer, for example). Combinations of the above responses. If an Action cell is unavailable, the action has not been set up yet. 5. Set the response to be logged or to raise an alarm. You can customize the duration of a response and if the response is Logged or Raises an Alarm (see 5 in Figure 7-7). See Managing the Response to a Rule on page Add a schedule to the rule. You have the option of selecting a schedule for the rule (see 6 in Figure 7-7). The rule must be active during the days and times specified in the schedule to initiate a response to the rule. See Assigning a Schedule to a Response Rule on page 126. Note After selecting a rule, you can perform steps 3 to 6 of the Checklist for Setting a Rule in the Response Schedule in any order. A rule lists the Events that Trigger a response and the Actions that are taken as a Response. Figure 7-7 shows where and how to make a rule. Renaming a Rule 1. Select a rule from the list in the Response Rule box. Click the rule name again. 2. Enter a name for the rule. Letters and numbers can be used, as can some punctuation marks. The same name cannot be used for two rules. 3. Click elsewhere in the View window to save the name. Rule Status Icons As a rule is customized, its status is visually displayed by one of five icons (see Figure 7-8). Document V4 Rev A /10

126 Enhancing Video Figure 7-8 Status Icons for a Response Rule Status icons for a response rule. See below for descriptions. Table 7-1 Status Icon Status Icons for a Response Rule Meaning of the Icon The rule can be edited. The operator needs to set a trigger or a response. The operator has selected an empty schedule. The rule is operational. The rule is prevented from acting by a component that has been disabled (camera, PTZ, motion or other). The rule is disabled. There is no checkmark in the box. Managing the Response to a Rule You have the following options when deciding how a rule response should end: Stops After Events. The response to the event ends when the trigger input ends. Lasts for [15] Seconds. The time can be set from five seconds to 3,600 (one hour). The rule response will continue for the time set in the box. Is As Scheduled. The response continues as long as the schedule allows. Alarm and Log: to Report a Response A response to a rule can be setup to be logged silently or to raise an alarm. See Setting an Event to Trigger an Alarm or To Be Logged on page 206. Assigning a Schedule to a Response Rule 126 A schedule is assigned to a response rule in the same way as for cameras. A rule can be: Always on. No schedule is used. Cameras using this setting record at all times. Use Schedule (Default). The simplest way to simultaneously schedule all cameras and alarms is to customize the Default schedule. This is useful when all the cameras and alarms need to be active at the same time, such as during business hours. See Customizing a Schedule, page 119, and Notes on Holidays and Exceptions, page 122. Use Schedule (defined schedule). To schedule a camera, group of cameras, or alarms for specific days and times. See Adding a Schedule on page 119.

127 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Disabling a Response Rule Rules can be disabled by removing the checkmark next to their name. The response of a disabled rule will not take place even if the response is scheduled to occur. Motion Detection Using motion detection to log or trigger alarms is optional. Live video and recorded video are not affected by motion detection settings. Figure 7-9 Motion Detection Configuration Detection Scenarios Motion detection can trigger an Alarm or add entries in a Log, based on motion in one or many areas of a video feed. Motion detection can warn or log the following situations in real-time: Unauthorized use of an area. A construction crane moving outside of a scoped area, a burglar in an unauthorized area after hours, and so on. Scheduled appointment. Checking the arrival and departure times of a truck at a loading dock, deliveries, even natural phenomena such as tides and so on. Catastrophes. Complements sensors for fire, flood, explosions, and so on. Pest control. Vermin in a storage area, and so on. Configuring Motion Detection 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 2. Click the Video tab. Record/Motion/Image is selected by default. 3. For commands, you have the option of using the buttons in the Motion area or the motion commands on the menu. To use the menu, right-click the mouse on the video. See Figure Document V4 Rev A /10

128 Enhancing Video Customizing Motion Detection with Masking By default, motion is detected everywhere in a video feed. Some of that movement may not be of any interest, such as a roadway in a window, or a door that many people walk by. Areas of no concern can be masked that is, they are hidden from motion detection so that they do not trigger an alarm. Masking an Area of the Video Feed Use the image in Figure 7-10 as an example for this procedure: 1. To perform surveillance on a door that many people walk by, start by setting a mask on the top section of the door. First, try setting a mask at the top of the door, before using the Invert Mask command. Figure 7-10 Motion Detection Mask After inverting the mask, the movement of personnel in front of the door is ignored and only door movements are detected. 2. After setting the mask, right-click the mouse on the image. A menu appears (see Figure 7-11). 3. Select the Invert Mask command; the detection is now focused on an area that moves only when the door opens. 4. Enable Log or Alarm. The log can be used to obtain video from the time(s) when the door is opened, saving a unit operator from having to search through video. Red Mask and Green Mask In motion detection, when the mask is red, movement behind a mask is ignored. The masking behaves opposite to that of motion search. In motion search, the parts that are masked in green act as motion triggers rather than as a mask. Masking Part of a Video Feed from Motion Detection 1. Check that Record/Motion/Image is selected (as in Figure 7-9). 2. Click, the Edit motion mask command. 3. You have the option of clicking to Show gridlines. The video image on the Video tab is overlaid with a grid. 4. Click areas of the video that you need to mask. To mask more than one cell at a time, press and hold Ctrl while you select cells. This will mask 3 3 cells at once. 128

129 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide False Positives A false positive (also known as a false alarm) is a common situation that triggers motion detection without posing a security risk. Sources of false positives can include: the sun s glare reflected on windows and cars, shadows, turning vehicle or building lights on and off, and direct sunlight as the day progresses. More than one technique can be used to reduce false positives: Masking. You can mask areas of a feed where movement is not a concern. Scheduling. Alarms can be scheduled not to go off at certain times of the day. See Alarms and Scheduling on page 121. Camera placement. Software settings and scheduling can compensate for many false positives, but not for all. For example, direct sunlight may require moving a camera or shielding it from the sunlight. Camera position. A camera inside a building is an effective way to use motion detection, since lighting can often be controlled. However, a window or vista, which shows a roadway or pedestrians, can trigger unwanted motion detection. Motion search. There are cases when performing a timely search for motion is more effective than constantly testing for motion. See Motion Search on page 130. Video Settings and Motion Detection When an alarm based on motion detection is enabled, changing the picture settings (brightness and so on) can trigger that alarm. You can limit the triggering of alarms by using the Delay slider in the motion detection controls. See Cameras on page 75 and Events Defined on page 205 for more information. Customizing Detection Scheduling Scheduling alarms. Motion is detected at all times. There may be times when movement may not be of any interest, such as during business hours. These times can be scheduled to not trigger any alarms. See Alarms and Scheduling on page 121. PTZ cameras. On a PTZ camera, panning, tilting or zooming can trigger motion events. You have the option of scheduling alarms for times when a PTZ camera is not moving. Motion Detection Reference Command Table 7-2 Description Motion Detection Commands Edit motion mask Show gridlines Click Edit motion mask to enable the Show gridlines button. Click Show gridlines to toggle the grid that overlays the video image on the Video tab. Document V4 Rev A /10

130 Enhancing Video Command Table 7-2 Description Motion Detection Commands (cont d) Motion preview Click Motion preview to see motion as it is detected by the unit. Colored pixels are produced as objects move: Red or green pixels indicate the detected motion is high enough to trigger an alarm or log entry, if enabled. Adjust the sensitivity until motion that needs to be reported shows up as green or red. Blue pixels indicate that motion is detected, but not reported. Hold Log Alarm Hold is the amount of time (in seconds) that motion events are ignored for after a motion event has triggered a report. The value is displayed when the slider is clicked. The Hold value ranges from 1 (short) to 60 (long). The default is 15 seconds. You can set motion in a video image to trigger a log entry by adding a checkmark to the Log box on the Video tab. You can set motion in a video image to trigger alarms by adding a checkmark to the Alarm box on the Video tab. Motion is an outside world event. For other events, see Table 10-5 on page 208. Extra Motion Detection Commands The motion detection menu offers extra commands to go with the above commands. To view it, place the mouse pointer on the tab s video and right-click the mouse. Figure 7-11 Motion Detection Menu Invert Mask: unmasks masked areas and masks unmasked areas. Clear Mask: removes all masking from the picture area. Fill Mask: adds masking to the entire picture area. This is useful as a first step when most of the image area needs masking. Undo: cancels the last click that you made. Undo All: returns the mask to its initial state, before edits were performed. Motion Search Use a Motion search to search video for motion, independently of settings made for Motion detection. A motion search is performed using the View application. See the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide, for procedures and tips. Comparing Motion Detection and Motion Search Table 7-3 shows how a Motion search is different from Motion detection. 130

131 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Table 7-3 Contrasting Motion Detection and Motion Search Operator (Task) Motion (Tool) Comments Detection. Log motion or warn of motion during Live Sessions, in real-time. session, Video tab, Motion panel This method constantly checks for motion Motion events can be logged or can trigger alarms as they occur Video feed can be masked where motion is not a concern. Search. Search recorded video for motion. session This method searches for motion after the fact Events are all listed for retrieval of video The operator can select areas of video where they want to search for motion. Tamper Detection Use of tamper detection is optional. When it is in use, operators obtain an alarm or a log entry when a camera is blinded, blurred or if there is a scene change. The settings for tamper detection are made seperately on each camera. Video is not affected by tamper detection settings. Figure 7-12 Tamper Detection Panel on the Video Tab Select Tamper Detection Document V4 Rev A /10

132 Enhancing Video Configuring Tamper Detection 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 2. Click the Video tab. By default, Record/Motion/Image is selected. 3. Select Tamper Detection. A panel is displayed for configuring tamper detection (see Figure 7-12). 4. You have the option of enabling the automatic detection of three types of sabotage: Blind, Blur or Scene Changed, singly or in combination. 5. Lower or raise the threshold of detection for each type of sabotage, by dragging each Detection Threshold cursor, as needed (see Figure 7-13). The default value is at midpoint (50), on a scale of 1 to Select Alarm or Log, as needed. See Setting an Event to Trigger an Alarm or To Be Logged on page 206. Each type of sabotage detection that is enabled will use the selection. If neither Alarm nor Log is selected, tamper detection will not be reported. TIP! The Blind type of tamper detection can be used for fixed and PTZ cameras. Caution Blur and Scene Changed are tamper detection types designed for fixed cameras only, not for PTZ use. Using pan, tilt or zoom commands will trigger Blur and Scene Change tamper detection. Calibrating of Tamper Detection Figure 7-13 Calibration of Blind Tamper Detection Meter shows the tamper detection activity Slider Threshold Detection Meter Above each slider for setting the detection threshold of Blind, Blur and Scene Changed, a meter shows the tamper detection activity. The meter is green when activity is below the threshold, and red when the activity is above the threshold. If there is no activity, the meter is empty. See Figure Blind. A camera can be blinded by too much or too little light. To calibrate, cover the camera with an opaque cloth or box, or prop a strong light in front of the camera. Blinding a camera also triggers the Blur and Scene Change types of tamper detection. Note that turning lights on/off at the scene can indirectly blind a camera. Panning a PTZ camera from a light colored scene to a darker scene (or from the dark to a light scene) can also have that effect. Lowering the threshold can compensate if blinding is detected too often. Blur. It is not recommended to alter a camera s focus after installation. To simulate a focus-blurring incident, use a lens-like sheet of glass or plastic, or a transparent container of water and prop it in front of the camera during calibration. 132

133 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Scene Changed. Activity in a scene that could be considered as sabotage drives the meter from green to red. If such activity lasts less than 48 seconds, it does not trigger an alarm or log entry. This is designed to calibrate tamper detection and to reduce the number of false positives. For example, a person walking by a camera and causes a momentary scene change is not considered sabotage unless that person remains in the scene for more than 48 seconds. For more information see Scene Changed Tamper Detection on page 133. To search the event log, use an Event search session. See Using an Event Session to Search the Event Log on page 210. Scene Changed Tamper Detection Good Image A Good Image is reported (see Figure 7-12, to the left of the Reset button) when a scene has enough features for the unit to detect if someone or something has moved the camera, and sabotage can be inferred. A Bad Image is reported when the image is indistinct, for example, if the camera is pointed at a wall of uniform color. From Learning to Running When Scene Changed is selected, or its threshold changed, the Multi-Media unit learns about the scene displayed by the camera. Learning is reported, to the left of Scene Changed, for 2 to 3 minutes, depending on the complexity of the scene. Do not blind or blur a camera while Learning is displayed. When the learning ends, Running is displayed to the left of Scene Changed. Reset is enabled when Scene Changed is enabled. Clicking Reset starts Learning again, and should be used whenever the camera is moved intentionally to view a different scene, or if the scene lighting or content changes dramatically. Reset has no effect on Blind and Blur tamper detection. Rows of Mobile Objects Scene Changed is sensitive to large scale changes in a scene. For example, using Scene Changed for a camera that shows many chairs in rows such as in an airport or casino may not be effective. Clicking Reset while people are sitting makes the unit learn that sitting persons are not to be considered as sabotage. When the chairs empty, the scene may have changed enough for the unit to trigger a log entry or alarm. And if the operator makes the unit learn when the chairs are empty, tamper detection may be triggered when people sit in the chairs. The same can be said for a row of vehicles that are frequently moved, such as a taxi stand or truck depot. Alarms After rearming an alarm produced by the Scene Changed type sabotage detection, move the camera back to the scene that you need to monitor, and click Reset. Document V4 Rev A /10

134 Enhancing Video Calculating the Length of the Video Archive Storing Video, Audio, Data Recordings of video, audio and data are not permanent. When a unit s storage fills, the oldest recorded video, audio and data are replaced with more recent recordings. The amount of time that recordings are available is known as the length of video storage. What to Watch Out For Adding cameras and using high recording rates (such as high resolution and quality settings for continuous recording) contribute to shorten the storage on a unit. Combining high settings and many cameras, can shorten a unit s storage capacity from many weeks to a few days (see Table 7-9). If a Rapid Eye unit s video storage capacity is too short for your needs, try lowering the resolution and frame rates for continuous recording (see Recording Video with Continuous Recording Settings on page 78 for more information). Scheduling Cameras can also lengthen the video storage capacity. Estimates To make storage length estimates, use Honeywell s Rapid Eye Storage Estimator that is installed with the Rapid Eye software. To compare and understand the effect of different factors on storage, see the tables for Number of Cameras, Audio, Scheduling Cameras, Frame Rate for Continuous Recording, Quality, and Resolution, in the following sections. Estimate from a Unit s Statistics If a Multi System Administrator (Multi SA) only needs to know roughly how far back in time video can be obtained, that data is available when running a Maintenance Session: Recording tab. Estimated Storage Capacity is displayed in days, see Estimating Storage Capacity on page 82. Daily Usage Rate. Is averaged over the last 7 days of activity. See Multi-Media Unit Storage Statistics on page 140. Rapid Eye Storage Estimator 134 The Storage Estimator is installed along with Rapid Eye Admin and View software. To launch the Estimator: 1. Select the Start menu All Programs Rapid Eye Multi-Media Click Storage Estimator. 3. Click OK on the About Storage Estimator window that appears. 4. Change the recording options in the Estimator, as needed, and click Apply Options to obtain an estimate of your system s storage capacity (see Figure 7-14).

135 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Length that Recorded Video Can Be Stored Based on Video Settings An operator may need to determine how far back in time that video, audio and data can be obtained from video storage. Video storage capacity is determined by adjusting various video settings (see Customizing Settings for Recorded Video on page 79). Honeywell provides a Storage Estimator with the Rapid Eye Admin and View software to show the approximate length of a unit s video storage, based on that unit s video settings. Caution High settings in combination with many cameras can shorten a unit s video storage from many weeks to a few days (see Table 7-9). If the storage capacity is too small for your needs, lower the resolution and frame rate of continuous recording. Storage Process: Video, Audio, Data Recordings of video, audio and data are not permanent. When a unit s storage fills, the oldest recorded video, audio and data are replaced with more recent recordings. The amount of time that recordings are available is known as the length of the video storage. More cameras, high recording rates, high resolution and quality settings, all contribute to shorten the video storage capacity on a unit. Scheduling can also lengthen video storage. Figure 7-14 Storage Estimator Select the type of Rapid Eye unit and software version you are using to estimate storage with. TIP! Use the Rapid Eye Storage Estimator to forecast the length of a unit s video storage. Combinations of extremely high values should only be assigned to Event Recording. Document V4 Rev A /10

136 Enhancing Video Number of Cameras and Audio Doubling the number of cameras roughly halves the length of a video archive. Table 7-4 Effect of the Number of Cameras on the Video Archive a Cameras (Recording) Duration of Video Archive (Estimated in Days) Oldest Available Video (Rounded to Shortest Time) years, 1 month months months months months 16 + audio 57 1 month a Resolution = 320 x 240. Frame Rate = 1. Quality = 8. Storage = 500 GB. Audio At default recording values, adding audio has roughly the same effect as adding 4 cameras. If enabled, use Table 7-4 and find the number of cameras connected to your unit. Then go to the next line to find out what the estimated duration is for those cameras with audio enabled. At higher recording values, audio takes a smaller percentage of the archive. Scheduling Cameras Scheduling can lengthen a video archive. One example of effective scheduling is for the recording of transactions that do not occur 24/7, as shown in Table 7-5. See Scheduling Configuration on page 117. Table 7-5 Effect of Camera Scheduling on the Video Archive Recording (Hours / Days) Recording Suspended (%) Video Archive (in Days) Oldest Avaialble Video (To Closest Date) 24/7 a years, 1 month 12/5 + 24/2 b years, 11 months 12/7 c years, 3 months 8/5 d years, 3 months a Default value: every day, all hours, for one camera. Resolution = 320 x 240. Frame rate = 1. Quality = 8. Storage = 500 GB. b Nights and weekends. c Nights only; all week long. d Business hours, five days a week. 136

137 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Frame Rate for Continuous Recording Table 7-6 shows how higher frame rates can reduce the length of a video archive. For more cameras, divide the time of the archive by the number of cameras. Table 7-6 Effect of Frame Rates on the Video Archive Frame Rate (Images Per Second) Video Archive (Estimated in Days) Oldest Available Video a (Rounded to Shortest Time) 1 (default value) years 1 month year, 6 months months months month a For one camera. Resolution = 320 x 240. Quality = 8. Storage = 500 GB. Quality Video Compression (Quality) A higher Quality setting means less video compression is used for recording, shortening the length of the video archive (see Table 7-7). For example, setting Quality to 10 uses up almost twice as much storage as a setting of 6. At sites where storage is at a premium, you can lower the recording quality to six compression units. Table 7-7 shows that this quality setting can give you about 25% more storage while leaving the other settings unchanged. Pan, Tilt, and Zoom Recording a video feed from a camera that is constantly panning requires much more storage space. If the duration of your video archive is a concern, Honeywell recommends that you reconsider if constant panning is necessary to your security needs. See Behavior of PTZ After a Session Closes on page 103. Table 7-7 Recording Quality (Compression Unit) Effect of Quality Settings on the Video Archive Duration of Video Archive (Estimated in Days) Oldest Available Video a (Rounded to Shortest Time) Weeks years, 11 months (default value) years, 1 month years, 3 months 110 a For one camera. Resolution = 320 x 240. Frame Rate = 1. Storage = 500 GB. Document V4 Rev A /10

138 Enhancing Video Resolution Recording video at higher resolutions than the default value uses up more storage on a Multi-Media unit. Your organization can decide if it prefers high resolution video images that are stored for a shorter length of time, or low resolution images that can be stored longer. Table 7-8 Recording Resolution: Effect on Video Archive Video Standard Resolution (Pixels) Video Archive (Estimated in Days) Oldest Available Video a (Rounded to Shortest Time) NTSC 160 x years, 1 month NTSC 320 x 240 b years, 1 month NTSC 640 x year, 7 months NTSC 640 x months NTSC 704 x months PAL c 192 x years, 1 month PAL c 384 x years, 2 months PAL c 704 x year, 4 months PAL c 704 x months a For one camera. Frame Rate = 1. Quality = 8. Storage = 500 GB. b Default Honeywell settings. c PAL images are larger than NTSC and require more storage. This accounts for a shorter archive. Note See Rapid Eye Storage Estimator on page 134 for more information on the Honeywell estimating tool. Using Higher Values When Recording Video For Continuous Recording, heightening Resolution, Quality and Frame Rate in combination, compounds the effect on storage. Examples are shown for one camera and for nine cameras, on a unit that has 500 GB of storage. Table 7-9 Comparing the Available Storage for One Camera to Nine Resolution Frame Rate Quality 1 Camera (Archive) 9 Cameras (Archive) Storage (Cam-Days) Lowest 160 x Result: 15 years, 7 mo. 1 year, 8 mo

139 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Table 7-9 Comparing the Available Storage for One Camera to Nine (cont d) Resolution Frame Rate Quality 1 Camera (Archive) 9 Cameras (Archive) Storage (Cam-Days) Default 320 x Result: 2 years, 11 mo. 0 years, 4 mo High, plus Quality 704 x 480 (max) 1 10 (max) Result: 6 months 21 days 190 High, plus Frames 704 x Result: 19 days 2 days a Result: 6 days 0 days 6 a A frame rate of 30 ips can be used on 1 to 4 cameras. A maximum of 10 ips can be used for 9 cameras. Caution Honeywell recommends that you use high video recording values only for event recording. Obtaining Unit Statistics 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Please wait until a System Operational message appears in the Feedback field. 2. Click the Statistics tab. There may be a delay, depending on the type of connection to the site, until the Feedback box displays Statistics received. 3. To update the statistics, click Refresh. Table 7-10 Storage Statistics for a Multi-Media Unit Label Meaning Unit Storage Capacity Total disk space on unit. Gigabyte (GB) Daily Usage Rate The portion of storage used in the last twenty-four hours. For new units, or after clearing storage, the report of Daily Usage Rate can be accurate within minutes. In regular use, it is averaged over the latest 7 days of activity. Percentage of storage capacity Document V4 Rev A /10

140 Enhancing Video Table 7-10 Storage Statistics for a Multi-Media Unit (cont d) Label Meaning Unit Estimated Capacity Time Elapsed a The amount of storage, based upon past performance. The number may differ from the estimate obtained using the Rapid Eye Storage Estimator, due to fluctuations in the video signal. The estimated capacity diminishes if the Continuous recording settings (resolution, quality, ips) are set to higher values and as more cameras are added. The time that has passed since the latest change to configuration or latest reboot of the Multi-Media unit. Can also be used to estimate the oldest available image a. Day Day, hour, minute, second Percent Full The portion of storage in use. At 100%, recycling occurs. Percentage of storage capacity Stream Device connected to a Multi-Media unit (a camera, microphone, and so on). Text Start Time Time of earliest data. UTC (Universal coordinated time) End Time Time of latest data. Percentage of data Stream ID N/A; for Multi technical support. Integer a Most helpful on a unit that records continuously. If a unit is off or stops recording for awhile, introducing gaps in the video archive, time elapsed still reports only the oldest available video. Multi-Media Unit Storage Statistics Figure 7-15 Statistics Tab Showing Storage Statistics Other Statistics About the Video Archive The Recording tab shows an Estimated Storage Capacity in days. See Estimating Storage Capacity on page

141 8 Configuring Other Hardware Working with Storage Clearing Storage Clearing the storage of a Multi-Media unit or of one of its streams is a drastic measure that is irreversible and time consuming. Recorded video, sound and data will be permanently erased. Clearing streams or storage should be handled with care. Clearing the storage may be needed in the rare cases where a unit is: Disposed of Moved or transferred to another organization. Figure 8-1 Clear Storage Button on Statistics Tab Be careful when clicking Clear Storage or Clear Stream. Data will be irretrievably lost. Caution The only safeguard to prevent unnecessary use of Clear Storage is setting a password to the Administrator account. When you click Clear Storage or Clear Stream, video and data are irretrievably lost. Document V4 Rev A /10

142 Configuring Other Hardware Clearing Unit Storage 1. Using View, run a Maintenance Session. On the Statistics tab, click Clear Storage. See Figure A password dialog box appears. If: There is a password for the Administrator account, enter that password. There isn t a password for the account, do nothing and go to the next step. 3. Click Yes. All video, audio, alarms and other stored data is erased. The time needed to clear storage is about fifteen seconds for each gigabyte of storage. Caution Clearing storage cannot be stopped or reversed, even by turning the unit off. Turning the unit off will only suspend the process. Storage continues to clear the next time the unit is powered. It is an irreversible process. Clearing a Stream A stream is the information from one camera or data device. You may need to clear one or more streams, if there is ever: A move or transfer of a camera or unit to another location. Some testing of a new camera, or training operators to use PTZs, and so on. Changing the Name of a Stream Different names can be assigned to cameras on the Video tab (see Cameras on page 75). The name of a device set up by the customer is assigned on the Serial Devices tab (see Customer Data and Customer Device Events on page 157). Preventing Users from Clearing Storage Add or Change the Password to the Administrator Account The Administrator password acts as a safeguard to prevent the error of clearing storage by mistake. To set this password, see Administrator Password on page 195. Right to View the Statistics Tab Your Multi SA can remove the right to use and view the Statistics tab from a View operator account. See Right to Use Maintenance on page 198. Caution Multi SAs who do not add a password to the Administrator account also remove a safeguard to prevent inadvertently clearing the storage. 142

143 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Tracing the Clearing of Storage Trace the moment storage clearing happens by making this event an alarm. See Tracing Events on page 210, and Events Defined on page 205. Prevent future storage clearings by changing the Administrator account password. Caution Clearing of a unit s entire storage or of one of its streams can have a major impact on that site s security. All recorded video is lost. During the time that a unit is emptied a Multi-Media unit cannot record video, send alarms, and so on. Your Multi SA should warn View operators that use of the Clear Storage and Clear Stream buttons not advisable without first communicating the reasoning to your organization s security personnel. Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit Figure 8-2 Securing a Unit after Changing Passwords Click Update security to update the security information on a unit. 1. Use View to start a Maintenance Session for the Multi-Media unit. 2. Click Update security on the Security tab of a Maintenance Session (see Figure 8-2). Information from the Multi db is copied to the Multi-Media unit. Please wait until the message Updated security appears. 3. You have the option of updating security on other units, and/or ending the Maintenance Session, as explained in Ending Maintenance on page 71. Document V4 Rev A /10

144 Configuring Other Hardware Purpose A unit s security settings need to be updated if a Multi SA adds, changes or removes: Alarm stations. See Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports, page 218, and Making an Alarm Station Operational on page 233. The system password. See System Password, page 184, and Security Priorities on page 180. Authorized remote operators of a site. See Denying Access to a User of Your Multi System on page 214. Authorized onsite operators. See Central User Management on page 170. Removing a Site After Updating Security After updating the security of a Multi-Media unit, care should be taken to make a record of the system password. The system password is needed if you need to make a new site definition for the Multi-Media unit. See Deleting a Site on page 37. System Files Your Multi System Administrator (Multi SA) or your organization s security officer may find it useful to download a copy of a unit s System Log or other system file, as needed. Downloads of files from a Multi-Media unit are safer than uploading files. Uploads should be performed by trained personnel. Figure 8-3 File Transfers to or from a Unit Uploading and promoting. Sending a file to a Multi-Media unit. Downloading. Receiving a file from a Multi-Media unit. TIP! Check if the System Operational message appears in the Feedback box before performing the procedure Downloading a File from a Multi-Media Unit, page

145 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide System Files and Associated Rapid Eye Settings Table 8-1 lists the different system files that can be downloaded and the configuration settings on the Rapid Eye unit that each file is associated with. Table 8-1 System File System.xml Rules.xml Security.xml User.xml Sensors.xml LocalView.xml Rapid Eye Downloadable System Files and Settings Settings Associated with the System File System Settings Cameras Audio Eagle Audio Modem Serial Devices Switchers Rules Events based recording Scheduling Site Name Access Privileges Denied Users Alarm Stations User Name and credential Sensor Name (GPIO) Unit User Preferences Downloading a File from a Multi-Media Unit 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 2. Click the System Files tab (see Figure 8-4). 3. Select a system file in the System Files list. For example, select system.log (see Logging System Messages, page 148). Only one file can be selected at a time. 4. Click Download. A Receive file from Remote Site dialog box appears. 5. Specify the location where you want to download the file to. You also have the option of renaming the file. 6. Click Save. A copy of the file is sent from the Multi-Media unit to the location specified in step Use a text editor or word processor to view the contents of the file. Document V4 Rev A /10

146 Configuring Other Hardware Figure 8-4 Downloading the System.log File from a Multi-Media Unit To receive a system file from a Multi-Media unit. Uploading a File to a Multi-Media Unit An upgrade to a Rapid Eye Multi-Media unit, or its reconfiguration, means uploading new system files to the unit. Caution Only trained View operators should perform uploads on a Rapid Eye Multi-Media unit. 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 2. Before proceeding, check if the System Operational message appears in the Feedback box. 3. Click the System Files tab. 4. Click Upload. The Send file to remote site dialog box appears. 5. Specify the name of the file that you are planning to upload, and its location (on the PC or network). Caution Double-check that you are uploading the correct file. The file name should not be more than eight characters long. Uploading the wrong file can halt a Multi-Media unit, causing that site to become inoperable. 6. Click Open. A copy of the file is sent to the Multi-Media unit; its name appears in the Temporary files pane. Uploading on slow connections can take a few minutes. 7. Either: Click Promote, OR Abandon the upload by clicking Clear, then skip the next step. 146

147 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 8. You have the following options: Upload more files. Repeat step 3 to step 6, as needed. Empty the Temporary Files list. Click Clear. System Tab in a Maintenance Session Each part of the System tab is discussed in turn. Default System data is listed in Table 8-3. Multi-Media Unit Registration During the first Multi-Media unit s Maintenance Session, the Serial Number (the site name in the site definition) and Software version are obtained from the Multi-Media unit and displayed in the upper-left corner of the System tab, under Site Info. The version of a Multi-Media unit s software may differ from the version number of the Admin and View applications. See Making a Site Operational on page 63. Figure 8-5 System Tab and Configuration Options See Camera Signal Format on page 149 for more information. See Changing Network Settings on a Unit on page 150 for more information. See Setting a Bandwidth Throughput Option on page 149 for more information. See Making the Fault Relay Operational on page 148 for more information. See Changing the Maximum Network Data Rate on page 151 for more information. See Enabling or Disabling Local Monitoring on page 149 for more information. Document V4 Rev A /10

148 Configuring Other Hardware Logging System Messages The system message log is useful mostly to Multi technical support personnel. Placing a checkmark in the Log System Messages box sets the Multi-Media unit to log all commands received in a system.log file, stored on the unit. The system.log file stores the 10,000 most recent entries. It will not get larger over time, the older entries are overwritten by new ones. How to obtain a copy of the system.log file is explained in System Files on page 144. Other Multi Logs Take care not to confuse System.log messages of commands with the logs of alarms or events. For the alarm log, see Alarm Log on page 259; for the events log, see Events Defined on page 205. System Monitor Enable status pulse. Enables the Fault Relay to trigger. Power outages and other causes can lead to a unit s failure to record video or failure to function. Failure to do either, for more than 19 minutes, triggers the Fault Relay located on the unit s back-panel. See the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. Monitor alarm reporting. Enables delays greater than 19 minutes in the reporting of alarms to trigger the Fault Relay. The monitoring is designed to report alarms that have not reached their designated alarm station, because that alarm station is unavailable. Making the Fault Relay Operational 1. On the System tab, add a checkmark to Enable Status Pulse and/or Monitor Alarm Reporting checkboxes (see Figure 8-5). 2. On the Events tab, click the Outputs subtab. 3. Output 6 can no longer be configured for logging or alarms. You have the option of entering a new name in the box. 148

149 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 8-6 Enabling the Fault Relay Changes the Output 6 Options Camera Signal Format NTSC or PAL. Signal Format is a global setting for all cameras (see Figure 8-5). Enabling or Disabling Local Monitoring The LocalView user interface uses Rapid Eye resources even if it is not used in your system. For example, if all the Rapid Eye users only connect with Remote View and Admin applications, LocalView will be using Rapid Eye resources for no benefit. If users in your Rapid Eye system do not use LocalView, you can disable it in the Local Monitoring section from the System tab of a Maintenance session (see Figure 8-5). Enable is the default setting. Select the Disable option to disable LocalView. This should improve the performance of your Rapid Eye DVR as resources are not wasted on an unused feature. Once disabled, LocalView can only be used to configure network settings. Setting a Bandwidth Throughput Option The available bandwidth of the network your Rapid Eye unit(s) are connected to will affect the Rapid Eye performance and the quality of the live video displayed by the Remote View application. This option is only available on Rapid Eye units running V9 software. You have the option of specifying your network s bandwidth capability in the Throughput section from the System tab of a Maintenance session (see Figure 8-5). Low is the default setting. Select High if your network uses LAN-type network speeds. Keep this setting at Low if your network uses a slower network (such as dial-up). Document V4 Rev A /10

150 Configuring Other Hardware LAN/WAN Communications Communications settings for local- or wide-area networks (LAN/WAN) are set in the Network Settings fields when the Multi-Media unit is installed. The System tab offers a convenient report of these network settings, which are seldom changed. Caution Communications to a unit can be temporarily disabled by entering invalid network data. An onsite technician has to re-enable it. Your organization s network administrator may request changes to a unit s communication settings when: A change is made to the network that harbors the unit. Moving a unit to another network or owner. See Clearing Storage on page 141 and Removing a System Password on page 188. When moving a unit to another network or network address, you have the option of changing the Multi-Media unit s addresses in the boxes for: IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway, before the unit is turned off. This avoids having to use the configuration shell to make changes after the move. These changes can also be made using LocalView. Changing Network Settings on a Unit 1. See your network administrator about any planned changes to the Network Settings. 2. Using View, continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 3. On the System tab, enter changes in the IP Address, Subnet Mask or Gateway fields, as needed for the Multi-Media unit, and approved by your network administrator. Default addresses are listed in Table 8-2. You cannot make these changes if the unit is set to Use DHCP. Caution The next step can make the unit unavailable until the new network connection is operational. If a mistake is made and there is a dial-up connection to the unit, you can still access the unit by modem. 4. Click Apply, then confirm that you want to send the configuration data. The Maintenance Session ends by itself. TIP! Changing the Internet protocol address, in the IP Address box requires Admin to change the site s connection information. See Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit on page

151 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Table 8-2 Box Default Network Communications Settings Value a IP Address of Multi-Media Unit Subnet Mask Gateway a These values are usually changed when installing units connected to a network. For more information about networked units, see the Network Connections section in the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. Changing the Maximum Network Data Rate The operator enters the Maximum Network data rate, to Send no more than n kilobits per second, where n is a number between 10 and Note that some numbers are not ideal to lower the data rate optimally and are automatically adjusted by the software to the closest, better value. For example, if an operator enters 33, the software will display the closest optimal value (32), at the next Maintenance Session. 1. Using View, continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 2. On the System tab, enable the Regulate Data Rate checkbox and enter a number in the field. The default setting is 32. TCP Ports The transmission control protocol (TCP) ports are listed in the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. These TCP ports should be left open in a firewall for sockets used in Multi operations. For example, Multi sessions (live, retrieval and alarm) are sent to port 10,000. Default System Values for a Multi-Media Unit Table 8-3 System Tab Default Values Box Group Name of Box/Button Default Site Info Serial Number N/A a ; stored on unit Software Upgrade button N/A a ; stored on unit None Network Settings Use DHCP Enabled Site Name. See the sticker on the unit. N/A a ; stored on unit, for DHCP use. Format: REM serial number IP Address b Document V4 Rev A /10

152 Configuring Other Hardware Table 8-3 System Tab Default Values (cont d) Box Group Name of Box/Button Default Subnet Mask b Gateway b MAC Address N/A a ; stored on unit, for DHCP use Throughput High/Low Low Signal Format NTSC / PAL NTSC System Monitor Enable Status Pulse Off; see System Monitor, page 148 Monitor Alarm Reporting Off Max Network Data Regulate Data Rate Off Send no more than [ ] 32 kilobits per second c Local Monitoring Enable/Disable Enable a Factory settings to identify the unit software and hardware. b Unavailable when DHCP is enabled. On networks that are not DHCP-enabled, the DHCP default times out and is set to off. c Unavailable while Regulate Data Rate is not selected. Setting Up a Modem Serial Device A dial-up connection is optional. Internal modems in Multi-Media units can remain unused. Modem Settings Modems are set up using the Serial Devices tab. The Serial Devices tab shows an Internal Port that either lists a modem or nothing at all. If the Internal Port holds a modem, the modem cannot be deleted. The internal port cannot receive devices from the New devices or the Unassigned devices groups. Caution Changing modem values in the next step can make the unit unavailable for dial-up connection. If you are unsure, see your Multi SA. 152

153 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Viewing and Changing Modem Settings 1. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Please wait until a System Operational message appears. 2. Click the Serial Devices tab. 3. Click the Internal Port - Modem icon. Boxes appear in the right half of the Serial Devices tab (Baud Rate, Wait for Connection, and so on). The box names and their default values are listed in Table You have the option of changing the values, as needed. Figure 8-7 Serial Devices Tab Showing Internal Port-Modem Data Port icons Modem icon For an external modem, drag the modem icon to the port icon. Table 8-4 Default Modem and Dial-Up Communications Settings Device Box Value Modem hardware Baud Wait for Connection 60 Prefix Initialization Dialing AT Z D PPP temporary network Client IP Host IP Document V4 Rev A /10

154 Configuring Other Hardware PPP IP Settings Reserved for Modem Connection During a dial-up connection, temporary network communications are established between the Rapid Eye site and the PC. A Host IP address for the Multi-Media unit is auto-detected by the Microsoft Dial-Up Networking application. Different terms are used to describe these communication points. To avoid confusion, these terms are listed in Table 8-5. Table 8-5 Names of Temporary TCP/IP Addresses, for PPP Address a Internal Port Description Installation Shell PPP: client IP At operator PC host PPP: host IP At Multi-Media unit local a This is not the Multi-Media unit network addressed as discussed in System Tab in a Maintenance Session on page 147. The default, point-to-point protocol (PPP) IP settings can be changed, in the unlikely event that they conflict with another network device (printer, scanner, and so on). Setting an External Modem 1. Consult the installer to find out which port on the unit is connected to the external modem. 2. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Click the Serial Devices tab. 3. Click the Internal Port - Modem icon. Boxes appear in the right half of the Serial Devices tab (Baud Rate, Wait for Connection, and so on). 4. Change the values to those suggested by the external modem s documentation. 5. Drag the modem icon to the port icon with the number of the port identified in step 1. PTZ Serial Device A PTZ serial device is only used to control cameras that pan, tilt and zoom (PTZ). A Multi SA obtains the Multi-Media unit s port number that is used for PTZ functions from the installers of a Multi-Media system or by taking note of the back panel of the unit. PTZ Device Settings A PTZ device is set using a Maintenance Session, on the Serial Devices tab. It enables the PTZ settings on the Video tab. See Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup on page

155 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Assigning and Setting a PTZ Device 1. Consult the installer to find out which serial port of the unit the PTZ cameras are connected to. If more than one PTZ camera shares the same serial communications line, make a note of the address set on each camera. 2. Continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. 3. Click the Serial Devices tab. A PTZ device is either: Assigned to a Port. Click PTZ. The settings are displayed and can be changed. In the Unassigned Devices group. Click PTZ. The settings are displayed and can be changed. In the New Devices group. Drag the PTZ icon and drop it either on the Unassigned Devices group or on a Port. If you drop it on a port that is already assigned to another device, the PTZ device replaces it. The displaced device is sent to the Unassigned Devices group. 4. Change the values to those suggested by the PTZ camera documentation. 5. Drag the modem icon to the port icon with the number of the port identified in step 1. Hardware Report During a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site, click the Hardware tab. The report includes a serial number of the Multi-Media unit on the Rapid Eye site, the version of software running the Multi-Media unit, the date of manufacture, and internal hardware used by the unit. Using Monitor Output 1 as a Public Display Monitor A public display monitor can be set up independently of LocalView, on Multi-Media and Multi-Media LT units. There is no need for converters between the monitor and the Multi-Media unit. 1. Mount a monitor where you plan to have it display a video feed. For NTSC cameras, use an NTSC video monitor; for PAL cameras, use a PAL monitor. 2. Connect a coaxial cable to the INPUT connector on the video monitor. 3. Connect the other end of the coaxial cable to MONITOR OUTPUT 1, on the back of the Multi-Media unit (or Multi-Media LT unit). 4. Using View, continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Click the Monitor Out tab. 5. Select a camera that will be seen on the monitor in the Cameras to Choose from box (see Figure 8-8). Document V4 Rev A /10

156 Configuring Other Hardware 6. Enter a number in the Duration box. The number sets the amount of time (in seconds) that the video feed is displayed on the monitor. If only one camera is listed, the duration is ignored and the feed is continuously displayed. When many cameras are listed, the monitor sequences through them for the time specified. You have the option of changing the duration directly in the list by selecting it and entering another value. 7. Click Add. Repeat step 5, to step 7 to add more video feeds to the public monitor. A camera can be included multiple times in the same tour. Color Bars On Multi-Media DSP units, the MONITOR OUTPUT 1 connector on the back of the Multi-Media unit cannot produce a test pattern. For these units, the Color Bars option is not available, on the Monitor Out tab of a Maintenance Session. External Hardware Control of a Public Display Monitor You can connect a third-party hardware switch to a Multi-Media unit. The switch can freeze a public display monitor and control whether the next camera or previous camera is monitored. For wiring details, see Table 8-6 and the switch documentation. To enable local hardware control of a public display monitor: 1. Using View, continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site (as explained in Maintenance Session on page 61). 2. Click the Monitor Out tab. 3. Enable the Enable External Control checkbox (see Figure 8-8). This reserves a Multi-Media unit s General Purpose Inputs 13, 14 and 15 for switch use. Figure 8-8 Monitor Out Tab, for a Unit s Monitor Output 1 156

157 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Table 8-6 Inputs for External Control of Monitor Output 1 General Purpose Input Instructs the Video Capture Card To 13 Display previous camera 14 Display next camera 15 Continue or pause public display monitor a a A selection of video feeds from one unit for use with a public display monitor is very different from site tours, involving many Rapid Eye sites (see Touring Many Sites on page 253) or PTZ tours, preset PTZ movements (see Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup on page 95). Use of a local user interface is also unrelated to these public display monitor settings. Using LocalView as an Additional Public Display Monitor For a better public display of video, Honeywell recommends using a dedicated NTSC (or PAL) monitor, rather than the VGA output used for LocalView. Nonetheless, you have the option of using the VGA monitor displaying LocalView as a public display monitor or as a secondary public display monitor (in addition to a dedicated monitor). Set LocalView to display the camera(s) that you need. More than one camera can be displayed simultaneously. Customer Data and Customer Device Events View can display messages from many non-multi hardware devices and systems such as cash registers, door access sensors, a guest registration system, and so on. A Multi-Media unit can record these messages. Video From a Customer Device Event A message from a third-party device is treated as a Customer device event by a Multi-Media unit (see Events Defined on page 205). You have the option of having up to 100 messages per device either logged, trigger an alarm or both. These customer device events are synchronized to the recorded event video. Document V4 Rev A /10

158 Configuring Other Hardware Preparation Before defining customer device events and using them as alarms, a View operator needs: Serial communication settings of the customer device. These are obtained from the device s manufacturer and are required to correctly receive data from the device. Specific rights added to a typical View user account: the Modify configuration right and access to the site that is connected to the device. See Removing Multi-Media Software on page 216. To know which serial port on a Multi-Media unit is used by the device, and knowing if it is already being used by other devices, such as a PTZ camera, and so on. To know how strings of text are formatted and produced by the customer device(s). Adding a Customer Device that Sends Data to a Unit In this procedure, let us suppose that the owner of a retail store wants video of an employee at a point-of-sale (POS), when goods are purchased. Assume that a cash register is connected to a Multi-Media unit and you know the cash register communication settings. 1. Start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Wait until a System Operational message appears. Click the Serial Devices tab. 2. Expand New Devices (as needed) to see a Data Input icon (see Figure 8-9). 3. Drag the Data Input icon to a port icon, as needed. If you drop the icon on a port that is already assigned to another device, the POS device replaces it and the displaced device is sent to the Unassigned Devices group. 4. To name the interface between Multi and the cash register, select the Device Name box for the Serial device (see Figure 8-9), and enter a name, for example, Cash1. Click elsewhere on the View window to save the name. 5. Set the communication parameters (Baud Rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits, and Parity Bits) to values recommended by the manufacturer of the device. 6. Ignore the Buffer Size for now. To add a data recording rule, see Adding an Event Rule for a Data Recording Device. 7. Select the Log or Alarm checkboxes to log the event (No Sale in the Figure 8-9 example) or have it trigger an alarm. 158

159 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 8-9 Some Devices Can Be Searched for Data Such as No Sale Adding an Event Rule for a Data Recording Device 1. While adding a data recording serial device (as explained in Adding a Customer Device that Sends Data to a Unit, page 158), select the Event Name box and enter a name (for example, No Sale, see Figure 8-9). 2. In the Event Rule box, enter: A code obtained from the manufacturer of the device. For example, a no sale message from a device is coded as one or more numbers, or text (refer to the documentation for the device). - or - A regular expression of your choice (see Reference for Searching Rules and Regular Expressions on page 160). 3. Click Add. 4. The default Buffer Size value of 250 bytes should be adequate for most organizations; however, consider that you may need to use a bigger buffer if any rules use wildcards (see Table 8-7). For large rules, change the number of bytes in the Buffer Size field so that there are twice as many bytes as there are keystrokes in the longest rule entered in step 2 of this procedure. 5. You have the option of adding more events, as many as 512 different events or regular expressions can be processed for each data recording device. Document V4 Rev A /10

160 Configuring Other Hardware Reference for Searching Rules and Regular Expressions Table 8-7 lists the special characters available for use when making rules in the Rule box. Technical users who know how to use a regular expression (RE) will benefit most from using Table 8-7. Also, there are examples of extended data searches in the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide. Table 8-7 Special Characters Available for a Search Rule Character Name Searches for a Match of ( ) Within the Rule. Period Any one character. Ex:.ire finds wire, tire, 4ire, and so on. [ ] Square brackets Each character in the brackets, in turn. Ex: c[aou]t finds cat, cot or cut. ^ Caret Characters that are not in brackets. Ex: r[^a] finds rb, rc, ra, r1 and so on. A rule at the beginning of a line. Ex: ^Hume finds Hume at the start of lines. A control code, when used with a backslash. Ex: \^C finds the control-c control code. $ Dollar sign A rule at the end of a line, when placed after it. Ex: Kant$ finds only Kant at the end of lines. - Dash A range of characters set in square brackets. Ex: [a-z] matches any lower case letter. + Plus sign The character that it follows, once or more. Ex: tu+ finds tu, tuu, tuuu, and so on. * Asterisk The character that it follows, whether absent, occurring once or more. Ex: mo*e finds me, moe, mooe, moooe Ex: c[au]*t finds ct, cat, caat, cut, cuut? Question mark The character that follows the question mark, whether absent or occurring once. Ex: me?y matches either mey or me. \ Backslash Special character, when placed before it. Ex: \? Finds?. Control character, when placed before it. Ex: \b finds a backspace, \e an Esc (escape), \f a form feed, \n a new line, \r a carriage return, \t a tab and \x0d a hexadecimal encoded ASCII character. 160

161 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide NetPIT and PIT Devices Support for Protocol Interface Translators Honeywell supports Protocol Interface Translators (PITs) and a networked Protocol Interface Translator (NetPIT), for attaching many serial devices to a Multi-Media unit. Figure 8-10 Cash Registers Connected to a Honeywell PIT Protocol Interface Translator (PIT) Rapid Eye Multi-Media unit Set of customer devices that can send data A NetPIT device provides communications for up to 16 point-of-sale (POS) devices from one serial port. NetPIT supports applications by Retalix (RetPIT), Micros (MicPIT) and AtmPIT. A PIT can provide communications for one device (AVBPIT1) or up to four devices (AVBPIT4POS). See Figure When assigned to a port on a Multi-Media unit, the configuration values of the serial interface are shown (see Figure 8-11). Figure 8-11 A NetPIT Device on PORT 3 Showing Serial Interface Settings NetPIT device on Port 3 When expanded, a NetPIT device shows 16 virtual ports, labeled A to P (see Figure 8-12). A PIT device (AVBPIT4POS) shows 4 virtual ports, labeled A to D. When a device is assigned to a virtual port, the settings of that device are shown on the Serial Devices tab. Each virtual port can be configured independently for speed, data format, and protocol. For the details of the configuration for these devices, refer to their documentation. Document V4 Rev A /10

162 Configuring Other Hardware Figure 8-12 Expanded NetPIT Device on PORT 3, Showing Four POS Devices Port Restrictions A PIT device cannot be assigned to the virtual port of a NetPIT. Only one NetPIT device can be assigned to a Multi-Media port. Multi Audio Channels can be renamed. View operators use audio channels to: Listen, using a microphone at the Rapid Eye site. Talk, by talking on one channel, or broadcasting on both. All sound sources are mixed at a View operator s station, regardless of the number of sites being monitored at once. Each Rapid Eye site can send up to two channels of audio to a View operator. Audio Hardware Microphones, powered speakers, and so on, need to be connected to a Multi-Media unit. The operator PC also needs a microphone and speaker for two-way audio, and a sound card. For more details about audio hardware connections, refer to the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. A PC running View requires a sound card to transmit sound to and from the Rapid Eye site. 162

163 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Using Multi Audio Monitor, Record and Broadcast Audio 1. Using View, continue or start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Click the Audio tab. 2. Select the Enable boxes to enable transmission of sound from point to point and monitor it. 3. Select the Record box to record sound along with the video from the site. You can monitor, record or do both, for each channel of audio. 4. Select the monitor Talk (Audio Out) boxes, as needed for each channel (see Figure 8-13). An operator can broadcast on either one or both of the channels, and to as many sites at once as can be opened. Figure 8-13 Audio Tab Audio Interference Checking one s installation for hard-to-predict situations includes spotchecking for: Live audio. Coordinate the testing of audio with fire alarm and security alarm testing. Using View, connect to that Multi-Media unit and check audio for feedback and interference, before and during alarms. Caution Loud alarms can interfere with microphones or a speaker at times when they could be needed most. Recorded audio. After a day or two, check for background noise in recordings, using a retrieval session to spotcheck each microphone for a few seconds at every half-hour or so, during a 24-hour period. This can reveal if microphones are placed too near sources of background noise (such as a vent) that are amplified to a point where they Document V4 Rev A /10

164 Configuring Other Hardware interfere with audio. Hard to predict noise from the area rush-hour traffic, passing trains and planes, crowds in a stadium, and so on may not have been apparent during the installation of the microphones and speakers. Using Audio with LocalView At sites where LocalView is in use, Channel 2 can be reserved for use onsite. View operators using these sites can use only Channel 1. Audio can be changed by Multi System Administrators by using View to connect to the Multi-Media unit. Enabling Audio for Onsite Use by LocalView 1. On the Audio Setup tab, add a checkmark to the Channel 2 (Right) Used by Site Operator for Local Audio Monitoring checkbox. The channel 2 Enable, Record and name fields become unavailable. They are not needed for monitoring audio by a LocalView operator. 2. In the Channel 1 controls, add checkmarks to the Enable boxes for Talk, Listen or both, as needed. 3. You have the option of adding checkmarks to Record boxes for Talk, Listen or both, as needed. The Enable box needs to be checked before the Record box can be. Disabling Audio for LocalView Using either View (or LocalView), on the Audio tab, remove the checkmark from the Channel 2 (Right) Used by Site Operator for Local Audio Monitoring checkbox. Eagle Audio Eagle Audio is discussed in the Multi and Eagle Audio Configuration Guide, Please contact your Multi distributor if you need more information about Eagle Audio. TIP! Multi Audio differs from Eagle Audio, which is an optional, third party, audio interface. 164

165 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Multiple Operators Connecting to One Unit Sessions Table 8-8 Session Type Maximum Simultaneous Sessions Number of View Operators a Who Can Participate Live or Live-alarm 10 Retrieval 10 Event 10 Data 10 Alarm 10 Motion 10 Maintenance 1 b a Number of operators that can share the streams that are left from a unit s pool of available streams (see Table 8-9). For Multi-Media LT units, the number of simultaneous View operators may be less. b Other sessions are terminated if the Reboot command is used in a Maintenance Session. Example of Session Availability When ten operators open a Retrieval session to the same unit, an eleventh operator cannot. However, that operator could open another type of session (such as Live or Event). Streams Table 8-9 Session a Live Stream Availability from One Unit Video (Stream) Audio (Stream) Data (stream) 32 b Available in each Live Available in each Live session session Retrieval a For the number of sessions available from one unit (see Table 8-8). b For live video streams, there is an additional limitation (see Live Video). Document V4 Rev A /10

166 Configuring Other Hardware Example of Stream Availability Two operators open a Retrieval session to the same unit, and each operator monitors video from 16 cameras. A third operator can open a Retrieval session to the same unit, but cannot monitor recorded video, since a total of 32 streams of recorded video, available from that unit, are already in use. For live audio, up to ten operators running Live sessions could each hear the channels of Live audio, and each could monitor all data streams. Live Video Limitation on Viewing Live Video in Many Live Sessions When live video is being monitored, use of live video from cameras from the same group of cameras cannot total more than eight. The groups of cameras are defined in Table For example: Let 2 operators view live video from 3 cameras in group C (3 cameras 2 operators = 6 live streams). A third operator can view live video using only 2 of the cameras in group C. Let 8 operators, each running a live session, use the same live camera. A ninth operator cannot view live video using a camera from the same group. Table 8-10 Camera Groups Group Camera port # A 1, 8, 11, 14 B 2, 5, 12, 15 C 3, 6, 9, 16 D 4, 7, 10, 13 One Operator Connecting to Multiple Units Up to 64 simultaneous connections to different units can be made by one operator. This number can be lower due to the CPU of the PC running View, the PC s memory and the number of other tasks running. Audio Broadcast Audio can be broadcast to many units simultaneously, using the View application. To broadcast audio, click Talk in more than one player before using the microphone at the operator PC. 166

167 9 Managing User Accounts Key Facts Flexibility Account Users Operate Units Administrator Account System Password Using LocalView Only If one operator, or very few users are operating the Multi-Media unit(s) in your organization, you may not need to create user accounts (see Default User on page 168). However, in organizations with many Rapid Eye operators or units, Honeywell recommends creating user accounts for unit operators. A Multi SA creates accounts so that personnel can operate the units. Accounts created using LocalView can only be used onsite at the site where they were created. Accounts created using Admin are generally used to run the View application, for connecting to one or many units over a network or dial-up connection. Use the Administrator account to run the Admin application. Use of Admin and the Administrator account should be limited to your organization s Multi SA (system administrator). Good reasons for protecting access to Admin are explained in Limiting the Use of Admin on page 180. The Administrator can also run the View application to configure units. The system password is not used by users. Authorized users do not need to know the system password. It protects units from Admin and View users in other organizations. See System Password on page 184. Multi SAs have the option of creating user accounts, using LocalView, on a unit-by-unit basis. This is convenient when your organization has very few units and users. Before Creating User Accounts Preparation Using Admin At this point, a Multi System Administrator (Multi SA) using Admin software has: Obtained or created a Multi database. See Obtaining a Multi Database on page 264. Created at least one site. You can create accounts without an existing site, but users won t be able to do much more than open View. See Adding a Site on page 35. Added a password to the Administrator account. This is highly recommended by Honeywell, but is optional. See Administrator Password on page 195. Document V4 Rev A /10

168 Managing User Accounts Preparation Using LocalView Onsite At this point, a Multi SA using LocalView has added a password to the Admin account. This is highly recommended, but is optional. See Administrator Password on page 195. What You Need From Your Security Officer Before adding accounts, your Multi SA may need to find out if: The installation will be open or if it needs security. See Security Overview, page 179. Operators are required to use passwords. See User Password, page 194. Operators should have different profiles in their user accounts. See Rights of User Accounts, page 196. All operators should be able to access Multi-Media sites and operate the Multi-Media units. See Right to Access a Site, page 200. Default User Administrator Accounts Admin and LocalView software each have a default, permanent Administrator account. These accounts cannot be removed or modified. However, Honeywell recommends that you add a password to them. If two or less users are using the Multi-Media unit(s) in your organization, you may not need to create other user accounts. Admin Remote Administrator Account The Administrator account in the Admin application grants a remote operator access to every Rapid Eye unit in your organization. Users of this account can also use every function in the Admin and View applications. If a unit s management of accounts is central, the Administrator account in Admin replaces the one in LocalView. Local Administrator Account The Administrator account in LocalView grants an onsite operator access to one Rapid Eye unit in your organization. Users of this account can also use every function in LocalView. Many Users If many users will be using the system, Honeywell recommends: Your Multi SA limit the use of the Administrator account and add password protection to the account (see Administrator Password on page 195). That the password to the Administrator user account, and of any others based on that account, should be kept secure and changed regularly. 168

169 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Using Admin Software To log on to the Admin application, user accounts other than the Administrator can be used if they have the rights to access the site (based on Administrator). Creating such accounts should be handled with care in high security environments. Configuring LocalView To configure LocalView, a user account needs the Modify Configuration right. User Management Switching a unit from Local User Management (the default) to Central User Management is an option. Keep in mind: Changing User management is performed on a unit-by-unit basis. Only the Admin application can be used to set a unit to Central User Management. Only LocalView can be used to re-enable a unit to use Local User Management. Creating Accounts For View Whether user management is central or local, Admin can always be used to add accounts for connecting to a unit from a PC running View. Older Units User management is not available on older Rapid Eye models such as Multi units. Local User Management Creating Accounts Using LocalView Local User Management enables a Multi SA to create operator accounts onsite, using LocalView, for operating that unit. When user management is set to Local in LocalView, the list of accounts on that unit can be edited. Creating Accounts Using Admin In addition, a Multi SA can create Rapid Eye accounts using the Admin application while Local User Management is enabled. These standard Rapid Eye accounts are used to access one or many units remotely using a PC running the View application. Document V4 Rev A /10

170 Managing User Accounts Setting Local User Management A LocalView administrator has the option of setting User Management to Local. Accounts that were created centrally will remain on the unit. Central User Management Creating Accounts Using Admin Central User Management only disables the onsite creation of operator accounts using LocalView. If Central User Management is enabled, a Multi SA uses the Admin application to create accounts. These central accounts can access Multi-Media units using the View application or LocalView. Figure 9-1 Changing User Management Click to change the local user management Setting a Unit to Central User Management 1. While using Admin to update (or create) a site s definition, click the Change button next to Local User Management is in effect (see Figure 9-1). A dialog box appears to confirm setting the site to central user management. After clicking Yes, the message next to the button changes to Central User Management is pending. 2. Use View to run a Maintenance Session at the site. Click the Security tab. 3. Click Update Security. The procedure to update security is shown in Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit, page

171 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Result The next time that you update the site using the Admin application, the label next to the Change button reads Central User Management is in effect. The accounts of users authorized to operate the unit are copied to the unit and replace the accounts created locally. Operators with accounts that authorize operation of the unit, can access that unit either offsite using View, or locally using LocalView. Notification of an Admin and Localview Problem After a Multi SA has used Admin to select Central user management and View to run a Maintenance Session (as explained above), the LocalView Administrator can select Local user management. The next time that the Multi SA runs a Maintenance Session, a message indicates that there is a discrepancy in the User Management settings. The Multi SA has the option of setting User Management to Central or of leaving it on Local. Using Admin and View to Create a User Account Whether user management is central or local, Admin is used to create accounts for operating units from a PC running the View application. 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. To display the Add User dialog box, do one of the following: Click on the toolbar. Click Add on the Actions menu. Press Ctrl+Ins. 3. Enter a name in the User name field (see the example in Figure 9-2). You will be asked to use another name if the name you entered is already being used in your system. 4. Click Save and Close. Naming Restrictions For user account names, do not use: The database name of the Multi db. A user account with the same name as the Multi central database causes an error when a copy of the database is made locally. Self or (self). A phrase used by some Multi reports. Administrator. This account name is reserved. Document V4 Rev A /10

172 Managing User Accounts Figure 9-2 Adding a Night Operator Account Account Options Add a password to the account. Enter a password in the Password field. Enter the password again in the Confirm password field. Change the Language of the Rapid Eye interface for users of that account, if needed. Base the user-account on another. Select the Rights and site access are based on option. The box next to it lists other accounts on your Multi system that can serve as a basis for the user account. Use the drop-down arrow to select an account. Modify the rights. See Granting More or Less Rights to an Account on page 175. Updating Security Onsite Using a Central Account When Central User Management is enabled, an operator account created with Admin can also be used onsite, in LocalView. To enable use of the account onsite, use View to update security on that unit. See Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit on page 143. Language The Multi SA has the option of customizing the language that an operator of that account will see while using the View, LocalView or Admin applications. Click the drop-down arrow in the Language box to select a language. The Language setting does not affect the Logon dialogs to the Admin and View applications (these always appear in English). An operator has the option of overriding the language setting while running View, using the Language command under Options, in the View menu. 172

173 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Grouping Accounts To create a group of accounts, assign the same user account to different users. To do so, View operators can: Use an account that is based on another. View Operators each have their own account, but the rights, sites and so on, of the accounts are common. See Granting More or Less Rights to an Account on page 175. Share the same account. Add an account (as explained in Using Admin and View to Create a User Account on page 171), then assign the same account to different staff. Language of the interface is independent of rights and sites and can be customized for each account user within a group. This can be useful for multilingual staff (for example, two operators can have the same rights, yet see the interface in a language that they can deal with more effectively). Basing Account Rights on Another User Note This feature is available in Admin, but not in LocalView. 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. Double-click the name of an account. Note The Administrator account cannot be based on another. 3. Select the Rights and site access are based on option. 4. Use the drop-down arrow to choose a user account from the list. 5. Click Save and Close. Updating an Account 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. Double-click the name of the account. You can also select the user account and do one of the following: Click on the toolbar. Click Update in the Actions menu. Press F Edit the user account information, as needed. 4. Click Save and Close. Document V4 Rev A /10

174 Managing User Accounts Updating Security Onsite Using a Central Account If Central User Management is enabled and the operator account will be used to operate the unit onsite, using LocalView, use View to update security on the unit(s) to which the account will be granted access. See Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit on page 143. Creating an Account in LocalView 1. Using LocalView, click the Configuration tab. 2. Select User Management. 3. Click Add New User. 4. Enter a name in the User Name box. You will be prompted to use another name if the name entered is already being used. 5. You have the option of adding a password to the account. To do so, enter a password in the Password box. Enter the password again in the Confirm Password box. Some characters cannot be used in a password, such as a double-quote ( " ). Nothing happens if you try to enter an invalid character. 6. You have the option of modifying the account rights. See Granting More or Less Rights to an Account on page Click Save. Account for Accessing One Unit Accounts created using LocalView can only access the Multi-Media unit running LocalView. Central User Management When user management is central, accounts cannot be created using LocalView. Updating an Account in LocalView 1. Using LocalView, click the Configuration tab. 2. Select User Management. Select a user. 3. You have the option of modifying the account s password and user name. To modify rights, see Granting More or Less Rights to an Account on page 175. Click Save. 174

175 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Granting More or Less Rights to an Account Rights can be selected when adding a user account or when updating a user. You can: Customize the rights of an account. Base the rights on those of another account. Admin. Account rights granted using Admin apply to View software and to many units. LocalView. LocalView can add a user account onsite, only for that unit. For security guidelines on assigning rights see Rights of User Accounts on page 196. Customizing the Rights in an Account 1. While adding or updating an account, click a checkbox next to a Right (see Figure 9-3). Adding a checkmark adds that right to the account. Removing the checkmark removes that right from the account. 2. To limit site and camera access, see Limiting the Use of Cameras and Other Devices by Partitioning on page After modifying rights, users of Admin need to click Save and Close. Users of LocalView do not. Figure 9-3 Default User Account Rights and Site Access Select a checkbox next to a Right to add or remove that Right from the account. Select to have users be able to access all sites, or select specific sites for users to access. Document V4 Rev A /10

176 Managing User Accounts If Central Management is enabled and the operator account will be used to operate the unit using View and LocalView, use View to update security on the unit(s) to which the account will be granted access. See Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit on page 143. Right to Use ActivEye, by Honeywell Video Analytics Granting rights for ActivEye adds ActivEye command buttons on the Sites toolbar in View. Table 9-1 ActivEye Tasks and Rights of a User Account Right Needed Client Software Refer to a ActivEye live Live Monitoring Station Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide ActivEye forensics Forensics Tool Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide ActivEye configuration Configuration Tool Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide ActivEye reports Reporting Tool Video Analytics V4 Reference Guide a ActivEye documentation is available at the operator PC. Click Start All Programs Honeywell Video Analytics-Client/Documentation/[publication title]. Running ActivEye ActivEye sessions can be run: While running the View application. After letting the operator run View once, to register his Rapid Eye account, that operator has the option of clicking Start All Programs Honeywell Video Analytics - Client [ActivEye session]. It is usually best to use the Configuration Tool first, to set up ActivEye objects, making the Forensics session more useful. For an introduction to ActivEye by Honeywell Video Analytics, see the Video Analytics: Getting Started Guide, publication number See the Video Analytics V4 Rapid Eye DVR Integration Application Note, publication number , for more information on using Video Analytics with Rapid Eye. Note The HVA commands can be used whether a Rapid Eye unit being operated offers HVA or not. If not, clicking HVA commands only produces a message. Availability of LocalView on V9 DVRs Offering Video Analytics LocalView is now fully supported by Rapid Eye s latest V9 software. Earlier V9 software cannot access full LocalView features; only network configuration is available. Visit to download the latest Rapid Eye software. 176

177 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Availability of LocalView on V8.1 DVRs Offering Video Analytics On Rapid Eye V8.1 units offering Video Analytics, LocalView can only be used to change the unit s network settings. Use the Admin and View applications to monitor video and make all other configuration changes. User Rights and Security Your Multi SA can use Admin to provide operator accounts that: Limit the sites that a user can access. By default, access to all sites is granted. See Right to Access a Site, page 200. You can set accounts to access only some sites. Automatically access sub-sites added in the future. Select this option (see Figure 9-3) if you want users to be able to access all sub-sites that are added to groups of sites the user can already access. Limit the amount of time for use of a site. See Right to Access a Site, page 200. LocalView When using LocalView, there is no time limit for operating a unit. Denying Access Denying access to sites is a security measure that is used against an operator who must be stopped from using Multi-Media units as soon as possible. The account data is preserved. For less severe cases, removing an account may be a sufficient measure (see Removing a User Account on page 178). Denying Access to All Units with Admin 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. Double-click the name of the account in the User Name column. 3. Click the box next to Deny this account access to sites... so that it shows a checkmark. Click Save and Close. 4. Update security at each site listed in the User can access selected sites list. To update security, see Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit on page 143. Denying Onsite Access to LocalView 1. Using LocalView, click the Configuration tab. 2. Click the Users tab. 3. Select the account. 4. Click the box next to Deny Access so that it shows a checkmark. Document V4 Rev A /10

178 Managing User Accounts Removing a User Account For accounts created using Admin, whether user management is local or central: 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. Select the user that you want to delete. 3. Do one of the following: Click on the toolbar. Click Delete in the Actions menu. Press Delete on the keyboard. 4. When you are warned that the user is about to be deleted, click Yes to continue or No to cancel. A message will warn you if other accounts are based on the account, offering the option to proceed with or cancel the deletion of the account. Deleting an Account Used to Access LocalView Onsite Local User Management For accounts created using LocalView: 1. Using LocalView, click the Configuration tab. 2. Select User Management. 3. Select the user that you want to delete and click Delete. 4. When you are warned that the user is about to be deleted, click Yes to continue or No to cancel. Central User Management When Admin is used to set a unit to Central User Management, LocalView cannot be used to delete user accounts. After using the Removing a User Account procedure, above, use the View application to run a Maintenance Session and then Update Security on the Multi-Media unit. You also have the option of running a Maintenance Session to Update Security on other units to which the operator had access. 178

179 10 Security for a Multi-Media System Security Overview These guidelines are suggestions to complement your organization s security policies and procedures. Most are optional in low-security environments. The security features of Multi can be applied to very different areas of security: Securing the system includes using passwords, designating as few Multi SAs as possible, and so on. This type of security starts in Securing the Multi System. Using a Multi system as a security device. This includes setting up alarms that are triggered by an Outside World event. See Events Defined on page 205. Hybrid use. Multi can be used as a security device to supervise users. See Tracing Events on page 210, and Denying Access on page 213. Securing the Multi System What Level of Security is Needed? Multi can be used effectively in high and low security situations. Use of security features is optional, making the system a flexible tool in many security environments. Security officers in your organization can help define how open or secure the Multi system should be. Caution Even in minimal security environments, using passwords for system access and for the default Administrator account are highly recommended by Honeywell. See System Password on page 184, and Administrator Password on page 195. Document V4 Rev A /10

180 Security for a Multi-Media System Security Priorities Table 10-1 suggests an order for implementing a secure Multi system. Additional Security for Installations This additional security may not apply to your installation. If you are unsure, see the network administrator. LocalView. Multi SAs can use Central User Management to control user accounts. User Management on page 169. Multi databases on a network. Network system administrators or database administrators can protect a Multi Central database from deletion. See Multi Database Security on page 182. Remote access service. Multi SAs may need to obtain PPP connectivity passwords. See PPP Connectivity on page 213. Table 10-1 Security Priorities Priority Action Page Limit installation of Admin to Multi SA PCs page 180 Limit access to the System Administrator Guide page 181 a Use a system password page 184 Add a password to the Administrator account page 195 Designate specific PCs as Multi alarm stations page 212 Assign passwords to user accounts page 194 Limit the rights of user accounts page 196 a Trace critical system events page 210 Deny site access to a user, as needed page 213 Backup and safeguard your Multi central database page 182 a Optional priorities for dealing with external security, or tampering that originates outside of your organization. Minimal Security Minimal security can be appropriate when a Multi system is used by only one person. At the very least, Honeywell recommends that you add a system password (see System Password on page 184). Limiting the Use of Admin Like most Multi-Media security features, limiting the installation and use of Admin to the PCs of Multi System Administrators is optional. 180

181 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Limiting Access to Admin Documentation Use only the View CD to install Multi software on a View operator s PC. Features For secure installations, the Security Officer(s) in your organization should: Designate as few Multi SAs as possible. Limit the installation of Admin software to the PC(s) of Multi SAs, especially in open systems. TIP! For secure installations, Honeywell recommends that only Multi SAs receive copies of Admin software. Also consider that: View operators should only receive copies of View software. Distribution of Admin documentation should be limited to Multi SAs. TIP! As a security measure, only the Admin CD can be used to install the Admin user documents. When you use the View CD, only a Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide, is copied to the PC hard drive. The guides are in Adobe Portable Document format (PDF). The software needs to be installed before the documentation is available for viewing. Documents cannot be viewed directly from a software CD. However, a documentation CD is included if you need to circulate the documentation. Password Guidelines Like most Multi-Media security features, use of passwords is optional. Honeywell recommends using and changing the system password and the password of the default Administrator account, even in minimal security environments. See System Password on page 184, and Administrator Password on page 195. Access to the Multi system is obtained through user accounts. The Administrator account is the key account of the system. Administrator access should be carefully guarded. Using passwords counteracts unauthorized access to the Multi-Media units. Passwords System password A System password is applied to all of the units in your organization. The system password is not used by users. It counters access by unauthorized users, such as those of another Multi-Media system. Make a record of the System password in case Multi technical support is needed for a Multi-Media unit. Honeywell recommends that your Multi SA use a system password (see System Password on page 184). Document V4 Rev A /10

182 Security for a Multi-Media System Administrator account password Users of the Administrator account can use every function in Admin and View. They can access every Rapid Eye site in your system. Add a password to this account to control it (as explained in Administrator Password on page 195). The Administrator account password also protects units from unauthorized clearing of storage (see Preventing Users from Clearing Storage, page 142). This password and any others based on the Administrator account, should be kept secure and changed regularly. User account password A user s password can be unique or the same as another user s, as called for by your organization s security requirements. Passwords can be: Of variable length. Compose passwords of up to 50 alphanumeric characters. Double-quotes ( ) cannot be used. Repeated. Your Multi System Administrator (Multi SA) has the option of assigning the same password or differing passwords to different users. Deleted (that is, emptied). This is equivalent to not assigning a password. There is no reset function. Your Multi SA does not need to know a user account password to delete it. A Multi SA only needs to remember/log the Administrator password. Set only by a Multi SA. A View operator cannot set a user account password, only the Multi SA can. Using Text Securely in Multi Password Boxes To prevent onlookers from obtaining a password, asterisks appear onscreen as you type in these boxes. To prevent use of the Windows Clipboard to obtain passwords, Multi software prevents the copying or cutting of passwords from password boxes. To help guarantee against a typing error when a password is set up, you are asked to enter the password again, in the Confirm password box. To further guarantee against a typing error when setting passwords, you can paste copied text into a password box. TIP! Insert numbers into common words for more secure passwords. For example, a password such as security is made more secure as secur2691ity. Such passwords are easier to remember than randomly generated passwords. Multi Database Security Like most Multi-Media security features, using network means to protect a Multi database is optional. If the Multi db is protected, Multi-Media unit operators need read/write permissions for the Multi db. Protecting the Database from Deletion The Multi db can be protected using server file system capabilities. As a preventive measure against the accidental deletion of a Multi db, back it up and use network security settings (such as NTFS security). See Deleting a Database on page

183 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Password Security Passwords are encrypted in Multi db files (*.mdb and *.mdf). Protecting the Database from Copying It is important to protect your Multi db from copying, if only to avoid its use by unauthorized users, who may also be licensed Multi software users. SQL-Server Option To add security to a Multi database, your SQL database administrator can setup a SQL login just for Multi users. By default, Multi software connects to a SQL-Server by using sa as a logon account, with no password. SQL-Server Logon Reserved for Multi Operators 1. Run SQL Server Enterprise Manager. 2. Add a new log on. 3. The public and db_owner database roles need to be assigned to the log on, so that a user can connect to the Multi db, update it and if Multi SAs are to use Admin to create a Multi db create a new SQL-based Multi db. TIP! Creating a SQL-server type of logon is a procedure for a SQL-Server administrator, not for Admin users or View operators. Result When these changes are made to SQL-Server security, a SQL Connection login window appears, as in Figure The Login and Password for SQL can differ from the User ID and Password of a Multi account. Figure 10-1 SQL-Server Login Document V4 Rev A /10

184 Security for a Multi-Media System Note The next time that you use the Admin or View applications, the same SQL logon and password are used automatically, without the SQL Connection window appearing. System Password Use a system password for units that use a dial-up connection or are on a public network. A system password may be unnecessary on a private network, depending on the security protocols in your organization. Consult your security personnel. Keeping Unauthorized Users Out A system password blocks access to all (or optionally, some) of your sites from unauthorized users, external to your organization, who may have found out the dial-up number or IP address of a site, and who have access to the Admin and View applications. Authorized Operators do not have to remember the system password to use a Multi-Media unit. Only the Multi System Administrator needs to keep a record of it, in case a unit is added or removed from your Multi system. Road Map to Setting the System Password Setting (or changing) the system password requires three procedures: Use Admin to set a system password in the Multi Central database. Use View to run a Maintenance Session on a Multi-Media unit and click Update Security on the Security tab. This copies the system password to the unit (see Figure 10-2). Repeat this for each unit. The password is copied to the local database of View operators as they log on, when they are connected to the Multi Central database. On systems in session 24/7, or for operators who run View on standalone PCs, the Multi SA should communicate that a system password has been added, so that the View operators can refresh their local databases. See Refreshing a Local Database on page

185 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 10-2 Securing a Unit Click to update the security information on a Multi unit. After Setting the System Password Even Multi technical support cannot access Multi-Media units from a LAN once your system password has been changed. Caution Do not use multiple Multi databases. Using multiple Multi Dbs with different system passwords on the same Multi system is confusing and prone to operator error. A forgotten system password can prevent access to a unit even by Multi technical support. Please manage your system password with care. For Admin s report on the status of your system password, see Status Report on page 187. Always Update Security on All Units When the system password is changed, perform a Maintenance Session to update the security on each of the units in your Rapid Eye system. This prevents confusion and access problems. For example, when touring many sites, the sites with a system password that differs from the current system password will be skipped over. Caution Do not leave an older system password on a Rapid Eye site record or unit, in your CCTV system. Extra Steps in Some System Password Scenarios After your system is secured with a system password, a Multi SA may need to perform a few extra steps when faced with these tasks: Mistakenly deleting a site definition. To re-enter it, see Last Valid Password, page 192. Adding a used Multi-Media unit. If you obtain a unit from another organization, and it is protected by that organization s system password. See Last Valid Password on page 192. Removing a system password from a single Multi-Media unit. This is useful when disposing of a unit. See Removing a System Password on page 188. Replacing a Multi-Media unit. Should you need to replace a unit with a factory-issued unit. See Replacing a Unit on page 191. Document V4 Rev A /10

186 Security for a Multi-Media System Caution When adding a brand new Multi site to your Rapid Eye system, do not use the LVP (last valid password) utility, even if you have a system password set. The LVP utility is for dealing with used or replacement Multi-Media units, and for mistakenly deleted site definitions, as explained in Last Valid Password on page 192. Changing the System Password Using Admin 1. Run Admin to access the System Password box. Either: Click on the Admin toolbar. Click the System Password command on the File menu. - or - Press the F8 key. 2. Enter a password in the System Password field, as shown in Figure A double-quote ( ) character cannot be used. Figure 10-3 System Password Click to change the system password 3. Re-enter the password in the Confirm Password field. 4. Click Save and Close to set the system password. Changing the System Password on Each Multi-Media Unit 1. Using View, start a Maintenance Session for a site that is designated for a system password change. Either: Right-click the site name (on the Site tab) and select Maintenance from the shortcut menu. Select the site, then click the Maintenance command in the Actions menu. Select the site, then click on the toolbar. 2. Click the Security tab in the Maintenance window. 186

187 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 3. To update the site s security with the Multi Central database, click Update Security on the Security tab. You have the option of checking the status of the site s system password, reported in Admin. See Table 10-2 on page You have the option of ending the Maintenance Session, as explained in Ending Maintenance on page Repeat step 1 to step 4 for each Multi-Media unit in your system. Updating Users on System Password Changes The Multi SA needs to tell View operators, who are logged on, to refresh their copy of the Multi db, or they will not be able to connect to Rapid Eye sites. See Refreshing a Local Database on page 277. Note that only users logged on to View 24/7 need to be warned of this. Refresh is automatic as users log on to use the View application. Status Report System Passwords and Security Status After changing the System password and synchronizing security at your sites, the Admin Sites tab reports a yes in the Secure column of each site s line. For other values, see Table Table 10-2 System Password: Status Value Action Meaning and Recommended Action Details No needed The worst report in a high security environment. The site is not secure from unauthorized users. Honeywell recommends that you assign a system password immediately and update security on the unit. See System Password on page 184. No; set needed The site is not secure from unauthorized users. A system password has been set using Admin, but security at the site has not been updated. Run a Maintenance Session at the site and update security. Yes; set needed The site is secure, but with another, older System password. Yes it is protected with an old password, however, you should set the site to the new password. Run a Maintenance Session and update security. Yes none needed The optimal report. The site is secure from unauthorized users. The latest System password is in effect. Document V4 Rev A /10

188 Security for a Multi-Media System Removing a System Password You can remove a system password from either: All of your units, globally. If your Rapid Eye system consists of a single unit, you can use this procedure too. See Remove Password from All Units on page 188. Only one of many units. To remove a system password from a unit that needs servicing (for example) while leaving it on other units in your system, see Remove Password from One of Many Units on page 189. Figure 10-4 After Removing a System Password To remove the system password on Multi-Media units, delete all of the asterisks (*) in the password boxes. Remove Password from All Units 1. Run Admin to access the System Password window. Either: Click on the Admin toolbar. Click the System Password command in the File menu. Press the F8 key. 2. Delete the asterisks from the System Password field. 3. Delete the asterisks from the Confirm Password field. The System Password window should look like Figure 10-4, above. 4. Click Save and Close. 5. Using View, click to start a Maintenance Session for a site. 6. Click the Security tab in the Maintenance window. 7. Click Update Security on the Security tab. You have the option of ending the Maintenance session (see page 71). 8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 for each Multi-Media unit in your system. 9. The Multi SA needs to tell site users whose System password has been changed, to refresh their copy of the Multi db, the next time that they use View. See Refreshing a Local Database on page

189 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Caution If the system password is not removed from a unit, that system password will need to be remembered when another site definition is created for that unit. The system password is also needed if you delete a site definition by mistake. See Adding a Site on page 35, and Deleting a Site on page 37. Remove Password from One of Many Units You may need to remove a system password from only one unit in your system, when: Selling the unit to another organization. Sending the unit to Honeywell for repair. TIP! If there is only one Multi-Media unit used by your organization, do not use the following procedure. Please use Remove Password from All Units, page Check your Multi SA s password records to find the current system password on your Multi-Media system. If the password is unknown, follow Remove Password from All Units, page 188, to change the system password on all units first. 2. Run Admin, to access the System Password window. Either: Click on the Admin toolbar. Click the System Password command in the File menu. Press the F8 key. 3. Delete the asterisks in the System Password and Confirm Password boxes. The two boxes in the System Password window should now be empty (see Figure 10-4). 4. Click Save and Close. 5. Using View, start a Maintenance Session for site(s) from which you want to remove the system password. Either: Right-click the site name (on the Site tab) to select Maintenance from the shortcut menu. Select the site. Click the Maintenance command in the Actions menu. Select the site, then click on the toolbar. 6. Click the Security tab in the Maintenance window. Click Update Security. End the Maintenance Session. See Ending Maintenance on page You have the option of powering down the Multi-Media unit and disconnecting it from your network or its telephone line. 8. Run Admin to access the System Password window. 9. Enter the system password used earlier in the System Password field (the password that was removed in step 1 of this procedure). Re-enter the password in the Confirm Password field. 10. Click Save and Close. 11. To follow-up: The Multi SA may need to tell some users that they need to refresh their copy of the Multi db. See Refreshing a Local Database on page 277. You have the option of deleting the site in the site list, as explained in Deleting a Site on page 37. Document V4 Rev A /10

190 Security for a Multi-Media System Caution If the system password is not removed from a unit, that system password will need to be remembered when another site definition is created for that unit. The system password is also needed if you delete a site definition by mistake. See Adding a Site on page 35, and Deleting a Site on page 37. System Password Extras Older System Password If you do not know the system password at a site, you will run into some difficulty removing the password (see Remove Password from One of Many Units on page 189). Table 10-2 on page 187, shows that reports of Yes; set or No; set indicate that the system password on the unit is not current. If a unit reports Yes; set or No; set, run a Maintenance Session to update security on the unit (as explained in Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit on page 143; or in Changing the System Password Using Admin on page 186). When There are Many Multi-Media Units in a Rapid Eye System Avoid changing the system password and then updating security on only a few units when there are many Multi-Media units in your Rapid Eye system. Doing so repeatedly to different unit subsets serves no security purpose and can lead to unnecessary confusion, should repair or sale of units occur. Changing a system password means you need to update the security on every unit in your Multi db. Using Another Multi Central Database Using other Multi dbs to run your system should only be considered for: Troubleshooting new installations before a system password is added. Databases using identical system passwords. After a system becomes established and a system password is added to your system, Honeywell does not recommend using multiple Multi databases. Caution Do not use many databases for the same unit(s) if the Multi dbs use different system passwords. System passwords should match on all Multi dbs. The warning above means that using the LVP utility to connect to units protected by the system password of another Multi database is an abuse of the system function and could jeopardize your organization s ability to respond to alarms and to make requests for video clips and stills. See High-Security Considerations on page

191 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Replacing a Unit New Unit When you replace a Multi-Media unit at a site with a new unit from the factory, the factory unit s last valid password (LVP) is blank. Use LVP Utility to Match Site Definition If you replace a Multi-Media unit and your Multi database is set to a system password (see System Password, page 184), you need to use the LVP utility to match the site definition to the blank password on the unit. Figure 10-5 Use the LVP Utility when a Unit Replaces Another Use the LVP utility to replace a unit at a secured site. Use the utility to delete the asterisks (*) that represent the system password used at that site. Replacing a Unit when a System Password Is Enabled TIP! This unit replacement procedure only applies when you replace a unit at a site that has already been defined and is operational. The procedure does not apply to adding a new site to your Multi system. To simply add a site to your system, see Adding a Site on page Check that the Multi-Media unit is powered-up at the site. 2. Using Admin, update the site s definition (see Updating a Site on page 37). 3. Click LVP (last valid password). A Reset Last Valid System Password dialog box appears. Note the asterisks in the unit Password and Confirm Password fields. Document V4 Rev A /10

192 Security for a Multi-Media System 4. Remove the asterisks from the unit Password and Confirm Password fields. See Figure 10-5, above. This does not remove your system password from other units. 5. Click Save and Close. 6. Using View, start a Maintenance Session for the site. 7. To set the unit to your system password, click Update Security on the Security tab. 8. Tell any logged on View Operators that they need to refresh the Multi db to use the new site (see Refreshing a Local Database on page 277). Occasional users will have their local database automatically refreshed the next time that they log on to View. If the Site Cannot be Accessed You may have left asterisks behind in the unit Password and Confirm Password fields. Last Valid Password TIP! The scenarios described below are exceptions. They only apply when dealing with re-entry of information in a site definition for used units. Last Valid System Password When your Multi-Media system administrator (Multi SA) adds a site definition, the last valid password (LVP) entry for that site remains blank in your Multi central database (Multi db). When a system password is added, this database entry is updated along with the unit. There are situations when a discrepancy can occur between the system password held by a unit and the system password entry in the Multi db. An LVP utility is available to resolve these discrepancies. The LVP utility may need to be used if you: Obtain a used unit, from another organization s Multi system. A Multi-Media unit may still be protected by a system password. You may need to contact the other organization s Multi SA. Delete a site definition by mistake. When a system password is in use and a site is deleted by mistake, you need a few extra steps to re-enter the site definition, as a system password is in use on the unit. Note If a site definition is deleted by mistake, but no system password has been set, you can disregard using the LVP when re-entering the site. See Adding a Site on page 35. Entering a Site Definition for Another Unit If you have obtained a unit from another user and you suspect that the system password on that unit was not removed, use the next procedure. 192

193 TM Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide If a Used Unit Comes from Another Multi System Figure 10-6 Your Rapid Eye system with a system password set to Y. Example of Using LVP Utility to Reset System Password A used unit with a password set to X. READY ALARM HDD You can introduce a used unit into your system if you know its system password (X). For the used unit, use the LVP utility to input the used unit s password (X). Update the security of the used unit to reset its system password to yours (Y). 1. Create a site definition (see Adding a Site on page 35). 2. Use View to run a Maintenance Session. If an error message is produced, contact the previous owner to obtain the unit s system password for the previous owner s system. 3. After obtaining that password, use Admin to update your site definition. 4. Click LVP (last valid password). A Reset Last Valid System Password dialog box appears. See Figure 10-6, above. 5. Enter the password obtained from the previous owner in the Unit Password box (see Figure 10-6). 6. Confirm the password. 7. Click Save and Close. 8. Using View, start a Maintenance Session, to register the site. Failure to Run a Maintenance Session If the site cannot be accessed, it is possible that: You ve obtained an incorrect system password from the unit s previous owner. You ve incorrectly entered the password into the LVP utility. A Maintenance Session is being run by another user. Try to run a Live Session instead. If the site is still inaccessible, contact Multi technical support, as explained in For Questions on page 33. Document V4 Rev A /10

194 Security for a Multi-Media System Re-Entering a Site Definition for a Unit with a System Password TIP! When a system password is in use and a site is deleted by mistake, you need a few extra steps to re-enter the site definition. 1. While adding a site (see Adding a Site on page 35), click LVP. A Reset Last Valid System Password dialog box appears. 2. Enter the system password that was securing the unit in the unit Password field. 3. Confirm the password. 4. Click Save and Close. Checking if the Correct System Password Was Entered Use View to start a session. If the site cannot be accessed, you may have made a mistake entering the password in the previous procedure. User Password 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab to view the list of users. 2. To update a user s account, double-click the name in the User Name column. The Update User dialog box appears. 3. Enter the password in the Password field. A double-quote ( ) character cannot be used in a password. 4. Re-enter the password in the Confirm password field. 5. Click either: Save and Close, to update the user s password. Close, to cancel the update. You will be asked to confirm that the changes are to be ignored. Click OK on the message. 6. Communicate the new password to the user(s) of the account. Results After the Multi SA assigns a password to a Multi-Media unit operator: The Password column shows set for that user. A password must be entered at every logon. Entering an illegitimate user ID/password combination produces a warning message. At the first log on to the View application, a local copy of the Multi Central database is made to the PC running View. A user cannot change the password while using View. Only users of the Admin application can change a password. 194

195 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Note A user account password is encrypted in the Multi db. It is a combination of the User ID and password. This ensures a password always exists, even if the Password box is left empty. As a result, accessible, third-party tools such as MS-Access cannot be used to remove the Administrator s password simply by loading a Multi db. Your system is protected against such elementary database tampering. Defense against criminal techniques, such as social engineering, operator negligence when managing passwords, and so on, are the operator s responsibility. Administrator Password The procedure for adding/changing the Administrator account password is similar to the one for adding/changing another user account s password. TIP! After a successful Multi installation, Honeywell recommends that the Multi SA add/change the Administrator user account password. Basic Security Changing the password to the Administrator account is an essential security precaution. The password should be carefully guarded against loss and changed regularly. The password protects against: The most basic hacking of Admin by unauthorized users. Inadvertent use of the clear storage feature by adding an important safeguard. For information about this feature, see Clearing Storage on page 141. Password Independence Accounts that are based on the Administrator account are not affected by changes to the Administrator s password (see Default User on page 168). Such accounts have their own passwords. Accounts based on the Administrator account can still change the Administrator password (or any other). Setting the Administrator Account s Password 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab to view the User Name list. You can ignore user names in the Settings Based On column. 2. Double-click Administrator in the User Name column. The Update User dialog box appears. Only the password can be changed for the Administrator account. The account name and its rights cannot be modified. 3. Enter the password in the Password field. A double-quote ( ) character cannot be used in a password. Document V4 Rev A /10

196 Security for a Multi-Media System 4. Re-enter the password in the Confirm password field. 5. Click either: Save and Close, to update the Administrator password. Close, to cancel the update. You are asked to confirm that the changes are to be ignored. Click OK. Results After the Multi SA assigns a password to the Administrator account: The Password column shows set at the Administrator line. The password must be entered every time that a user using that account logs on. If that user enters a user ID/password combination that is not valid, the user is warned with a message and returned to the logon dialog box. The first time that the Administrator account is used to log on to the View application, a local copy of the Multi Central database is made to the PC running View. Sharing the Administrator Account When an organization s security needs are limited and Multi software is used by very few people (one or two), you may elect to simply change the password of the Administrator account and not create any accounts for other users. What to Avoid The locking out of authorized, legitimate users from the Multi-Media units on your Rapid Eye system is a worst-case scenario that requires many steps to fix, one of which is knowing the password to the Administrator account. See High-Security Considerations on page 202. Rights of User Accounts Like most Multi-Media security features, limiting user rights, or limiting access to sites is optional. A Multi account can have as few or as many rights as are needed (see Figure 10-8). Admin software is used to set the rights of all user accounts. These rights apply to: Admin Maintenance View Your Multi system administrator also defines the sites that a user is authorized to use, including the amount of time that can be spent connected to sites. 196

197 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Checking Rights Granted and Accessible Sites 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. Double-click a user s line. The Update User dialog box appears, showing the rights defined for the account. Assigning Rights When Adding / Updating Accounts The rights are assigned in a single location, when adding or updating a user account (see Using Admin and View to Create a User Account on page 171). By default, new accounts do not have the Modify rights. See Figure 10-8 for a sample list of rights. Denying Access to Some Sites By default, a user account can access every site in your system. You can limit the user s access to some of the sites. See Defining the Sites that Can Be Accessed on page 200. Rights of Users Based on Others You have the option to base user accounts on any other. The rights of all such users can then be modified together. A user account can also be based on the Administrator account. This grants all rights to that user, including use of the Admin application. Removing Rights When a right is removed, the Multi function associated to it is unavailable to the user. The user may log on to View, but commands will be unavailable or disabled. Rights only apply to sites that the user has been authorized to use. Figure 10-7 Summary of a User s Rights on the Users Tab User account rights summary Sharing Accounts When an organization s security needs are limited and the software is used by a very small number of people, your Multi SA may elect to create one account and share it among users. Document V4 Rev A /10

198 Security for a Multi-Media System Right to Use Admin To use Admin, your account must be the Administrator account, or an account based on it. TIP! The set of rights in an account based on the Administrator account cannot be modified. Only the password can be changed. Granting Access to Admin 1. View the rights of a user account. 2. Select the Rights and site access are based on option. 3. In the box next to Rights and site access are based on, select Administrator with the drop-down arrow. 4. Click Save and Close. TIP! Why limit the use of Admin? a. The Administrator account has all user rights to all functions of View, and to every site identified in your Multi db. With such an account, a malevolent user can quickly disable your system or cover up unwarranted or illicit actions, such as deleting items in the alarm log. b. The Admin CD is used to install the user documents for Admin and the Multi-Media unit. This information may exceed an operator s need to know about your Multi system. c. Users of the Administrator account can remove an important safeguard to prevent inadvertently clearing storage. See Clearing Storage on page 141. Right to Use Maintenance Each of these rights are sensitive for system security. Each right only gives access to portions of a Maintenance Session (see Table 10-3). You can start a Maintenance Session in View with any one of these three rights. The tabs that appear in the Maintenance Session may differ depending on rights that are assigned. Modify configuration. Gives access to the tabs for making hardware configuration settings. These rights should be controlled in a Multi system. A user with these rights can turn recording off or set an NTSC system to PAL, jeopardizing the unit s ability to record video. Modify security. Gives access to the Security tab. User has the right to click Update Security. Modify system settings. Gives access to the Statistics and System tabs. These rights should be controlled in a Multi system. A user can destroy all of the video and audio stored in a Multi-Media unit by clicking Clear Storage on the Statistics tab (see Clearing Storage on page 141). It also controls the rebooting of units and upgrading files to a Multi-Media unit. 198

199 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Caution Your security officer and Multi SA must exercise vigilance if operators have accounts with enough rights to jeopardize the operation of a unit. Table 10-3 Maintenance Tasks and Rights of a User Account Right Needed a Task See... Page Modify configuration Time Unit Time Zone and Clock page 64 System configuration System Tab in a Maintenance Session page 147 Video; includes: picture, motion, PTZ and AGC Cameras page 75 Serial devices Customer Data and Customer Device Events page 157 Eagle Audio Eagle Audio page 164 Hardware Hardware Report page 155 Audio Multi Audio page 162 Public display monitor Using Monitor Output 1 as a Public Display Monitor page 155 Events Events Defined page 205 Recording Schedule Scheduling Configuration page 117 Alarm Schedule Alarms and Scheduling page 121 Modify security Security Maintenance Reference page 71 Modify system settings Statistics Multi-Media Unit Storage Statistics page 140 Clearing storage Clearing Storage page 141 System files System Files page 144 a The Administrator account has all rights, including these three. TIP! Why limit the use of maintenance? Operator error. Misuse of a Maintenance Session can lead to a complete loss of recorded video, compromized video recordings caused by disabling cameras, or the turning off of alarm reporting. See the sections listed in Table 10-3, above. Document V4 Rev A /10

200 Security for a Multi-Media System Right to Use View Each function of View (excluding Maintenance) is subject to one of five rights. The most important rights for system security are marked with an asterisk (*). Live video. The right to obtain a live video feed from cameras at a site. This is a Multi system s fundamental purpose. All Multi user accounts usually have this right. The amount of cameras that a user can access may be limited (see Limiting the Use of Cameras and Other Devices by Partitioning on page 201). Retrieve video. The right to search for and obtain recorded video feeds. This right also grants use of the Search for Events feature. Audio, listen. The right to monitor audio through a site s audio hardware. Audio, talk. The right to broadcast audio through a site s audio hardware. Use PTZ. The right to operate the pan, tilt and zoom (PTZ) commands on cameras that have this capability, during a Live Session. Use of this right requires the user to have the right to View Live Video. * Use outputs. The right to operate outputs (for controlling gates, lights and other facilities) during a Live Session. Use of this right requires the user to have the right to View Live Video. * Process alarms. The right to respond to alarms, using an alarm session to acknowledge and to reset alarms. Time limit. The right to make use of sites, but for a limited amount of time. TIP! Why limit the use of View? This depends on your organization s security protocols. Perhaps some operators should only be allowed to monitor live video and not to view recorded video? Right to Access a Site A user account grants site access to either all sites or a subset of the sites in your Rapid Eye system. Rights to access sites can be modified, as explained in the next procedure. See Using Admin and View to Create a User Account on page 171. Defining the Sites that Can Be Accessed 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. To display the Update User dialog box, do one of the following: Double-click the name of the user account that you want to update. - or - Select the user account that you want to update, then click either: on the toolbar, Update in the Actions menu, or press the F12 key. 3. In the Update User dialog box, click the User has restricted access option. 4. Select one or many sites by clicking the boxes next to the site names so that a checkmark appears (see Figure 10-9). The checkmark means that access to the site is granted to the account. 5. Click Save and Close. 200

201 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 6. Update security at each site you have denied access to. The procedure to update security is in Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit on page 143. TIP! Why deny or limit access to a site? This depends on your organization s security protocols. An operator might be allowed to monitor only some sites, and so on. Limiting the Time that a Unit Can Be Used Figure 10-8 Setting an Account s Session Time Limit Select to limit site access time Select the sites that can be accessed by the user Select the Time limit option and set the number of minutes that the user can access the sites for (see Figure 10-8, above). You can also set the default time limit for new users on the Options dialog box of the Admin application (see Figure 11-9). Select View Options in the Admin application to open the Options dialog box. Select the Default time limit of a new User (in minutes) checkbox and then adjust the minutes as needed with the up and down arrows ( ). Limiting the Use of Cameras and Other Devices by Partitioning You can deny access to some or all devices at a site (including cameras and POS devices). By default, a user account can access every camera at a site. TIP! Why deny access to a device? This depends on your organization s security protocols. Perhaps an operator should only monitor some cameras, and not others. Document V4 Rev A /10

202 Security for a Multi-Media System You need to have configured the devices at a site before you can limit their use in a user s account. See Cameras on page 75 to configure cameras and Configuring Other Hardware on page 141 to configure POS devices. 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. Display the Update User dialog box by either: Double-clicking the name of the user account that you want to update. - or - Selecting the user account that you want to update, then click either: on the toolbar, Update in the Actions menu, or press the F12 key. 3. In the Update User dialog box, select the User can access selected sites option. See Figure 10-9 for more information. 4. In the tree of sites below the User can access selected sites option, select a site by clicking the checkbox next to the name of the site. The checkmark that appears means that access to the site is granted to the user of the account. 5. Expand the site, as in Figure In the branch of cameras and devices below the name of a site, select one or many devices. A checkmark means that access to the device is granted to the user of the account. 6. Click Save and Close. Figure 10-9 Limiting an Account s Access to Devices Select the sites, cameras, and devices that the user can access. High-Security Considerations Your Multi-Media unit could be left insufficiently protected, so that performance or security may be compromised. To reduce the probability of this, Honeywell recommends that your Multi SA and your security officer check for situations such as the ones in Table

203 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Physical Compromise As obvious as such security compromises may seem, they include: Vandalism to Multi-Media units or other hardware. See Tamper Detection on page 131 for more information. Power outages beyond the range of an uninterruptible power supply (UPS). Placing cameras where direct sunlight, dew, frost or reflections can hamper visibility. Placing cameras at an outside window and in a room that remains lit during evenings. Reflection from the window can hamper outside visibility. Objects placed to obstruct a camera s view. See Tamper Detection on page 131. Table 10-4 Situation Security Situations Preventative and / or Last Resort Measures Vandalism Schedule onsite equipment inspections. Use access control to control Multi-Media unit access. Vandalism or operator error Using many Multi databases Schedule regular connections to each Multi-Media unit in your security system. Through training, discourage the use of many Multi dbs. Using more than one db and using different system passwords is beyond the product s design and is unsafe. As a last resort, use the last valid password utility, as explained in Last Valid Password on page 192. Breach of trust Refrain from communicating a system password to a Multi SA running another Rapid Eye system. Ask security personnel to exercise vigilance if operators have accounts with enough rights to jeopardize the data on a Multi-Media unit. As a last resort, contact Multi technical support for help, as explained in For Questions on page 33. Compromising Video Recording Setting the Recording of a camera to OFF. Video is not recorded when Recording of a camera is turned OFF. This is easy to detect, each camera shows a recording meter during a Live Session (see Figure 10-10). Figure Identifying Camera Recording Status Camera recording statuses during a live session: Camera is not recording Camera is recording normally Camera is recording with boosted settings If an operator turns Recording to OFF, Live viewing would still work but no recordings would be available to review if there was an incident. Such an abuse can be traced, as explained in Tracing Events on page 210. See also Cameras on page 75. Document V4 Rev A /10

204 Security for a Multi-Media System Camera brightness. Video may be compromised when the brightness setting for a camera is set too high or too low. Your PTZ cameras may be installed in a manner that they can be turned away from the sun. See the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide. Resetting the time/date. It can become complicated to analyze video after the time and date of a Rapid Eye unit is changed. Recordings with incorrect time and date stamps could be of no use in a court of law. You can trace events leading to such abuse of the unit, as explained in Tracing Events, page 210. See also Unit Time Zone and Clock, page 64. Scheduling cameras to not record. See Scheduling Configuration, page 117. This feature is designed to efficiently use storage space. However, it can be abused to defeat security. Use of the Boost button can override a camera that is not scheduled to record. See Figure Countermeasures An effective countermeasure strategy includes using Tamper Detection (page 131) and scheduling short Retrieval sessions on all cameras to check that Rapid Eye sites are recording as they are configured to. One can also check if the environment has diminished the effectiveness of a site. Verification can supplement tracing of events, as explained in Tracing Events on page 210. Boosted recording can override a unit to record a video feed from a camera with recording turned OFF (see Figure 10-10). Clearing Storage to Destroy Recorded Video and Deny Service Clearing a unit s storage or one of its streams destroys all recorded video and, during the time that a unit is emptied (up to a few hours; see Clearing Storage on page 141), the Multi-Media unit cannot show live video, record video, send alarms, and so on. To do so requires use of the Administrator account password. Caution Honeywell recommends that you properly train users that have the right to use the Clear Storage or Clear Stream buttons. Compromising the Response to an Alarm Scheduling alarms to not trigger. See Alarms and Scheduling on page 121. This feature is designed to control some obvious false alarms; but, it can be abused to defeat security. Using more than one Multi db. Using a database, A, set to system password A with the LVP utility, to create a site definition for units protected by system password B, can lead to confusion if that user were to update security on the unit. The LVP utility does not change the system password on the unit, updating security does. Updating security with another A system password locks out all other View Operators who attempt to log on (using their usual B database), thus jeopardizing their ability to respond to alarms and to make requests for video clips/stills. 204

205 READY ALARM HDD TM Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Caution Honeywell does not recommend using multiple databases, even if they are set to the same system passwords. Compromising and Locking-Out a Multi SA The locking out of authorized, legitimate users from the Multi-Media units on your Rapid Eye system, including the Multi SA, is a worst-case scenario for high-security organizations. Many steps are needed to do so (obtaining copies of Admin and View software, creating another database, and having knowledge of your system password). Even access to your Multi Central database, knowledge of Admin and of the Administrator account s password could allow a malevolent user to change passwords for the Administrator s account (and to the system), then update security on units, and locking everyone out. Circulating passwords only to the users that need them and utilizing access control are your best assets to combat this type of security breach. Countermeasures. If ever such a breach occurs, contact Multi technical support for help, as explained in For Questions on page 33. LocalView Another type of security breach can occur through LocalView, which can be used to change a unit s LAN communication settings. Events Defined Figure Four Sources of Events 1. Outside world event, such as detected motion. 3. Point-of-sales (POS) event, such as from an ATM. 2. Multi-Media unit event, such as a power outage. A Multi-Media alarm station can receive alarms from many sources. 4. View Operator event, such as unauthorized use of a site. Document V4 Rev A /10

206 Security for a Multi-Media System Multi-Media units provide notification of events. Events can be produced from four sources: Outside World event Rapid Eye s motion detection (Motion Detection, page 127) and Honeywell Video Analytics (Tamper Detection, page 131) can trigger alarms. Connecting a unit to sensors for fire, water and so on, can also produce such events. Customer-device event Messages from a cash register, card swipe and so on, that can be sent to a Multi-Media unit. See Customer Data and Customer Device Events, page 157. Multi-Media Unit event For notifying a Multi SA of events at the unit or of some events from the IT environment. Extended power outages can also be monitored by connecting a Multi-Media unit to an alarm panel. See Tracing Events on page 210. View Operator event An administrator can trace events caused by View operators, such as connecting to a site, and so on. Notification of such events is usually of more concern than video of that event. See Tracing Events on page 210. Setting an Event to Trigger an Alarm or To Be Logged When events occur, the Multi-Media unit can respond in the following ways: The Event is Logged. The Multi-Media unit logs the time of the event. These events are not listed in an alarm session. Sound an alarm in View. Alarms reach View operators either through an alarm station or during an alarm session. They are stored in the Multi db. See Figure Do both. An event can sound an alarm and be logged. Have no effect. This is the default setting for most events. For the events that are logged by default, see Table 10-6, on page 209. Even when alarm hardware is connected to a Multi-Media unit, an event is ignored until View is used to set it to trigger an alarm, to be logged or both. Setting an Alarm Setting events to trigger alarms in your system is an option that is turned off by default. Alternatively, events can be silently logged for administrative purposes. 206

207 READY ALARM HDD TM Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Figure Alarms Are Entered into the Database after being Acknowledged An event is captured by a unit Events can be set up to trigger an alarm Multi Database Another option is to have events silently logged for future use Setting an Event to Report an Alarm 1. Start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Please wait until the System Operational message appears. 2. Depending on the type of event that you want to set, either: Click the Events tab. More tabs will appear. Select a tab (Session, System, and so on) that lists the event that is to be set as an alarm. Click the Serial Devices tab. Select a device and one of its events. Click the Video tab. See Motion Detection, page 127, to set up motion detection. 3. To set the event to trigger an alarm, select the Alarm checkbox next to the event, so that it shows a checkmark. For a Customer-device event, click Update on the Serial Devices tab after selecting an Alarm or Log checkbox. 4. You also have the option of having the event entered into the log. To do so, select the Log checkbox so that it shows a checkmark. Who Can Set Alarms? To set events as alarms and/or to be logged, two items must be included in of the user s account rights: The Modify configuration right, and Access to the site to be modified (see Rights of User Accounts on page 196). Who Can Receive Alarms? A different right is needed to use an Alarm session. A View operator needs a Multi SA to: Add the Process alarms right to the operator s user account. This enables a View operator to receive, view, acknowledge and rearm alarms. See Right to Use Maintenance on page 198. Grant the operator(s) access to the site(s). Document V4 Rev A /10

208 Security for a Multi-Media System Logging an Event 1. Start a Maintenance Session for the Rapid Eye site. Please wait until the System Operational message appears. 2. Depending on the type of event that you want to set, either: Click the Events tab. More tabs appear (see Table 10-5). Select the tab (Session, System, and so on) that lists the event that is to be set as an alarm. Click the Serial Devices tab. Select a device and one of its events. Select the Video tab, then click Motion. See Motion Detection on page 127 for motion detection settings. 3. To set the event to create an entry in the event log, select the Log checkbox next to the event so that it shows a checkmark. Inputs can be additionally configured as either NO, NC or EOL. For a Customer-device event, you must also click Update after selecting the Log checkbox. Event Reference Source Table 10-5 Event Reference, by Source and Tab Event in Maintenance (Except Possible Causes: an Alarm or Log Entry Could Where Noted) Indicate... Outside World event System: no video recording a A cut cable, dead camera, or power outage. Customer-device event View Operator event Inputs: activate, input ports 1 to 16 Inputs: deactivate, input ports 1 to 16 Video: signal unlock, cameras 1 to 16 Video: lock b, cameras 1 to 16 ActivEye: event or alarm Motion: On the Video tab (not on the Event tab) Tamper Detection: On the Video tab (not on the Event tab) User-defined: Not on the Event tab. On the Serial Devices tab Session: connect, reject and disconnect Security sensor has been triggered or the unit is booting. Security sensor has been reset or the unit is booting. Cut cable, hardware failure in a Multi-Media unit, faulty camera, and so on. Can be momentary. A buggy camera. The time since video was unlocked helps troubleshooting. An ActivEye client has notified the Rapid Eye unit of an ActivEye event or alarm. An intruder is detected, a change in lighting, a fire, an explosion, vermin, and so on. Tampering with a camera. Transaction made using hardware at a customer s facility. Use/misuse of View to connect to or disconnect from a site. 208

209 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Source Table 10-5 Event Reference, by Source and Tab (cont d) Event in Maintenance (Except Possible Causes: an Alarm or Log Entry Could Where Noted) Indicate... Multi-Media Unit event Maintenance: changes to security, time, storage, and so on c Outputs: activate, output ports 1 to 8 Outputs: deactivate, output ports 1 to 8 System: no video recording a System: reboot System: failure, self-restart, reboot b System: No video recording a System: time server, no synch, clock drift, and so on System: disk failure Use/misuse of Clear storage or Synchronize time by operator or Multi SA. Use/misuse of an onsite device by a View operator (for example: remote locking of a gate). Use/misuse of an onsite device by a View operator (for example: unlocking a gate). Camera disabled by View operator. Use/misuse of Reboot command. Power failure or catastrophic failure of a unit. Failure of a unit s video hardware. Failure of network or network s time server. Warning of imminent failure of storage. a Some events are repeated in the table because their source can vary. For example, an alarm triggered by an Outside World event can also be triggered by rebooting a unit. b A Multi SA can set a Video lock event to only be logged rather than trigger an alarm. c Some configuration settings can be changed onsite, using LocalView. These changes are not logged, nor do they trigger an alarm when the configuration event is set to do so. Table 10-6 Event: Default Settings for Log and Alarm Source Event Log Alarm View Operator event Session: connect, reject and disconnect off off Maintenance: configuration, security, system files, synchronize time, clear storage, clear stream All are logged; logging cannot be disabled off Outputs: activate, deactivate a off off Multi-Media Unit event System: run-time failure, self-restart, reboot, no video recording, time server unusable, no synchronization in 24 hours, excessive system clock drift, SMART disk failure All are logged; logging cannot be disabled off Outside World event Inputs: activate, deactivate off off Video: signal lock, signal unlock off off ActivEye: event or alarm off off Motion: Not on Event tab, on the Video tab off off Tamper Detection: On the Video tab (not on the Event tab) off off Customer-device event User-defined: Not on Event tab, on the Serial Devices tab off off a Control Output 6 is unavailable as an event, due to its use by the Fault Relay. On a Multi-Media LT unit, the Fault Relay does not make use of a control output. Document V4 Rev A /10

210 Security for a Multi-Media System Tracing Events Like most of the Multi-Media security features, tracing events caused by a View Operator event or Multi-Media Unit event is optional. You can also set a site to produce an alarm if these events occur. Alarms can be sent to specific PCs. See Multi-Media Alarm Stations on page 217. Tracing these events is performed on a site-by-site basis. Use tracing to monitor: Power outages. A site that regularly reboots or has long gaps in its recorded video archive can be monitored for power outages. A breach to site security. You can be warned about some damage, vandalism or destruction to a Rapid Eye site, due to hurricanes, fire, criminal activity, and so on. Operator error. Tracking critical operator actions that result in missing video can help when unidentified problems start occurring and you suspect operator error. Who Can Trace a Multi-Media Unit or View Operator Event? By using the Administrator account or an account based on it your Multi SA has the Modify configuration right automatically and can record or report these or other events. To authorize other users to do so, the Multi SA can add the Modify configuration right to their user account. With this right, the operator can: Start a Maintenance Session at a site Set events: to be logged, to trigger alarms or to be ignored, as needed Arm/disarm alarms Event Log A Multi-Media Unit event is always logged, to help troubleshoot your system. Use an Event Search session to search the event log. Using an Event Session to Search the Event Log By default, some events are not set to be logged and no events are set to trigger alarms. To obtain positive results from an Event session, your organization s Multi SA needs to set events to be logged or to trigger an alarm. See Logging an Event on page 208, and Setting an Event to Report an Alarm on page 207 for more information. 1. Using the View application, select a site in the Sites tab. 2. Click on the toolbar to display the Events window. 3. Select events that you want to search for by clicking an event tab and selecting events (see Figure 10-13, Motion is selected). 4. Enter a date and time in the From and To fields: a. Select a part of the time to change (minutes, for example) and either enter a new value with the keyboard or use to change the value. 210

211 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide b. Use the date drop-down arrow to open the calendar utility and select a date for the event search. 5. Click Start to perform the search. 6. Select an item in the Results pane. 7. Click Video, to obtain video from the time of the item. The video playback starts five seconds before the time of the event. Note The Start button is unavailable until the dates and times in the From and To fields are properly set to perform a valid search. Figure Search for Events Window Enter dates and times in which to search for events Click to see video at the time of the event Working with Search Results You can use the search results to: View video from the time of the events located by the search. Select a log entry and click Video. Print the log entry of an event. Select one or more evnets and click Print. Select a printer, if needed, and click OK. Select font information, if needed, and click OK. Copy the log entry into a *.txt file. Select one or more events and click Save. Enter a name for the txt file, select a location, and click Save. Document V4 Rev A /10

212 Security for a Multi-Media System System Failure A Multi-Media unit can be monitored for: Failure to function Failure to record video You can set the FAULT RELAY to trigger when these failures last for 19 minutes or more. An alarm panel or other external device can be preset to warn your organization if a failure occurs. A power failure also triggers the relay, but does so immediately. A system failure is not a Multi event but it can trigger Multi events. See System Monitor on page 148. A Multi-Media Alarm Station Like most Multi-Media security features, use of an alarm station is optional. An alarm station is a PC that is designated to receive alarms first, from one or more Multi-Media units. View software needs to run on the PCs designated as alarm stations. Their setup is discussed in Multi-Media Alarm Stations on page 217. To set up an alarm station, you might need to obtain some point-to-point connectivity information. Setting Response Priority for Alarm Notification After making an alarm station operational (see Making an Alarm Station Operational on page 233), notification of an event s occurrence can be: Immediate. When Multi-Media units are networked to an alarm station, or you are running an alarm session at the site when and where the alarm occurs, or your PC is set up for Live alarm sessions and you happen to be connected to the site where the alarm is triggered. Within the minute. Your Multi System Administrator has configured a dial-up Multi-Media unit to call an alarm station running View as soon as possible, after an alarm. Should the alarm station be unavailable, an attempt to call it back is made every minute, until a connection to the alarm station is established. Deferred. When a Multi-Media unit is not assigned to call an alarm station, the unit holds the alarms until you start an alarm session for the site. If deferral meets your organization s needs, logging the events rather than having them trigger alarms could be a good alternative strategy. Indirect. A FAULT RELAY on a Multi-Media unit can warn a Multi SA or Multi alarm station through an alarm panel. See System Monitor on page

213 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide PPP Connectivity TIP! Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) user names and passwords are only used in some dial-up connections. This procedure might not apply to your Multi system. Purpose PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol) Dial-up Networking usernames and passwords are used for some dial-up connections. The PPP username and password for an alarm station usually differs from the PPP username and password needed to access a RAS server. The following situations may apply: The Multi SA includes the RAS server in the connection definition. See RAS Server on page 53. See also Dial-Up Technical Note on page 51. The Operator to RAS server connection is in front of one or more units. Using a connection to access a RAS server before using View is illustrated in sections: Using a RAS Server Before Connecting to Units on page 55. Dial-Up Technical Note on page 51. A unit connecting by dial-up to an alarm station s modem. To automate the process of a Multi-Media unit sending alarms to the View application over telephone lines, use Admin to enter the PPP username and password for a PC in the definition of an alarm station. See Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 224. A unit connecting by dial-up to a RAS server that is in front of a Multi-Media alarm station. Using an alarm callback that includes a RAS server is illustrated in RAS Connection to an Alarm Station on page 231. Denying Access There may be situations when a specific user account must have access quickly denied for a Rapid Eye site (for security reasons, termination, and so on). If your Multi system is accessed using a laptop, or by many PCs on your network, it could be inconvenient to physically prevent a rogue user from accessing the Multi software. The best solution is to Deny access to sites for the account, as explained in Denying Access to a User of Your Multi System, page 214. This is quicker than deleting the rogue account and more effective than changing the account s password. Stopping a User in Session On networked units, you can end a rogue user s use of sessions (maintenance, live video, and so on) by using the Admin and View applications in combination. See Stopping a Session on a Networked Multi-Media Unit on page 215 for more information. Document V4 Rev A /10

214 Security for a Multi-Media System Stopping Sessions on Units that Use Modems Multi sessions on a Multi-Media unit that is only accessible by dial-up, cannot be interrupted in any way other than physically intervening. You must either apprehend the user or unplug the phone line that connects to the Multi-Media unit s modem. For high security needs, a remotely controlled telephone line switch can be used. Dealing with an Open Maintenance Session These solutions require running a Maintenance Session. If the user has left a Maintenance Session open on a station, a Multi SA s efforts to rectify the situation are hampered. When creating accounts, you can plan to limit the amount of time that sites can be used by a user account. See Right to Access a Site on page 200 for more information. Outside Hackers To prevent someone who has a copy of Multi software outside of your organization from accessing your sites, change your system password (see System Password on page 184). Denying Access to a User of Your Multi System Caution Honeywell recommends the following procedure as the only expedient way to deny access to a user. Figure Denying Access and Updating Security for Sites When this option is checked, this user cannot access any sites. Update security on each unit after selecting this option. 214

215 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. Double-click the name of the user who must be denied access to your site(s). The Update user dialog box appears (see Figure 10-14). 3. Select the Deny access to sites option so that it displays a checkmark. Click Save and Close. 4. Using View, start a Maintenance Session at a site where access must be denied. 5. Click Update security on the Security tab. See Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit on page 143 for more information. 6. Repeat step 4 and step 5 for each site which the user must be denied access to. 7. There is no harm in leaving the account in the database, for archival purposes. However, you do have the option of using Admin to delete the user s account. Caution To deny access, you only need to update security at the sites the user must not access. On large systems, this can save the trouble of running multiple Maintenance Sessions. See Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit on page 143. Ineffective Strategies for an Unwanted User Caution Honeywell does not recommend the following strategies for dealing with unwanted users. They are explained so that they do not produce a false sense of security or are mistakenly used. For a correct strategy, see Denying Access to a User of Your Multi System on page 214. Changing the user s password. For this to work, the unwanted user would have to first refresh the Local database or quit using View. Both are optional acts, so this is not an effective strategy. Deleting a user s account (instead of denying access). This involves more steps than in the Denying Access procedure at the beginning of this section. After deleting the account, you would still have to change the system password (see System Password on page 184). As a result, you then need to update security at the sites that this user must not access, and communicate with your entire user base, so that they refresh their local databases. This is not an effective strategy. Stopping a Session on a Networked Multi-Media Unit When unauthorized use of a Rapid Eye site is identified, you may need to stop a user in the middle of a session. 1. Using Admin, click the Users tab. 2. Double-click the name of the user who must be stopped. The Update user dialog box appears. Document V4 Rev A /10

216 Security for a Multi-Media System 3. Either: Select the Deny access to sites option so that it displays a checkmark. - or - Remove the account s rights by clicking the checkbox for each Right until each checkmark is removed. 4. Click Save and Close. 5. Using View, start a Maintenance Session at the site where access must be stopped. 6. On the Security tab, click Update Security. Removing Multi-Media Software To remove Multi software from a PC, a Microsoft Windows procedure is used: 1. On the Windows desktop, click Start. 2. Click Control Panel. 3. Double-click Add/Remove Programs. 4. On the Change or Remove Programs tab, use the scroll bar to locate the Rapid Eye Multi program. Select either: Rapid Eye Multi-Media Admin and View [version number]. - or - Rapid Eye Multi-Media View [version number]. 5. Click Change/Remove. Follow the InstallShield utility instructions to remove the software from the PC. Caution It is not recommended that you use Windows Explorer to delete Multi executable files. Multi software uses registry keys that may also need to be removed. Please use the above procedure to remove the software. 216

217 11 Multi-Media Alarm Stations Overview Like most Multi-Media security features, use of alarm stations is optional. A Multi-Media alarm station can receive alarms from one Multi-Media unit or many. Customizing a PC to be an Alarm Station Use the Admin application to designate a PC as an alarm station. A Multi-Media unit that is set to trigger alarms (see Events Defined on page 205), can be directed by your Multi-Media System Administrator (Multi SA) to send its alarms to a designated PC (alarm station). Note You should have user accounts and at least one site configured before setting up an alarm station. You will need users to use the alarm station and a site to send the alarms. Checklist to Configure a Multi-Media Alarm Station 1. Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports on page Identifying and Defining a Connection on page 219. An Alarm station can be reached over either a: Network Connection to an Alarm Station, page 221, or Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station, page Making an Alarm Station Operational on page 233. Document V4 Rev A /10

218 Multi-Media Alarm Stations Alarm Station Operator Requirements View operators who deal with alarm stations should have the rights to: Process alarms. See Granting More or Less Rights to an Account on page 175, and Right to Use View on page 200. Access the sites that call the alarm station. See Right to Access a Site on page 200. System Administrator Requirements Before your Multi SA designates an alarm station, they need: An IP address. The IP address of an alarm station on the same network as the Multi-Media units (see Figure 11-2). Or, A Telephone number. The telephone number that Multi-Media units dial to reach a modem on an alarm station. Or, Both. For connecting to the modem of a remote access service (RAS) server, your Multi SA needs the RAS server s telephone number and IP address of the networked PC used as an alarm station. Caution Let your network administrator know that alarms are sent to port 10,003. This port should be left open in your organization s firewall for the sockets used by Multi alarms. For other ports that may be needed, see the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports 1. Using Admin, click the Alarm Stations tab. 2. To open the Add Alarm station dialog box (see Figure 11-1) and start adding an alarm station, do one of the following: Click on the toolbar. Click Add in the Actions menu. Right-click the pane and select Add from the menu that appears. 3. Enter a name in the Station Name box. 4. Select the checkbox for each site that reports to the alarm station in the Sites that Report to this Station field. 5. You are now ready to define a connection (see page 220) and make the alarm station operational (see page 233). 218

219 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 11-1 Adding an Alarm Station Reducing Alarm Station Complexity by Adding Alarm Station Definitions Adding Alarm Station Definitions For View operators that use sites in many different areas, you have the option of creating two (or more) alarm station records to shuttle alarms to the same PC. Duplication can reduce complexity, especially where customized dial-up connections are needed. For example, you could have one definition for local sites, and another for sites in other cities. Use Descriptive Names To further avoid complexity, use descriptive names such as [location name] units or [city name] units (Chicago sites or Illinois sites). Identifying and Defining a Connection Caution Honeywell recommends that Multi SAs check if their organization allows the type of connection they plan to use. For example, your organization may not allow connecting by modem to a PC on its network if this bypasses a firewall. Enter either dial-up information, an IP address, or both (as listed in Table 11-1) in the Connection area of the Add Alarm Station dialog box (Figure 11-1). Connection data is compulsory when adding an alarm station. Document V4 Rev A /10

220 Multi-Media Alarm Stations Table 11-1 Defining a Connection to an Alarm Station For a Connection to... Dial-Up IP Address See... Alarm station modem n/a page 224 Alarm station modem using an irregular area code, and so on n/a page 227 and page 59 Networked alarm station n/a page 221 Server modem, with alarm station networked to it page 231 Network address translation n/a page 222 Table 11-2 Connection Information for a Rapid Eye Site to an Alarm Station To Set Up Alarm Station Using... Identical dial-up calls to on alarm station s modem from Multi-Media units reporting to it Various local, long distance or international dial-up calls, to the same alarm station s modem Network access Dial-up to RAS server, to access alarm station on server s (remote) network Network address translation A Multi SA Needs... The alarm station s: Telephone number PPP user name and password The alarm station s: Telephone number PPP user name and password To adjust the alarm station s telephone number in the site definition. The alarm station s IP address (1) The Multi alarm station s: IP address (2) The RAS server s: Telephone number PPP user name and password The IP addresses for both the Multi alarm station and the internet router. Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) Fields in an Alarm Station s Definition Scope This feature is for use in complex systems involving many Multi-Media, Multi-Media LT and older Multi units using modems and a RAS server to connect to a number of alarm stations. General Case For simple systems involving only a few units, Honeywell recommends that static PPP User Names and Passwords be typed in an alarm station s definition. 220

221 READY ALARM HDD TM Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide PPP Fields Can Be Left Blank When adding or updating a Multi-Media alarm station, you have the option of leaving the PPP fields blank. The sites that report to that alarm station will use their site s name for PPP fields that are left blank. Updating Unit Security and Network Routers For this feature to take effect, your organization s Multi System Administrator (Multi SA) needs to update security on each unit that plans to use alarm stations where PPP fields were left blank. Use of this feature involves reconfiguring network routers to allow the unit names or passwords through for further processing. Network Connection to an Alarm Station TIP! Your Rapid Eye site might not need this type of connection to an alarm station. For some installations, a dial-up connection would meet your requirements. For other means of connecting to an alarm station, see Table 11-2 on page 220. Figure 11-2 Alarms Sent to an Alarm Station s IP Address Over a Network 1. Make note of the alarm station s IP address. Alarm Station 4. Alarms sent from Multi-Media units can now be received by the alarm station. Multi Database Rapid Eye Multi-Media unit 2. Running Admin, enter the alarm station s IP address into a Multi database. Admin Station Remote View Station 3. Use View to run a Maintenance session on each Multi-Media unit. Document V4 Rev A /10

222 READY ALARM HDD TM Multi-Media Alarm Stations Setting Up a Network Connection to an Alarm Station 1. While adding or updating an alarm station definition in the Add/Update Alarm Station dialog box, select the Use Existing Network Connection option. 2. Enter the alarm station s IP address in the IP Address field. An IP Address is all that is needed for a successful network connection. 3. Click Save and Close. In the Alarm Stations tab s Connection Method column, the first letter of network appears in parentheses: (n), followed by the IP address used to connect to the alarm station. 4. To finish preparing the alarm station, see Making an Alarm Station Operational on page 233. Network Address Translation for Alarm Stations A connection to one or many Multi-Media alarm stations, using one IP address, can be made by using network address translation (NAT) and port address translation (PAT), a one-to-many address translation. This is useful to connect to alarm stations through: A WAN The Internet Another segment of the same LAN. Figure 11-3 Receiving Alarms from a Unit Over a WAN or the Internet Wide area network (WAN) Router s outside interface Router s inside interface Multi-Media alarm station C. Destination Port: LAN IP: Mask: Gateway: Multi-Media unit, sending an alarm. The connection uses a router s outside IP address and source port: alarm station C , alarm station D Internet Router. Map each alarm station s source port to its destination port plus a LAN IP. Router interfaces: outside IP , inside IP Multi-Media alarm station D. Destination Port: (same as alarm station C). LAN IP: Mask: Gateway: IP Addresses The key is to configure a router to translate and map the Callback s source IP port. The Network Administrator of the destination s LAN can supply a Multi SA with the outside IP address of the internet router. 222

223 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide IP Port Callbacks to alarm stations on a remote LAN are identified by the value of the Callbacks Source IP Port, in the Add/Update Alarm Station dialog boxes shown in Figure Each alarm station on a remote LAN needs to have a different Callback value. Mapping IP Port in Network s Router For each Multi-Media alarm station, one port mapping is needed when translating a network address. Using Admin to Prepare a Multi-Media Unit for NAT 1. Using Admin, configure the connection to an Alarm Station. Assign the router s outside IP address to the IP Address field (see Figure 11-4). Figure 11-4 Connecting Through a WAN to an Alarm Station on a LAN Internet Router Use router s outside IP address (WAN) Use router s inside IP address (to LAN) 2. Enable the Use Network Address Translation option. 3. Assign a value to the Callbacks Source Port. In Figure 11-4, for example, the value of Callbacks has been changed from 10,003 (the default) to 56,080. The source port value must be below 65, Select the Multi-Media sites that report alarms to the alarm station. 5. Click Save and Close. In the Alarm Stations tab s Connection Method column, a (d) appears, standing for dial-up, followed by the telephone number that calls the RAS server; then an (n), standing for network, followed by the IP address of the Multi alarm station. 6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 for other alarm stations on the same LAN. Document V4 Rev A /10

224 READY ALARM HDD TM Multi-Media Alarm Stations 7. Use the router s software to map each alarm station s source port to the corresponding destination port, plus the alarm station s LAN IP. See Table 11-3, below, or Figure 11-3, on page 222. Table 11-3 Router Mappings: Example for Unit Callback to Alarm Stations Admin setting to: destination Network device: mappings NAT Port (to network router) Router s Outside IP (network constant) Physical Port (unit & firewall) Inside IP (alarm station) Alarm station C Callback Port: 56, ,003 a Alarm station D Callback Port: 56,090 map as above 10,003 a a Alarms are sent to port 10,003. For other ports used by Multi, see the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Installation Guide. Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station Figure 11-5 Multi-Media Unit Calls an Alarm Station to Report an Alarm POTS or ISDN Multi Alarm Station Multi-Media unit Modem Modem Preparing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station Modem Multi-Media units can use a telephone line to connect to the modem of an alarm station, or its RAS server. Telephone lines can be either a plain old telephone system (POTS), or higher speed integrated services digital network (ISDN). You also need to know the telephone number to reach that modem. 224

225 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Microsoft Windows To send alarms over a dial-up connection, you will need to obtain a point-to-point protocol (PPP) username and password for the PC used as an alarm station, or for its RAS server, from their Microsoft Windows operating system. See Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) Fields in an Alarm Station s Definition on page 220. Setting Up a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station 1. Add or update an alarm station definition (as explained in Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports, page 218). The IP Address field is left empty for a dial-up connection to an alarm station, except if a remote access service (RAS) server apart from the alarm station is part of the connection. For RAS servers, see RAS Connection to an Alarm Station on page Select the Use Dial-up Networking option. 3. Leave the Country Code as (dialing same country), unless the Multi-Media unit is in a different country than the alarm station. Caution Honeywell recommends using the (dialing same country) option. Do not use your country s name, such as United States of America (1), unless the alarm station is in a different country from the Multi-Media unit. Figure 11-6 Area Code Needed to Connect to a Multi-Media Alarm Station 4. Enter the alarm station s area code in the Area Code (City Code) field. 5. Enter the alarm station s telephone number in the Phone Number field. Document V4 Rev A /10

226 Multi-Media Alarm Stations 6. Enter the alarm station s PPP User Name and PPP Password in their fields. These can be obtained from your network administrator, as indicated in Overview, page Enter the PPP password a second time in the Confirm PPP Password field. 8. Click Save and Close. In the Alarm Stations tab s Connection Method column, a (d) appears, standing for dial-up, followed by the telephone number that calls the Multi alarm station. 9. To finish preparing the alarm station, see Making an Alarm Station Operational on page 233. Entering Area Codes in Site and Alarm Station Definitions When the country and area codes of an alarm station match those of the sites reporting to it, calls to the alarm station are considered local. If they do not match, a long distance code (1 by default plus an area code) is used to make the call. This is illustrated in Figure TIP! Long distance or local, Honeywell recommends that you enter long distance codes for alarm stations and for Rapid Eye sites. The software can compare the phone numbers more easily that way, suppress their display automatically as needed, and avoid processing an error. Figure 11-7 Connection for an Alarm Station Shown in Site Definition Window 226

227 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Dial-Up to Another Area Code An example, shown in Table 11-4, uses an alarm station in Chicago, Illinois, and Multi-Media units in Chicago and Fargo, North Dakota. Note that comparing telephone numbers without area codes can produce a local call when a long-distance call is needed. Table 11-4 Matching Area Codes for Sites and Alarm Stations Multi-Media Unit Alarm Station (Chicago a ) Match Result Enter: 773 (Chicago) Enter: 773 (Chicago) Yes OK: Enter: 773 (Chicago) Code not entered No OK, local: Enter: 701 (Fargo) Enter: 773 (Chicago) No OK: (Fargo) code not entered (Chicago) code not entered Yes (?) Error; a long distance call is needed a One of the area codes for Chicago is 773. Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station Before customizing a dial-up connection, check your alarm station definition, as explained in Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 224. You do not need to customize a long distance code when a unit uses regular long distance. One or many such sites can call-in alarms to the same alarm station without concern. By default, Multi makes local calls when long distance codes match. You can add a long distance or toll-free code, site-by-site, as needed, in the Update Station to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box. See Figure 11-8, below and Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 59. Irregular Area Code Use Why customize? When a unit is not in the same area code as its alarm station. Sometimes a local call can be used when the alarm station is close by. You can customize an alarm station s: Long distance codes, for irregular and toll-free uses. Dialing speed, by using a delay code. - and/or - Telephone exchange, at the Rapid Eye site or at the alarm station. A copy of the telephone number in the alarm station definition is available for customization at each site definition, in the Report Alarms to these Alarm Stations pane. For example, in Figure 11-8, long distance and Chicago area codes were added to the local number, for a site that requires an irregular long distance call within one area code. A customized number is not shared with other sites. The customization is shown by an asterisk. Document V4 Rev A /10

228 Multi-Media Alarm Stations Figure 11-8 Customizing the Dial-Up to an Alarm Station in the Site s Definition TIP! The alarm station telephone number in the site definition is the one that is actually used to dial to an alarm station. Alternatively, see Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 59. Using a Local Call Across Area Codes Customization is needed when your telephone company does not require a long-distance call for calling another area code. Remove the long-distance code for a remote Multi-Media unit, site-by-site, as needed, in the Update Station to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box, obtained by updating the alarm station on the Update Site dialog box. See Figure 11-8, on page 228, and Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 59. Using Toll-Free Numbers Customization is needed when toll-free numbers match and dial-up is used to reach units or call in alarms. 228

229 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Using a Long Distance Call in One Area Code Customization is needed when your telephone company requires a long-distance call within an area code. You can add the area code for a local Multi-Media unit, site-by-site, as needed, in the Update Station to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box, obtained by updating the alarm station on the Update Site dialog box. See Figure 11-8, on page 228, and Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 59. Using a Long Distance Call with Regular Mixed Area Codes You do not need to customize Multi-Media units that use regular long distance when in different area codes. The units can call-in alarms to the same alarm station without concern. Delaying the Speed of Dialing You can add one or more commas to a telephone number to delay further dialing by one-second increments. For example: 9,,, , dials nine followed by a three-second pause (indicated by the three commas) before the rest of the number is dialed. Telephone Exchange A telephone exchange might be a component in the connection chain between a Rapid Eye site and an alarm station. Find out if your system has an exchange at the Rapid Eye site, at the alarm station, or at both ends. Telephone Exchange at an Alarm Station In the alarm station definition, add an extension suffix in the Phone Number box, after the telephone number. A delay might be needed to give the exchange time to answer, before any exchange commands or the extension are dialed (see Delaying the Extension Suffix on page 230). Telephone Exchange at a Rapid Eye Site A prefix number is the extra telephone keystroke, such as a 9 or an 8, that needs to be dialed to reach an outside telephone line. For Multi-Media units on a telephone exchange using the same alarm station, either: The exchange is shared. In the alarm station definition, add a prefix in the Phone Number box, before the telephone number. You can use commas, as needed, to delay the dialing of the extension until the alarm station s exchange answers. See Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page or - Document V4 Rev A /10

230 Multi-Media Alarm Stations The exchange is not shared. You will have to add the prefix before the telephone number, site-by-site, as needed, in the Update Station to Call in Case of Alarms box, obtained by updating the alarm station on the Update Site dialog box. This is illustrated in Figure 11-8, on page 228 and in Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 59. Delaying the Extension Suffix To delay dialing to the extension, enter commas in the Phone Number box of the alarm station definition, as needed. Each comma adds a one-second delay. For example: 9,,, ,,,,,,,, 226, introduces an eight second delay (eight commas would produce eight seconds of delay) before dialing the final 226 extension. See the previous section, Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 224, for more information. International Dial-Up Long-distance prefixes are used for units that dial-up to alarm stations. Your Rapid Eye site might not need this type of customization for its dial-up connection to an alarm station. For other means of connecting to an alarm station, see Table 11-2, on page 220. Planning for a Few International Units If only a few units reporting to an alarm station are outside of the alarm station s country, it is more effective to add the prefixes site-by-site, as needed. Add the prefixes to the Update Station to Call in Case of Alarms box, opened by updating the alarm station on the Update Site dialog box. See Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 59. Alarm Station for Many International Units If their are many international units reporting to an alarm station and they are all in the same country, you have the option of changing the long distance prefixes for out-of-country and in-country dialing (see Figure 11-9). Changing Long-Distance Prefixes Long distance prefixes only affect connections from units to alarm stations. Connections from View to units will not be affected. 1. Select Options from the View menu of the Admin application. 2. As needed, enter a new In-country long-distance prefix or Out-of-country long-distance prefix in their fields. For example, Figure 11-9 shows the prefixes 1 and 0,1,1. Foreign prefixes for alarm station dial-up connections vary depending on the country. Note that commas can be used to introduce a delay in the dial-up. 230

231 READY ALARM HDD TM Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Figure 11-9 International Prefixes for Dial-Up in Rapid Eye Software Creating Extra Alarm Station Definitions The simplest solution when many international sites need customization is to create two (or more) alarm station definitions that shuttle alarms to the same PC. For example, one alarm station records alarms from international sites in country a, and another alarm station from sites in country b, as needed. You can then add whichever alarm station is most appropriate for a site, on a site-by-site basis. To create alarm station definitions, see Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports on page 218. When most units are outside the operator s country, it is best to change the country code in the alarm station definition (see Setting Up a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station on page 225). RAS Connection to an Alarm Station Figure Sending Alarms Through a RAS Server to an Alarm Station RAS Server Modem POTS or ISDN RAS Server LAN Rapid Eye site Multi Alarm station Modem Document V4 Rev A /10

232 Multi-Media Alarm Stations A Rapid Eye site may need to connect to a remote access service (RAS) server to reach a Multi alarm station. Figure shows a telephone number to a server s modem. The number is dialed first and point-to-point protocol (PPP) authentication occurs. Alarms can then reach the alarm station using the unit s IP address (as in Figure 11-11). Figure RAS Configuration for an Alarm Station Multi-Media unit s IP Address Telephone number to RAS server s modem Network Administrator Requirements Alarms are sent to port 10,003. This port should be left open in your organization s firewall, for the sockets used by Multi alarms. TIP! Your Rapid Eye site might not need this type of connection to an alarm station. For other means of connecting to an alarm station, see Table 11-2, on page 220. Setting Up a Connection to a RAS Server 1. While adding or updating an alarm station definition (as explained in Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports, page 218), you will see the Add/Update Alarm Station dialog box. Enter the alarm station s IP Address in its field (ee Figure 11-11). 2. Select the Use Dial-up Networking option. 3. Leave the Country Code as (dialing same country), unless the Multi-Media unit is in a different country than the RAS server. Caution Honeywell recommends using the (dialing same country) option. Do not use your country s name, such as United States of America (1), unless the alarm station is in a different country from the Multi-Media unit. 232

233 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 4. Enter the RAS server modem s telephone number in the Phone Number field. 5. Enter the RAS server s area code in the Area Code field, as in Figure Obtain the PPP User Name and PPP Password of Multi Alarm Stations that use a modem. This information is either kept by your network administrator or set by the user of the workstation in the Windows Dial-up Networking program. Enter one of the RAS server s PPP User Name and its PPP Password in their fields. This authorization is obtained from the network administrator responsible for the RAS server s network, as indicated in Overview on page Enter the PPP password a second time in the Confirm PPP Password field. 8. Click Save and Close. In the Alarm Stations tab s Connection Method column, a (d) appears, standing for dial-up, followed by the telephone number that calls the RAS server; then an (n), standing for network, followed by the IP address of the Multi alarm station. 9. The next step is Making an Alarm Station Operational, page 233. Customizing a RAS Dial-up Connection To customize a RAS dial-up (irregular or toll-free use of long distance codes, and so on), use the same procedures and suggestions as indicated in Customizing a Dial-Up Connection to an Alarm Station, page 227, and International Dial-Up on page 230. Processing a Dial-up Callback When a Rapid Eye Multi-Media unit uses telephone lines to communicate with a Multi alarm station, the unit needs to use the alarm station s PPP user name and password for dial-up networking. After answering its modem, the alarm station must recognize the PPP user name and password before the Multi-Media unit can access the View application. Making an Alarm Station Operational After adding an alarm station (see page 218), and defining how a Multi-Media unit connects to it (see page 219): You need to update security for each Multi-Media unit involved. See Updating Security on a Multi-Media Unit on page 143. An alarm station is of little use if you have not set any events to trigger alarms. See Events Defined on page 205. Use the Update Site dialog box in the Admin application, to prioritize alarm stations. See Sequencing Site Alarm Stations on page 57 for more information. Operators of PCs not designated as alarm stations can also receive alarms sent by a Multi-Media unit by running an Alarm session with the View application. To find out how to run an Alarm session, see the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide. Document V4 Rev A /10

234 Multi-Media Alarm Stations Using More Than One Alarm Station Definition If enough sites need customization, you could create two (or more) alarm station definitions to shuttle alarms to a PC. For example, one alarm station for long distance calls and another for local sites within the same calling area. To avoid confusion, use descriptive names, such as: Fire sensors - local calls, Fire sensors - long distance, and so on. You can then add the alarm station most appropriate for a site, on a site-by-site basis. Creating alarm station definitions is explained in Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports, page 218. For more information, see Addressing Alarms to an Alarm Station on page 57, and Quickly Assigning a Site to Many Alarm Stations on page 58. Creating Extra Alarm Station Definitions for the Same PC A Multi SA has the option of creating two (or more) alarm station definitions to shuttle alarms to the same PC (for example, one for local sites, and another for remote sites). To avoid complexity, use descriptive names such as: local sensors and remote sensors. To create alarm station definitions, see Adding an Alarm Station Name and Reports on page 218. Disconnecting When Alarms Are in Progress Closing View or disconnecting a session after a successful alarm callback voids that callback. This can occur due to power failure, user action, and so on. You can still view the alarms in an alarm session. If you have set up your alarm handling options to Automatically Rearm Alarms (see Overview of Automatic Clip Creation and Rearm Features on page 235), the alarms will not be automatically rearmed if the unit is disconnected during a session. You will have to open another alarm session to manually rearm the alarms. Successfully Listing Alarm Callbacks After an Interruption Run View and start an alarm session to list and work with the alarms. See the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide to find out how to run an Alarm session. 234

235 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Setting Up an Alarm Station for Alarm Callback Keep the following points in mind when setting up an Alarm Station for alarm callback: At any point during alarm callback, only one Alarm Station can have Alarm callbacks reported at one time even if we have multiple Alarm stations configured for a unit. Alarm Stations will be notified in the sequence that you setup (see Cascading Alarm Stations and Priority on page 57). If an Alarm session is kept open in the Remote View application in any of the user PCs, then the Alarms are reported in the Alarm session only, rather than to Alarm Callback stations. Open Alarm sessions take the first priority (see Setting Response Priority for Alarm Notification on page 212). If no alarm sessions are open, alarm callbacks will go to the Alarm station. If you are trying to change the alarm station, then make sure that you use one of the following two steps: a. Update Security for the unit rearm all Alarms reported in the alarm session reboot the unit. b. Update Security for the unit make sure no new alarms are generated (to avoid alarm generation, disable all of the events reporting alarms) rearm any pending Alarms reported through an alarm session (if necessary) pause for 10 to 15 seconds then try enabling all the events which generates alarms. Note The above steps a and b, are to avoid any racing conditions, between switching over from the old alarm station to a new alarm station. Overview of Automatic Clip Creation and Rearm Features You can set up your system to automatically create video clips for input activated and motion alarms and then automatically rearm the alarms after the clip is created. Setting Up Automatic Clip Creation To have your system automatically create clips for input activated and motion alarms: 1. Open the Alarm Handling Options window (see Figure 11-12). Open the View menu of the Remote View application Options Alarm Handling. 2. Place a checkmark in the Automatic Clip Creation on Alarm Callback box. 3. If needed, change the Pre-Trigger Duration and/or Post-Trigger Duration values. These values determine the number of seconds before and after an alarm that will be included in the automatically created clip. Document V4 Rev A /10

236 Multi-Media Alarm Stations Figure Alarm Handling Options Make sure that the file location for saved clips exists to confirm that they will be saved. Setting Up the Automatic Rearm Alarms Feature Rapid Eye units with the automatic rearm feature support automatically rearming Input Activated and Motion alarms from a Rapid Eye Unit after automatic clip creation (see Setting Up Automatic Clip Creation on page 235). If the View application is shut down before automatic clip creation is completed, the corresponding alarms (Input Activated and Motion) will be automatically rearmed the next time the application is opened. The user can enable the Automatic Rearm feature from the Alarm Handling Options window (opened with the Rapid Eye View application, View menu Options Alarm Handling), shown in Figure Please note that: When the Rapid Eye software is installed and started for the first time, it does not have any information about the alarms that are not rearmed. Therefore automatically rearming alarms will not be supported on the initial startup. After the application has been running and alarm callbacks are received, it maintains information about the status of the alarms (Rearmed / Not Rearmed). If the application shuts down in the middle of clip creation, pending Input Activated and Motion alarms will be automatically rearmed the next time the application starts. The Automatic Rearm feature is system dependent. That is, this feature will be supported only from the server that has been configured as the Alarm Station. While trying to automatically rearm, if any of the sites are unreachable, alarms from those sites will remain in their non-rearmed state. 236

237 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Removing an Alarm Station 1. Using Admin, click the Alarm Stations tab. 2. Select the alarm station that you want to delete. 3. To remove the selected Alarm Station, do one of the following: Click on the toolbar. Click Delete on the Actions menu. Press the Delete key on the keyboard. 4. You will be asked to confirm the deletion. Click Yes to continue or No to cancel. Disabling/Enabling the Dial-Up Server For some mission critical applications, your IT personnel may wish to disallow access to the Microsoft Windows procedure to disable and enable a RAS server on a PC. Alarms from a De-Listed or Unregistered Unit Situations View operators are warned with a message when a call about an alarm is from a Multi-Media unit that has been: Removed from a Multi-Media database (Multi db). Your Multi-Media system administrator (Multi SA) can remove a Multi-Media unit from a Multi db. However, the de-listed unit that you have removed may still be operating at a customer site, set to call a PC designated as a Multi-Media alarm station. Added without registration to a Multi-Media database. To register a Multi-Media unit, a View operator must invoke the first Maintenance Session on the unit. Even users without the right to use the commands of a Maintenance Session can start a Maintenance Session to register a unit. A message appears in both situations. When the operator receives the message, calls about the alarm have stopped. Document V4 Rev A /10

238 Multi-Media Alarm Stations Tracing a Unit Sending an Alarm To trace a unit sending an alarm, either: A View operator can make a note of the unit s serial number and IP address indicated in the message. - or - A Multi SA can consult the alarm log. Note Before de-listing a Rapid Eye unit from a Multi-Media database, Honeywell recommends that your Multi SA use the Admin application to remove alarm stations listed in a site definition. See Stopping a Site from Reporting to a Specific Alarm Station on page 238. Stopping a Site from Reporting to a Specific Alarm Station 1. Using Admin, select the Sites tab. 2. Double-click the site that you plan to remove. An Update Site dialog box appears. 3. Click in the Report Alarms to these Alarms Stations pane. The Add/Delete Stations to Call in Case of Alarms dialog box appears, displaying a list of alarm stations. Stations already assigned to the site are listed the Report Alarms to column. 4. To move alarm stations back to the available Alarm Stations column, either: Select one or more station names in the Report Alarms to column, then click the left-arrow (<). - or - Double-click the stations that you want to move. 5. Click Save and Close. The Update Site dialog box reappears, listing the alarm stations in the Report Alarms to these Alarm Stations pane. 6. You have the option of ending the site edit. To do so, click Close. The Admin window reappears, listing your system s sites on the Sites tab. 7. Use the View application to start a Maintenance Session for the Multi-Media unit that you plan to remove. 8. Click Update Security on the Security tab of the Maintenance Session. Information from the Multi db is copied to the Multi-Media unit. Please wait until Updated security appears in the Feedback field. 9. Close the Maintenance Session. 10. Using Admin, remove the site (see Deleting a Site on page 37). 11. Using View, click Refresh. 238

239 12 Archival Policies Use Archival Policies to archive data from multiple units at one remote view station and then store the archived video clips on either the local PC or a network server. This chapter covers creating immediate and scheduled archival policies, running an archival policy, playing back archived data, and viewing and searching through archival logs and past archive details. Configuring an Archival Policy Configure an Archival policy to archive data from a unit: 1. Right-click in the Archival tab of the Admin application. Figure 12-1 Archival Tab of the Admin Application 2. Click Add on the menu that appears. Note You can also use the toolbar buttons to configure the archival policies. Click to Add, to Update, to Delete, and to Duplicate a policy. 3. Enter a name for the archival policy in the Policy Name field (see Figure 12-2). Document V4 Rev A /10

240 Archival Policies Figure 12-2 Add Archival Policy Window 4. Click the browse button ( ) to select a Server Location. Note The Server Location can be either a local folder or a network share path with write permission. If the folder or share path is not available during archiving, the policy will backup data in the working directory (the location where the application is installed) by default. 5. Select an archival server location in the Browse for Folder dialog box (Figure 12-3) and click OK. Figure 12-3 Browse for Archival Server Location You can also create a new folder 240

241 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 6. The default Policy Type is Immediate. An Immediate policy must be manually run by an operator before any data is archived. If you want to set up automatic archiving on specific days and times: a. Select Scheduled as the Policy Type with the drop-down arrow. The Add Scheduled Archival Policy window (Figure 12-4) opens. b. Use the Policy Type drop-down arrow to select either a Daily or Weekly scheduled archival policy. Figure 12-4 Scheduled Archive Policy Setup If you select a Daily scheduled archival policy, select the days of the week on which the archival policy will run. Daily Scheduled Archival Policy Note When a scheduled daily policy runs, it archives data of the previous day. The time that is archived is specified in the From and To fields of the Add Archival Policy window. If you select a Weekly scheduled archival policy, select the day of the week on which the archival policy will run. Weekly Scheduled Archival Policy Note When a scheduled weekly policy runs, it archives data from the last 7 days at the times specified in the From and To fields of the Add Archival Policy window. If you are archiving on a Sunday, data is archived from the previous Sunday up to the Saturday prior to archiving. c. Use the arrow buttons ( ) to change the time that the policy will Run At. Note It may take a considerable amount of time for archiving to complete. We recommend you schedule archiving to take place at times when no other operations are in progress (such as late at night). d. Click Save and Close. 7. Now use the Add/Delete button ( ) to add Sites Associated with this Policy. 8. Click the checkbox next to the sites or folders that you want associated with the archival policy (see Figure 12-5). Depending on what boxes are checked, you can associate all the sites, some of the sites, one site, or just a couple cameras at a site with the archival policy. Click Save and Close after your selections are made. Document V4 Rev A /10

242 Archival Policies Figure 12-5 Adding Sites to an Archival Policy Note If a site uses multiple connections, only the primary connection will be used for archiving. Cameras 1 to 16 will be listed here for each unit. The number of cameras displayed is not dependent on the number of cameras connected to the unit. Archiving will only occur for connected cameras. Point-of-sales (POS) streams are not listed here. By default, all POS streams are included in the archives. 9. The archival time is displayed next to the site names (see below). The default archival time is the half hour that includes the current time (time when policy was created). Figure 12-6 List of Sites Associated with a Policy Note Archiving will happen in the order listed here, one at a time. In this example, unit 001, or Main Unit, will archive first and unit 002 (Multi-Media RU) will archive next. Data is backed up between the From and To times listed. Note Archiving data during the daylight saving time switching period may cause some difficulty. We recommend that you create a clip specifically for the switching period to ensure the data is safely backed up. 10. To change the archival time (see Figure 12-7): a. Select one or more sites in the Sites Associated with this Policy table. b. Click. c. Use the appropriate drop-down arrows to change the From and To archival Times. If you are using an Immediate Archival Policy, you can also change the From and To archival dates. Click Save and Close. Figure 12-7 Updating a Site Immediate Archival Policy Scheduled Archival Policy 242

243 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Note Clicking Save and Close in the Update Site In Policy window will save the entire policy. The Save and Close button in the Add Archival Policy window will be grayed out. Note Archiving will only take place on sites that use an Ethernet network connection. Sites that use a dial-up connection are not currently supported. Figure 12-8 Filled In Archival Policy Window Add Archival Policy Window after it has been filled in Note If no sites are associated with the policy, the policy will not be listed with other policies in the View application. 11. Click Save and Close to save the archival policy. Note It is recommended that you double-check the cameras to be backed up for a site. After configuring the policy, you should open individual sites and check the camera associations again. Document V4 Rev A /10

244 Archival Policies Using the Archival Policy Note It may take a considerable amount of time for archiving to complete. We recommend you run archival policies at times when no other operations are in progress (such as late at night). Note When an archival policy backs up redundant data (data from a time and site that has previously been backed up), the policy will overwrite the data from the same time period. To run an archival policy: 1. Launch the View application and select the Archival tab. The archival policies and servers that have already been configured are listed here. Note Only Immediate policies are listed on the View application. Scheduled policies will run automatically when scheduled and do not need to be run manually. 2. If you have recently added policies or servers, you should click Refresh to update the lists of policies and servers (see Figure 12-9). Figure 12-9 List of Archival Policies and Servers 244

245 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 3. To view the details of a Policy, select it and click Properties ( ). Figure Archival Policy Properties 4. Select an Archival Policy and click Run ( ). The Archiving progress bar appears (see Figure 12-11). Note Archiving will not occur if either the Rapid Eye site has a system password set or if the archival server is not accessible. Figure Archiving Progress Bar Note If you click Cancel, the current archiving will stop, but anything archived previous to clicking Cancel will be retained in the local folder or network share path Server Location. 5. Click Close when the archiving is 100% completed. Note Only one archival policy can run at a time (immediate or scheduled). If a policy is running when a scheduled policy is set up to run, the scheduled policy will be queued to run when the first archival policy is finished. Document V4 Rev A /10

246 Archival Policies Storing Archived Data Archived data is stored in the folder specified in the Server Location field. The file structure of the archived data is as follows: [Server Location]\[site name]\[year]\[month]\[day]\[site name]_[start time]_[end time].dat With this file structure, you can quickly search for files archived from specific units or for specific times. You just need to know the unit, year, month and day that the archived clip comes from. For example, if you archived data from the Main Unit to the E:\Backup folder on September 2, 2008 from 2:30:00 PM to 2:59:59 PM, the path to this data would look like: E:\Backup\Main Unit\2008\09\02\Main Unit_143000_ dat Manage these data files as needed. You can delete unneeded data files, copy them or move them to a backup server. Note If the Server Location folder or share path is not available during archiving, the archival policy will backup data in the working directory (the location where the application is installed) by default. Note If you are trying to archive more than 30 minutes video, the data will be stored in data files of 30 minutes each. If you are archiving two hours of video, the two hours will be split into four 30-minute data files. Playing Back Archived Data To play back archived data, you must first add an archival server with the Admin application. Once the server is added, you then discover the archival sites with the View application, select a site to retrieve data from, and then play back the video. Note Video recorded at a very low frame rate (0.5 fps) may not play back properly. Green blocks may be observed during playback. Increase the recording frame rate to work around this issue. 246

247 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Note Playing back clips from an archival server will be slower than playing back clips from a retrieval session. Setting Up an Archival Server 1. Right-click in the Archival Server tab of the Admin application. Figure Archival Server Tab of the Admin Application 2. Click Add on the menu that appears. 3. Enter a name for the server in the Share Name field (see Figure 12-13). 4. Click the browse button ( ) to select a Server Location. Figure Add Archival Server Window Note The Server Location can be a local folder or a network share path. Data will backup to the working directory (location where the application is installed) by default if the server location is not accessible. If data has been backed up to the working directory, you can choose the working directory in this step as the Server Location or manually copy and paste the files to the proper location. 5. Select an archival server location in the Browse for Folder dialog box and click OK. 6. Click Save and Close. Document V4 Rev A /10

248 Archival Policies Note Select an archival server and click to modify the server s options. You can also add another server ( ) or delete a server ( ). Discovering Sites on the Archival Server 1. Launch the View application and select the Archival tab. The archival policies and servers that have already been configured are listed here. 2. If you have recently added policies or servers, you should click Refresh to update the lists of policies and servers. 3. Select an Archival Server and click Discover Sites ( ). 4. All the sites found on the archival server will be listed after clicking Discover Sites (see Figure as an example). Figure Archival Servers before discovery Discovering Sites on an Archival Server Archival Servers after discovery Playing Back Archived Video and Data Before you can play back archived data, you must first set up an archival server and discover the sites on the archival server (see Setting Up an Archival Server, page 247, and Discovering Sites on the Archival Server on page 248). To play back video and data: 1. Select a site listed under an Archival Server and click Playback ( ). The Archival Playback Select Date and Time window (Figure 12-15) appears. Figure Archival Playback Select Date and Time Window 248

249 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 2. Use the Date drop-down arrow to open the calendar utility. Select the date and time from which data is to be played back. Click the left or right arrows to change the month that is displayed. 3. Select an element of the Time field (hours, minutes, seconds, AM/PM) and use the arrow buttons ( ) to change the playback time. 4. Click OK. The Select streams for Archival Playback window (Figure 12-16) appears. Figure Select Streams for Archival Playback Window 5. Select the video and data streams that you want to play back. To select more than one camera, press the Ctrl or Shift keys while selecting the streams in the list. 6. Click OK. Video from the selected streams will play back in the View application. Use the playback controls to find the video you are looking for. See the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide, for more information on playback options and controls (Figure 12-17). Figure Archival Playback Options and Controls Note Playback of archived data is NOT continuous. Because the archived data is chunked into 30 minute files, playback of the data can only occur within the 30 minute data file that is currently selected. If you want to play the next 30 minutes of video, you will need to close the viewing window, click Playback again, and select the appropriate time in the Select Date and Time window. Note If media is not available from the requested time, the Late Media Indication window will open. This window shows the nearest future time at which data is available. Click OK to start playback from this time. Document V4 Rev A /10

250 Archival Policies Using Archival Logs Setting Up Archival Logs to be Recorded To view and search through archival logs, you must first enable archival logs to be recorded: 1. Open the View menu on the Admin application and select Options. 2. Make sure the checkbox for the Log archival policy execution status in the database option is selected (see Figure 12-18). This option is checked by default and must be checked for archival logs to be saved. Figure Options for the Admin Application Must be checked for archival logs to be saved 3. You have the option of setting the archival logs to be automatically deleted by selecting the Delete archival logs older than (in days) option. If necessary, use the arrows ( ) to change number of days before the archival logs will be deleted (default 30 days). 4. Click Save and Close. 5. Now run a couple of archival policies so that you generate some archival logs. Viewing Archival Logs with the Admin Application After you have enabled archival logs to be recorded in the database and have executed a couple of archival policies, you can view the archival logs with the Admin application: 1. Click the Archival Log button ( ) on the Admin application. 250

251 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Figure Archiving Log Report Log filtering details 2. From here you can search through the archive log details (see Figure 12-19). Click the heading of a column to sort the logs for that category. For example, if you click Status, logs that are Progressing or Success will be grouped together. 3. You can also Print, Archive and Delete logs from the report. To print, archive or delete more than one archive log, press Ctrl or Shift keys while selecting the log. 4. If you are getting too many logs in the report, you can filter the results (see Figure 12-20). The filtering details can be seen on the bottom bar of the Archival Log Report window. To filter the archival log: Figure Archival Log Filtering Options a. Click Filter. b. Select one of the Time Filter options. Narrow the filter time as much as possible to avoid a large number of archival logs. c. To filter the policies, select the These Policies option, then select one or more policies from the Policy Name list. d. To filter the sites, select the These Sites option, then select one or more sites from the Site Name list. e. Select one of the Status options. You can filter to show Any Status, or only Success or Failure statuses. f. Click OK. The Archival Log Report will automatically filter with the new options. 5. Click Close when you are finished viewing the Archival Log Report. Document V4 Rev A /10

252 Archival Policies Viewing Archival Logs with the View Application You can also view archival logs with the View application: 1. Launch the View application and select the Log tab. 2. Select the Archival Log option and click Refresh ( ). 3. Select the appropriate dates and times in the Show Archival Logs from and to fields. 4. Click Display Archival Log. The archival log displays (see Figure 12-21). Figure Archival Logs in the View Application Select times to show archival logs from 5. Close the View application when you have finished your session. 252

253 13 Touring Many Sites A Rapid Eye Multi system can be set to show all of the video and data from a series of sites, one site at a time, automatically. This is a common function of a CCTV security system. Admin is used to setup the site tours. View is used to run the tours. A site tour, involving multiple Rapid Eye sites is very different from other types of tours, such as: PTZ tours, which only include one camera, at one site. See Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup, page 95, to see how to setup a PTZ-camera tour. LocalView tours, which uses LocalView to tour multiple cameras at one site. See the LocalView online help for more information. Public display monitors, which displays multiple cameras at one site by connecting a monitor to one Multi-Media unit. See Using Monitor Output 1 as a Public Display Monitor on page 155. Preliminary Checklist Before Defining a Site Tour Your Multi System Administrator (Multi SA) needs at least two sites to define a tour. See Adding a Site on page 35 for more information. For systems using one site only, a Live session is as effective as a Site tour. See the Rapid Eye Multi-Media Digital Video Recorder Remote View Operator Guide, for more information. TIP! A site tour is not listed in the View application until more than one site is assigned to it. Design a site tour using two or more Rapid Eye units. System Password The system password should be the same for all of the Rapid Eye sites selected for a site tour (see System Password on page 184). Document V4 Rev A /10

254 Touring Many Sites Adding a Site Tour 1. Using Admin, click the Tours tab. 2. To display the Add Tours dialog box, either: Click on the toolbar. - or - Click Add in the Actions menu. 3. Enter a name in the Tour Name field (see Figure 13-1). 4. In the Add Tour dialog box, click in the Sites that are part of this Tour pane. The Add/Delete Sites in Tour dialog box appears. The tour s name must be entered before you can add sites to the tour definition. 5. Select the checkboxes next to one or more sites that you want to add to the tour. 6. Click Save and Close. The Add/Update Tour dialog box reappears, listing the names of the sites you ve added. See Customizing a Tour on page 255 for more information on changing your tour options. Figure 13-1 Adding a Tour Name Note The meaning of the word tour can be different for some cameras that pan, tilt and zoom (PTZ). PTZ cameras can be programmed to move independently when not in use by an operator. For more information about PTZ camera configuration, see Pan, Tilt, and Zoom (PTZ) Setup on page 95. Changing the Default Time that a Unit Displays During a Site Tour 1. Select the Options command in the View menu of the Admin application. 2. Adjust the minutes or seconds, as needed, in the Default stay of a new Site in a Tour field. See Figure

255 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 3. Click Save and Close. Figure 13-2 Default Amount of Time for a Tour of Each Unit Customizing a Tour For each tour, you have the option of specifying: The order in which sites are displayed in a tour (see Changing the Order of Sites in a Tour on page 255). The time spent at each site during a tour (see Changing the Time Spent at a Site During a Tour on page 256). The connection to be used to reach the site. By default, the first connection in the site s definition is used (see Selecting Another Connection to a Site During a Tour on page 256). Changing the Order of Sites in a Tour 1. Using Admin, select the Tours tab. 2. To display the Update Tour dialog box, do one of the following: Double-click the name of the tour that you want to customize. - or - Select the tour that you want to customize, then either: click on the toolbar, Update on the Actions menu, or press the F12 key. 3. In the Update Tour dialog box, drag and drop a site name to a new position in the list. 4. You can click Save and Close or make more changes to the site tour. Document V4 Rev A /10

256 Touring Many Sites Changing the Time Spent at a Site During a Tour 1. Using Admin, click the Tours tab. 2. To display the Update Tour dialog box, do one of the following: Double-click the name of the tour that you want to customize. - or - Select the tour that you want to customize, then either: click on the toolbar, Update in the Actions menu, or press the F12 key. Figure 13-3 Customizing the Duration of a Multi-Media Unit in a Tour 3. In the Add/Update Tour dialog box, do one of the following: Select a site, then click. - or - Double-click the name of a site. 4. In the Duration field, you can adjust the minutes or seconds to change the time spent at the site, as needed (see Figure 13-3). 5. Click Save and Close. TIP! Should you plan to view a site for long periods, say thirty minutes or more, consider using a Live Session instead of changing the durations of time spent at each site. Selecting Another Connection to a Site During a Tour 1. Using Admin, click the Tours tab. 2. To display the Update Tour dialog box. Double-click the name of the tour you need to customize. 3. Double-click the name of a site. 4. Click the drop-down arrow next to the Connection box. There may only be one connection to select. Connections are defined while adding or updating a site. See Connecting to a Rapid Eye Unit on page Select a connection type used for the site during the tour. 256

257 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 6. If needed, click Save and Close. Change the amount of time that the site will display for in the site tour (see Changing the Time Spent at a Site During a Tour on page 256). 7. Close the Add/Update Tour dialog box. Removing a Tour 1. Using Admin, click the Tours tab. 2. Select the tour that you want to delete. 3. Do one of the following: Click on the toolbar. Click Delete on the Actions menu. - or - Press the Delete key on the keyboard. 4. You are warned that the tour is about to be deleted. Click Yes to continue or No to cancel. Document V4 Rev A /10

258 Touring Many Sites 258

259 14 Alarm Log During an alarm session, a record of the event that caused the alarm is entered in the Alarm Log of the Multi central database (Multi db). Alarm logs are a separate feature from the Archival logs. See Using Archival Logs on page 250 for more information on Archival logs. Note Alarm log entries accumulate over time. Each alarm takes approximately 530 bytes. There can be many entries, as many as your database engine allows. See your organization s database administrator for rules on managing the size of the database. Viewing the Alarm Log Figure 14-1 Viewing the Alarm Log To sort the log, click a column heading Log filtering details Report: alarms displayed / total alarms The alarms produced in the last 24 hours are listed when the log is opened. The log can appear to be empty if there have been no alarms on this day. Earlier alarms can be viewed by filtering the log (see Filtering the Log on page 261). Document V4 Rev A /10

260 Alarm Log Opening the Alarm Log To view the alarm log, either: click on the Admin toolbar, select Alarm Log on the Actions menu, press F11 on the keyboard, or click View Log on the LocalView Setup tab. Sorting the Log Note Click the column headings in the alarm log to sort the log entries by those columns. Items are sorted by their textual appearance. For example, if your PC is set to display dates as month-day-year, you might obtains a listing with years unsorted. This may not be what you want. You can use the simple workaround in the next procedure to obtain a chronological list. Caution Honeywell recommends that the Short Date Style in Microsoft Windows be set to yyyy/mm/dd or a similar date input (such as yy-mm-dd). What matters most is that a sequence of year, month, day be used in the format, and that months be expressed in numbers, not text. The double m and d ensure that single digits are padded with zeroes. For example, June 7, 2009 should be expressed as 2009/06/07. Selecting Log Items Use Windows mouse and keyboard techniques to select/deselect log items. For example: To select more than one user or site, press the Ctrl or Shift keys while selecting. To select all the alarms in the list, press the Ctrl+a keys. Printing the Log Before printing one or more of the alarms listed in the log, you have to select them (see Selecting Log Items on page 260). 1. While viewing the log (as in Viewing the Alarm Log, page 259), select alarms that you want to print. To select more than one alarm, press the Ctrl or Shift keys while selecting the names in the lists. 2. Click Print. The print dialog box appears. If necessary, make changes to your printing preferences. Click Print. 260

261 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Filtering the Log Only alarms produced in the last 24 hours are listed when the log is opened. If you are getting too many or too few logs in the report, you can filter the results by Time, User or Site. The filtering details can be seen on the bottom bar of the Alarm Log Report window (see Figure 14-1). To filter the alarm log: 1. Click Filter. Select one of the Time Filter options to sort the logs by time. Narrow the filter time as much as possible to avoid a large number of alarm logs. Figure 14-2 Filtering the Alarm Log 2. Select These Users in the User Filter pane to filter the logs by user. Select one or more users in the Received by list. Press the Ctrl or Shift keys to select multiple users. 3. Select These Sites in the Site Filter pane to filter the logs by site. Select one or more sites in the Alarm from list. Press the Ctrl or Shift keys to select multiple sites. 4. Click OK. The Alarm Log Report will automatically filter with the updated options. Archiving the Log You can copy a selection of alarms to a text file. The archived list of alarms is not removed from the log. 1. While viewing the log (see Viewing the Alarm Log, page 259), select the alarms that you want to archive (see Selecting Log Items on page 260). Click Archive. The Save As dialog box appears. 2. Enter a name for the archive and select a location to save it in. Click Save. Document V4 Rev A /10

262 Alarm Log Removing Log Items 1. While viewing the log (see Viewing the Alarm Log, page 259), select the alarms that you want to delete. You can select more than one alarm by pressing the Ctrl or Shift keys while selecting alarms in the list. 2. Click Delete or press the Delete key on the keyboard. You are warned that the deletion is permanent. Click Yes to delete the items. Click No to cancel. Caution An Access-type Multi db filling with alarms can become inoperable. Alarm Log Data Reference For more information on the type of data found in the alarm log, see Table Table 14-1 Logged Data Column Value Section Reference User Name Name of user logged on to alarm station or using alarm session. Using Admin and View to Create a User Account, page 171 Site Name Name as specified in the site definition. Adding a Site, page 35 Action New, Ack, Rearm Right to Use View, page 200 Action Time Date and universal coordinated time (UTC) at which the action was taken. n/a Alarm Time Date and UTC of the alarm. n/a Sensor Event Description Multi input name for an Outside World event. The name of a Multi event that triggered the alarm (or event from a customer device). Shows the rule s description if the log was triggered by a rule. Otherwise this field is empty. Events Defined, page 205 Events Defined, page 205 Checklist for Setting a Rule in the Response Schedule, page

263 READY ALARM HDD TM READY ALARM HDD TM 15 Multi Database A Multi central database (Multi db) is needed to run the Admin application. Information about sites, users, alarm stations and site tours is contained in a Multi db. You only need one Multi db for multiple sites. Figure 15-1 Data Flow from Admin to View Multi SA s PC, running Admin, is used to enter: site and user data into a Multi database. Multi Database To access a Multi unit, a PC running View, uses connection data from the database. Multi-Media sites When an operator logs on to View, a local copy of data about the operator and the sites they may access, is created from the information on the Multi db. Database Creation Creating a database is a rare event that may be needed as little as once or twice during the life of your Multi-Media system. Honeywell supports two Microsoft database engines: Access and SQL-Server. MinAdmin Your Multi SA has the option of supplying a Multi db that offers a limited Administrator account to run MinAdmin software. Document V4 Rev A /10

264 Multi Database Starting Admin 1. On your desktop, either: Click Start on the windows taskbar, select Programs, and then Rapid Eye Multi-Media. Click Rapid Eye Multi-Media Admin. - or - Double-click the desktop icon for Admin. 2. Then, either: Follow Obtaining a Multi Database on page 264. Use a Multi db that is already available. Skip to Logging On on page 275. Obtaining a Multi Database To obtain a Multi db after starting Admin, you have the option of: Using the default, empty, Multi db. An empty Multi db comes with the software. It is used to access a unit out of the box. This is a simple way to get started. Switching to another Multi db. If you are given a Multi db prepared during the installation or at some other time (see Converting to Another Database on page 265). Creating an empty Multi db (see Creating a Multi Database on page 267). Copying a Multi db. You can base a new MS-Access Multi db on an MS-SQL or MSDE, and vice versa (see Database Based On Another on page 271). Upgrading a Multi db. Multi SAs can use a Multi db from their older Multi system (see Upgrading a Multi Database on page 273). Using the Default Multi Database The First Time that you Log On The file name of the default, Multi central database is: REMCentral.mdb. You can locate it by browsing through the folder holding the Multi software. 264

265 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide The Next Time that you Log On The next time that you use Admin, the same Multi db is used. A Multi db can be renamed. See Renaming a Multi Database on page 272. Table 15-1 Item User ID Password First Log On to Admin (Default Data for MS Access) Value Administrator None Microsoft Access Database path Database name Selected To installation folder (by default it is C:\Program Files\Honeywell Video Systems\Rapid Eye Multi-Media [version number]). REMCentral.mdb, a Multi database file in the folder where Admin was installed. Contrasting Database Engines Quick Contrast of Database Templates Microsoft Access. You do not need to have Microsoft Access installed on your system to use the default Multi Central db immediately. The only limitation for larger installations is an MS-Access db may not be able to hold the number of database records needed. SQL Server or MSDE. These database engines require preparation and database expertise. They may involve converting a Multi Central db. These db engines are also designed to hold a larger number of records. A database administrator or network administrator installs a database server on your network. To create a db, you may need to know the database password. If use of this password is restricted, let the database administrator either create the new Multi database from your machine, or run Admin on the Multi SA s PC to create the database from there. Consulting Management Information System Personnel The Multi SA may need a database administrator to advise on or decide upon the database (db) engine used in your Multi system. TIP! Multi SAs are not required to have database expertise or to train others for it. Converting to Another Database Your Multi SA may have created more than one Multi db. Operators have the option of switching to another Multi db. Document V4 Rev A /10

266 Multi Database Using Another Multi Database 1. Launch Admin (or View). The Logon window appears. 2. In the Central Database section, leave or switch the database (Access or SQL server) by clicking its button. Enter the name of the Multi db that you need. 3. Enter an user account name in the User ID field. The account name must be part of the Multi database selected in the previous step. 4. Enter the password to the account in the Password field. Click OK. Figure 15-2 Specifying the Multi Database To switch to another Multi database, change the central database (Multi db) name. Caution Take care when entering the name of a database in the Admin logon window. Entering the name of a non-existent database starts the Admin database tool. See Creating a Multi Database on page 267. Note Once you have set Admin to use a Multi central database (Multi db), the same Multi db is used every time that you log on. Converting a Multi Database from SQL to Access A SQL server database can hold many more alarms than an MS-Access database. To convert a SQL database to an Access format, Honeywell recommends removing alarm data from the SQL database beforehand. 266

267 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Using a Database with View View can be set to a different Multi db while Admin is running, and vice versa. When switching to another Multi db for use with View, a fresh local Multi db overwrites the local db used at the previous log on. Entering the name of a non-existent database in the View logon window is of little consequence. Acknowledge the error message and enter the name again. Creating a Multi Database TIP! Creating a Multi db is a rare occurrence. Only one Multi db is needed for all of the Rapid Eye sites in your system. Honeywell recommends using the default REMCentral.mdb if you plan to use only one Multi database. The installers of your system may have already created a Multi db to test the installation. Using the Admin - Logon Window to Create a Database If the installers did not supply you with their Multi db, you can use Admin to create an empty Multi db while you are logging on. Figure 15-3 Admin Logon and Creating a Database Document V4 Rev A /10

268 Multi Database To obtain an empty Multi central database, either: For an MS Access compatible format, see Creating an Empty MS-Access Compatible Multi Database on page or - For a SQL server compatible format, see SQL Server Template on page 269. Following Log On to Admin The next time that you logon to Admin, the same Multi db is used. What About the Local Database? When users run View, a partial copy of the Multi db (Local db) is made to that PC s hard drive. TIP! Creating a Multi db is a rare occurrence. Though you can create another Multi db at any Admin log on, there is no need to do so. The Multi db name is usually left unchanged during regular use of Admin. Only one Multi db is needed for all of the Rapid Eye sites in your system. Naming Restrictions Multi Database Naming Restrictions There are restrictions when choosing a name for your Multi database. Do not use: A user name. Names that you will need for a user of the Multi db. A Multi db with the same name as a user account causes an error when View is started. Administrator. It is the name of the default user in any Multi db. User Naming Restrictions When adding users to the database, do not use the database name as a user name. A user account with the same name as the database causes an error if a copy of the database is made locally. For other Naming Restrictions, see page 171. Creating an Empty MS-Access Compatible Multi Database You do not need a copy of Microsoft Access to use this procedure. Everything is included with your copy of Rapid Eye Multi software. 1. Launch Admin. See Starting Admin on page In the Admin Logon window, enter Administrator in the User ID box. 268

269 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 3. Leave the Password box empty. An empty database lists one default user, the Administrator. By default, this user has no password. See Administrator Password on page 195 for more information about the default user. 4. Leave the Multi Central database selected as Microsoft Access. 5. First-time logons can proceed as is: First run. You have the option of naming the database and selecting its path. Subsequent runs. Change the name of the database file. This instructs the database tool to create an empty database bearing the name that you entered. 6. Click OK. The Create Database window appears (see Figure 15-3). Note that Create empty database is selected. 7. Click OK. The Admin window appears. A default site is listed on the Sites tab. There is an Administrator user listed on the Users tab. Database Naming Restrictions Do not use a name that you will need for a user of that Multi db or Administrator (which is the name of the default user in any Multi db) as a database name. A Multi db with the same name as a user account causes an error when View is started. SQL Server Template Asking your SQL Database Administrator for Help An Admin user may find it useful to ask a SQL server database administrator for help when creating a SQL server compatible Multi db. The SQL server may have been configured using customized folder names. This can hamper creating an empty Multi db remotely, without the help of the database administrator. Admin can even be installed on the database administrator s PC. Security Option By default, Multi software connects to a SQL server using the sa login, with no password. To add security, your SQL administrator can setup a SQL login just for Admin users. See Multi Database Security on page 182. Intended Users Of the two procedures in this section, Using Microsoft SQL Server with an Empty Database is for your SQL server database administrator; Using Admin to Create a SQL-Compatible Multi Database can be used by an Admin user, with the help of a SQL db administrator. Security Considerations On some installations, the Multi db may need to be protected from copy and deletion (see Multi Database Security on page 182). Document V4 Rev A /10

270 Multi Database Using Microsoft SQL Server with an Empty Database This procedure is for a SQL database administrator, not an Admin user. 1. Copy the following two files to the SQL server database folder: REMTemplateV3-1.mdf REMTemplateV3-1.ldf 2. The default SQL folder name and path is: C:\MSSQL7\Data\. The number in the file name is not related to the version of the software or hardware used. Rename the files to a name of your choice, for the Multi db, such as Multi.mdf and Multi.ldf. Renaming is necessary to not restrict use of the template files, in order to create another Multi db at some future time. 3. Run the Query Analyzer, an MS SQL server tool. This tool is not supplied with Multi, it is a standard SQL server tool. 4. Connect to the SQL server. Enter the following code, including the commas: sp_attach_db Multi, C:\MSSQL7\Data\Multi.mdf, C:\MSSQL7\Data\Multi.ldf 5. Execute the code by pressing F5, or using the Execute command. Using Admin to Create a SQL-Compatible Multi Database 1. Before using Admin to connect to a SQL server, your SQL database administrator provides you with: A SQL account and password. The SQL Administrator logon is sa by default, but it and its password may have been changed. The SQL server name. The Share name of the folder that will hold the Multi db. 2. Make sure a SQL Server client is installed on the PC used to connect to a SQL Server. 3. Launch Admin. The Admin Logon window appears. 4. In the Admin Logon window, enter Administrator in the User ID box. 5. Leave the Password box empty. An empty database lists only one user, the Administrator. By default, this account has no password. See Administrator Password on page 195 for more information about the default user. 6. Select Microsoft SQL. Your next step depends on which Windows operating system is running on your PC. Users of Microsoft Windows 2000 or XP. You have the option of clicking Scan, to locate SQL servers in your network. The scan takes some time to perform on shared drives. If the scan is ineffective at locating the server you need, you can try the next option, even if it is designed for other versions of Windows. - or - Users of Win98se, or if a scan (from previous option) was ineffective. Enter the name of a SQL server in the Server name box. Your organization s database administrator can help you find this name. 270

271 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide 7. Click the Database Name drop-down arrow to see the database names that are in use. To create a database, enter a name that is not in use. 8. Click OK. If you entered a new name, a scan is performed, regardless of the Windows operating system on your PC. If SQL-Server security has been changed, a SQL logon window appears, as discussed in SQL-Server Option on page 183. Enter the Login and Password obtained from your database administrator, then click OK. The Create Database window appears (Figure 15-3). Note that Create empty database is selected. 9. Click OK. In the Admin window, a site is listed on the Sites tab. An Administrator user is listed on the Users tab. Database Based On Another To copy a Multi db, use the Admin - Logon window as a database tool. The procedure is similar to creating an empty Multi db. The Create Database window is used to select a model Multi db (see step 3 in Figure 15-4). You need an account and password for the model database to log on to the copy of the Multi db. SQL Server When making a copy of a SQL database, a network scan is made. This can be time consuming. If you know the name of the server and database, it is quicker to enter them. 1. When logging on to Admin, the Multi database displayed is the same as when you last logged on. 2. Enter the name that you want for the new database, then click OK. 3. Select or enter the name of the model Multi database that contains the data that you want to copy. 4. The data from the model Multi database is copied to the new database. Figure 15-4 Copying Multi Database Data to Another Database Document V4 Rev A /10

272 Multi Database Making a Copy of a Multi Database 1. Launch Admin. 2. Enter the name of an account that has the right to use Admin in the database that you plan to copy. TIP! TIP! This step for making a copy of a database is not obvious. Your usual account may not work in the database that you plan to copy. If you use the database s Administrator account, the password may differ from the Administrator account in the Multi db that you usually use. 3. Enter that account s password. 4. Select the database engine that will read the Multi db that you plan to create. 5. Replace the name of the database with a new name. You can also change the path, folder and server name, as needed. For Windows 98 users using MS-SQL Server or MSDE, a database server name must be entered. The database server(s) cannot be automatically identified and listed at log on. 6. Click OK. The Create Database window appears. See Figure 15-4, above. 7. Select either: Create from existing MS Access database. Browse for or enter the location and name of an *.mdb file. - or - Create from existing SQL database. Select a server and enter a database name of an *.mdb file. 8. Click OK. The new database is created based on the data in the model db. The Admin window appears. The information that you see is a copy of the model database. Renaming a Multi Database You can rename a Multi db using standard Windows techniques. For example, use Windows Explorer to locate an *.mdb file and rename the file as you would any other. Multi Database Naming Restrictions TIP! The file name of a local db is <userid>.mdb. This is why the name of a Multi db should not be the same as one of its users. When adding users to the database, do not use the database name as a user name. A user account with the same name as the database causes an error when a copy of the database is made locally. 272

273 Rapid Eye Multi-Media DVR System Administrator Guide Multi Database for MinAdmin Software Template For Administrators of client MinAdmin software, there is a Generate Template command in the File menu. The command is used to provide central databases for MinAdmin software. The template imposes restrictions on the rights of MinAdmin s Administrator account, administration of system password and access to the Multi db used to create the template. Figure 15-5 Options for Generating a MinAdmin Multi Database Template You can produce *.DAT files for MinAdmin users. Use of the.dat file and the template is discussed in the MinAdmin User Guide. Upgrading a Multi Database Upgrades from v4 to v5 are Automatic You don t have to know what version of Multi software you are upgrading, only that a message appears for upgrades from earlier versions of v2 or v3 software, as explained in the next procedure. Upgrading a Local Database Purpose of a Local Database When View runs, it uses a partial copy of the Multi db. The copy is stored on the PC s hard drive. The local database can be updated (refreshed) if the PC running View is connected to the Multi db. Document V4 Rev A /10

Rapid Eye Software Using ADMIN and VIEW to Configure Multi-Media Units and Manage Accounts

Rapid Eye Software Using ADMIN and VIEW to Configure Multi-Media Units and Manage Accounts Rapid Eye Software Using ADMIN and VIEW to Configure Multi-Media Units and Manage Accounts System Administrator s Guide Document K14392V1 Rev A 07/07 Revisions Issue Date Revisions K5403V10 Rev A 2004,

More information

User Manual V1.0. Remote Software

User Manual V1.0. Remote Software User Manual V1.0 Notice: The information in this manual was current when published. The manufacturer reserves the right to revise and improve its products. All specifications are therefore subject to change

More information

DVS Net (Integration)

DVS Net (Integration) DVS Net (Integration) Installation and User s Guide Ver 11.10.x Digital Video Security System Digital Video Recorder www.tuniss.com PLEASE CALL TUNISS COMPUTER AT: 650-401-6138 FOR ANY QUASTIONS REGARDING

More information

CMS-DH CENTRAL MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE

CMS-DH CENTRAL MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE CMS-DH CENTRAL MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE CMS-DH is a central management software that allows you to view and manage up to 300 DH200 series DVRs. System Requirements Your system must meet the system requirements

More information

Quick-Start Guide. Remote Surveillance & Playback SUPER DVR MONITORING SOFTWARE. For use on Q-See s QSDT series of PC Securitiy Surveillance Cards

Quick-Start Guide. Remote Surveillance & Playback SUPER DVR MONITORING SOFTWARE. For use on Q-See s QSDT series of PC Securitiy Surveillance Cards Quick-Start Guide SUPER DVR MONITORING SOFTWARE Remote Surveillance & Playback For use on Q-See s QSDT series of PC Securitiy Surveillance Cards 2 CONFIGURING ROUTER FOR REMOTE ACCESS REMOTE SURVEILLANCE

More information

1. Central Monitoring System Software

1. Central Monitoring System Software 1. Central Monitoring System Software 1-1. General information CMS program is an application with which users not only watch and control remote DVRs, but also receive video/audio data or alarm signals

More information

AXIS Camera Station Quick Installation Guide

AXIS Camera Station Quick Installation Guide AXIS Camera Station Quick Installation Guide Copyright Axis Communications AB April 2005 Rev. 3.5 Part Number 23997 1 Table of Contents Regulatory Information.................................. 3 AXIS Camera

More information

1. Central Monitoring System Software

1. Central Monitoring System Software 1. Central Monitoring System Software 1-1. General information CMS program is an application with which users not only watch and control remote DVRs, but also receive video/audio data or alarm signals

More information

TENVIS Technology Co., Ltd. User Manual. For H.264 Cameras. Version 2.0.0

TENVIS Technology Co., Ltd. User Manual. For H.264 Cameras. Version 2.0.0 TENVIS Technology Co., Ltd User Manual For H.264 Cameras Version 2.0.0 Catalogue Basic Operation... 3 Hardware Installation... 3 Search Camera... 3 Get live video... 5 Camera Settings... 8 System... 8

More information

How To Set Up Flir Cloud Client For Pc Or Mac Or Mac (For Pc Or Ipad) On A Pc Or Pc Or Mouse (For Mac) On An Iphone Or Ipa) On Pc Or Tv (For Ipa

How To Set Up Flir Cloud Client For Pc Or Mac Or Mac (For Pc Or Ipad) On A Pc Or Pc Or Mouse (For Mac) On An Iphone Or Ipa) On Pc Or Tv (For Ipa Instruction Manual FLIR Cloud Services Client Instruction Manual FLIR Cloud Services Client #LX400018; r. 2.0/14567/14568; en-us iii Table of contents 1 Setting up FLIR Cloud Client for PC or Mac...1

More information

1. Central Monitoring System Software

1. Central Monitoring System Software 1. Central Monitoring System Software 1-1. General information CMS program is an application with which users not only watch and control remote DVRs, but also receive video/audio data or alarm signals

More information

IEI emerge and Milestone Systems Network Video Recorder. Setup and Integration Guide. Milestone Version 6.5 and emerge Version 3.

IEI emerge and Milestone Systems Network Video Recorder. Setup and Integration Guide. Milestone Version 6.5 and emerge Version 3. IEI emerge and Milestone Systems Network Video Recorder Setup and Integration Guide Milestone Version 6.5 and emerge Version 3.2 and above CONTENTS Requirements for Milestone NVR/IEI emerge Integration...

More information

Network Viewing Software User and Administrators Guide

Network Viewing Software User and Administrators Guide Network Viewing Software User and Administrators Guide Contents Contents...2 Introduction...3 System requirements...3 Connecting through a firewall....3 Connecting using a proxy server....3 Using Network

More information

How To Use The Workstation Program On A Pc Or Mac Or Macbook Or Macintosh (Aero) With A Computer Or Ipa (A2) With An Ipa Or Ipad (A3) With The Powerpoint 2.

How To Use The Workstation Program On A Pc Or Mac Or Macbook Or Macintosh (Aero) With A Computer Or Ipa (A2) With An Ipa Or Ipad (A3) With The Powerpoint 2. Mirasys NVR 6.1 User s Guide CONTENTS Contents... 2 Before you start... 3 Introduction... 6 Logging in... 9 User interface... 13 Navigator... 16 Cameras... 25 Video outputs... 41 Digital outputs... 46

More information

ImagineWorldClient Client Management Software. User s Manual. (Revision-2)

ImagineWorldClient Client Management Software. User s Manual. (Revision-2) ImagineWorldClient Client Management Software User s Manual (Revision-2) (888) 379-2666 US Toll Free (905) 336-9665 Phone (905) 336-9662 Fax www.videotransmitters.com 1 Contents 1. CMS SOFTWARE FEATURES...4

More information

IP EQUIPMENT WEB. User manual

IP EQUIPMENT WEB. User manual IP EQUIPMENT WEB User manual V1.0 Thank you for purchasing our products,please contact with us anytime if you have any question or requirement. It is possible that there might be inaccurate places, inconsistencies

More information

Multi-Site 4200. Remote Viewing Software. User Guide

Multi-Site 4200. Remote Viewing Software. User Guide Multi-Site 4200 Remote Viewing Software User Guide Document 800-12064V1 Rev A 09/2012 User Guide Revisions Issue Date Revisions A 07/2012 New document. V1 Rev A 09/2012 Updated the description of the

More information

User s Manual of DVR DVS Remote Client Software V 4.0.1

User s Manual of DVR DVS Remote Client Software V 4.0.1 User s Manual of DVR DVS Remote Client Software V 4.0.1 Index Version description...4 1 Introduction...8 2 Software Install, Uninstall and use...9 2.1 Install remote client software ver4.0.1...9 2.2 Uninstall

More information

Digital Sentry DS ControlPoint

Digital Sentry DS ControlPoint O P E R A T I O N Digital Sentry DS ControlPoint C3674M-I (5/11) 2 C3674M-I (5/11) C3674M-I (5/11) 3 Contents Description...........................................................................................................

More information

User Manual of Web Client

User Manual of Web Client User Manual of Web Client 1 Index Chapter 1 Software Installation... 3 Chapter 2 Begin to Use... 5 2.1 Login and Exit... 5 2.2 Preview Interface Instruction... 6 2.3 Preview Image... 7 Chapter 3 Playback...

More information

HRG App for Android Devices. User Guide

HRG App for Android Devices. User Guide HRG App for Android Devices User Guide Document 800-12218 Rev A 07/2012 Revisions Issue Date Revisions A 07/2012 New document. Contents 3 Contents 1 1 Introduction...............................................

More information

NVMS-1200. User Manual

NVMS-1200. User Manual NVMS-1200 User Manual Contents 1 Software Introduction... 1 1.1 Summary... 1 1.2 Install and Uninstall... 1 1.2.1 Install the Software... 1 2 Login Software... 3 2.1 Login... 3 2.2 Control Panel Instruction...

More information

IEI emerge and On-Net Surveillance Systems (OnSSI) Network Video Recorder Setup and Integration Guide

IEI emerge and On-Net Surveillance Systems (OnSSI) Network Video Recorder Setup and Integration Guide IEI emerge and On-Net Surveillance Systems (OnSSI) Network Video Recorder Setup and Integration Guide OnSSI Version 6.5 and IEI emerge Version 3.2 and above CONTENTS Requirements for OnSSI NVR/IEI emerge

More information

Avigilon View User Guide

Avigilon View User Guide Avigilon View User Guide Legal Notices 2014 Avigilon Corporation. All rights reserved. Unless expressly granted in writing, no license is granted with respect to any copyright, industrial design, trademark,

More information

Access to remote DVR from IE USER S MANUAL CONTENT

Access to remote DVR from IE USER S MANUAL CONTENT Access to remote DVR from IE CONTENT... 2 Preface... 2 1. Introduction... 2 2. System requirement and executing environment... 2 2.1. Supported operating System:... 2 2.2. Hardware requirement (recommend):...

More information

Stand Alone Type. Digital Video Recorder USER S MANUAL. (Real time recording 8 & 16 CH DVR) Revision Date : 2010. 6. 30.

Stand Alone Type. Digital Video Recorder USER S MANUAL. (Real time recording 8 & 16 CH DVR) Revision Date : 2010. 6. 30. Stand Alone Type Digital Video Recorder USER S MANUAL (Real time recording 8 & 16 CH DVR) Revision Date : 2010. 6. 30. INDEX 1. Front Panel - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

More information

Professional Surveillance System User s Manual

Professional Surveillance System User s Manual Professional Surveillance System User s Manual \ 1 Content Welcome...4 1 Feature...5 2 Installation...6 2.1 Environment...6 2.2 Installation...6 2.3 Un-installation...8 3 Main Window...9 3.1 Interface...9

More information

<User s Guide> Plus Viewer. monitoring. Web

<User s Guide> Plus Viewer. monitoring. Web Plus Viewer 1 < Plus Viewer (web ) > 1-1 Access Method The user can access the DVR system through the web. 1 Enter the IP for the DVR system in the address field of the web browser. 2 The

More information

Remote Client Program... 3. Web Client... 39

Remote Client Program... 3. Web Client... 39 Remote Client / Web Client USER MANUAL T Series Digital Video Recorder Remote Client Program... 3 Remote Client Program Installation... 4 Remote Client... 6 Main Window... 6 Site Registration... 7 Group

More information

LOREX CLIENT Remote Software 4.0

LOREX CLIENT Remote Software 4.0 LOREX CLIENT Remote Software 4.0 Instruction Manual English Version 2.0 MODEL: L20WD800 Series www.lorexcctv.com Copyright 2008 LOREX Technology Inc. Table of Contents Table of Contents Software Installation...

More information

Quick Start Guide NVR DS-7104NI-SL/W NVR. www.hikvision.com. First Choice For Security Professionals

Quick Start Guide NVR DS-7104NI-SL/W NVR. www.hikvision.com. First Choice For Security Professionals Quick Start Guide NVR DS-7104NI-SL/W NVR NOTE: For more detailed information, refer to the User s Manual on the CD-ROM. You must use your PC or MAC to access the files. www.hikvision.com Quick Start 1.

More information

idvr-pro Viewer Software for Mac User Manual ver 0.1

idvr-pro Viewer Software for Mac User Manual ver 0.1 idvr-pro Viewer Software for Mac User Manual ver 0.1 1 Contents 1. Introduction... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.1 Summary... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2. Install... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.1

More information

ivms-4200 Client Software Quick Start Guide V1.02

ivms-4200 Client Software Quick Start Guide V1.02 ivms-4200 Client Software Quick Start Guide V1.02 Contents 1 Description... 2 1.1 Running Environment... 2 1.2 Surveillance System Architecture with an Performance of ivms-4200... 3 2 Starting ivms-4200...

More information

PowerLogic ION Enterprise 5.6

PowerLogic ION Enterprise 5.6 PowerLogic ION Enterprise 5.6 Power Management Software User Guide April 2007 Notices This section describes the symbols used in this guide. Danger This alerts you to things that may cause serious injury

More information

Movie Cube. User s Guide to Wireless Function

Movie Cube. User s Guide to Wireless Function Movie Cube User s Guide to Wireless Function Table of Contents 1. WLAN USB Adapter Connection...3 2. Wireless Setup...4 2.1 Infrastructure (AP)...5 2.2 Peer to Peer (Ad Hoc)...7 2.3 Settings for PC...8

More information

Addendum DVR670 Installation and Operation manual AM18-Q0617

Addendum DVR670 Installation and Operation manual AM18-Q0617 Security Systems Addendum DVR670 Installation and Operation manual AM18-Q0617 Security Warning The remote system access feature, designed to allow users to view their video via a PC or phone, may compromise

More information

Instruction for IE network monitor

Instruction for IE network monitor Instruction for IE network monitor This system features a built-in browser-based software that allows you to access your system remotely over your local area network (LAN) or over the Internet (WAN) using

More information

Guarding Expert (Android Tablet) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V3.1)

Guarding Expert (Android Tablet) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V3.1) Guarding Expert (Android Tablet) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V3.1) UD.6L0202D1080A01 Thank you for purchasing our product. This manual applies to Guarding Expert (Android Tablet) mobile client

More information

RASplus (Remote Administration System)

RASplus (Remote Administration System) RASplus (Remote Administration System) Digital Video Recorder Software User Guide Document 900.0857 Rev 1.01 Revisions Issue Date Revisions 1.00 New document. 1.01 Minor changes. Rev 1.01 ii Document 900.0857

More information

Installing the Microsoft Network Driver Interface

Installing the Microsoft Network Driver Interface Installing the Microsoft Network Driver Interface Overview This guide explains how to install the PictureTel Live200 Microsoft Network Driver Interface (NDIS) software you have downloaded from PictureTel's

More information

DVR4C Remote Viewer Operation Manual Table of Contents EN 3 1. OVERVIEW...5 1.1 MINIMUM PC REQUIREMENTS...5 2. INSTALLING THE PROGRAM...

DVR4C Remote Viewer Operation Manual Table of Contents EN 3 1. OVERVIEW...5 1.1 MINIMUM PC REQUIREMENTS...5 2. INSTALLING THE PROGRAM... DVR4x4RemoteViewer.book Page 3 Tuesday, February 15, 2005 9:19 AM DVR4C Remote Viewer Operation Manual Table of Contents EN 3 1. OVERVIEW...5 1.1 MINIMUM PC REQUIREMENTS...5 2. INSTALLING THE PROGRAM...5

More information

Central Management System (CMS) USER MANUAL

Central Management System (CMS) USER MANUAL Central Management System (CMS) USER MANUAL LEGAL INFORMATION Reproduction, transfer, distribution or storage of part or all of the contents in this document in any form without the prior written permission

More information

VMS A1 Client Software. User Manual (V2.0)

VMS A1 Client Software. User Manual (V2.0) VMS A1 Client Software User Manual (V2.0) Contents Chapter 1 Overview...4 1.1 Description...4 1.2 Running Environment...4 1.3 Function Modules...5 Chapter 2 Live View...7 2.1 User Registration and Login...7

More information

ivms-4500 (Android Tablet) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V3.0)

ivms-4500 (Android Tablet) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V3.0) ivms-4500 (Android Tablet) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V3.0) Thank you for purchasing our product. This manual applies to ivms-4500 (Android Tablet) mobile client software; please read it carefully

More information

Ultra Thin Client TC-401 TC-402. Users s Guide

Ultra Thin Client TC-401 TC-402. Users s Guide Ultra Thin Client TC-401 TC-402 Users s Guide CONTENT 1. OVERVIEW... 3 1.1 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION... 3 1.2 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW... 4 1.3 HARDWARE OVERVIEW...5 1.4 NETWORK CONNECTION... 7 2. INSTALLING THE

More information

Manual Password Depot Server 8

Manual Password Depot Server 8 Manual Password Depot Server 8 Table of Contents Introduction 4 Installation and running 6 Installation as Windows service or as Windows application... 6 Control Panel... 6 Control Panel 8 Control Panel...

More information

Network Video Recorder. Operation Manual

Network Video Recorder. Operation Manual Network Video Recorder Operation Manual Content 1 Product Description... 1 1.1 Product Overview... 1 1.2 Specification... 1 2 Product Structure Introduction... 2 2.1 Back Interface... 2 2.2 Front Panel...

More information

How to Remotely View Security Cameras Using the Internet

How to Remotely View Security Cameras Using the Internet How to Remotely View Security Cameras Using the Internet Introduction: The ability to remotely view security cameras is one of the most useful features of your EZWatch Pro system. It provides the ability

More information

INSTRUCTION MANUAL Neo Coolcam IP Camera

INSTRUCTION MANUAL Neo Coolcam IP Camera INSTRUCTION MANUAL Neo Coolcam IP Camera Revised: June 28, 2013 Thank you for purchasing from SafetyBasement.com! We appreciate your business. We made this simple manual to help you enjoy your new product

More information

Content. Chapter1 Start up and Main interface 2

Content. Chapter1 Start up and Main interface 2 Content Chapter1 Start up and Main interface 2 1.1 Start up 2 1.2 Main interface 3 1.2.1 Interface description 3 1.2.2 Local setup 6 1.2.3 Local search 6 1.2.4 Remote setup 6 1.2.5 Remote search 6 1.2.6

More information

Installation Steps Follow these steps to install the network camera on your local network (LAN):

Installation Steps Follow these steps to install the network camera on your local network (LAN): 1. Description The Network Camera supports the network service for a sensor image with progressive scan, which can be monitored on a real-time screen regardless of distances and locations. By using its

More information

Avigilon Control Center Web Client User Guide

Avigilon Control Center Web Client User Guide Avigilon Control Center Web Client User Guide Version: 4.12 Enterprise OLH-WEBCLIENT-E-E-Rev2 Copyright 2013 Avigilon. All rights reserved. The information presented is subject to change without notice.

More information

ivms-4500 (Android) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V3.1)

ivms-4500 (Android) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V3.1) ivms-4500 (Android) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V3.1) UD.6L0202D1111A01 Thank you for purchasing our product. This manual applies to ivms-4500 (Android) V3.1 mobile client software; please read

More information

BlackHawk for MAC Software User Guide

BlackHawk for MAC Software User Guide BlackHawk for MAC Software User Guide Products: BLK-DH2 Series and BLK-HD Series DVRs Please read this manual before using your software, and always follow the instructions for safety and proper use. Save

More information

A quick user guide for your LX Apollo DVR

A quick user guide for your LX Apollo DVR A quick user guide for your LX Apollo DVR The LX Apollo series of DVR s is designed specially for the security and surveillance field and is an outstanding digital surveillance product. It has an embedded

More information

ACS CLIENT SOFTWARE USER MANUAL

ACS CLIENT SOFTWARE USER MANUAL ACS CLIENT SOFTWARE USER MANUAL 1 ACS USER GUIDE 1.1 System Requirement Recommended System Requirement OS CPU VGA RAM HDD WindowXP, Vista Pentium 4, 2Ghz 1024*768, 64MB 24bit color graphic card 1GB 20MB

More information

Amcrest 960H DVR Quick Start Guide

Amcrest 960H DVR Quick Start Guide Amcrest 960H DVR Quick Start Guide Welcome Thank you for purchasing our Amcrest 960H DVR! This quick start guide will help you become familiar with our DVR in a very short time. Before installation and

More information

System Integration Software

System Integration Software System Integration Software Release Notes for Version 6.0.5 1.0 Compatibility Currently, PC9000 is compatible with the following Radionics control/communicators: D7212, D7412, D7412G D9112, D9412 and D9412G

More information

ivms 4000(V2.0) User Manual

ivms 4000(V2.0) User Manual ivms 4000(V2.0) User Manual Table of Contents Chapter 1 Welcome to ivms 4000 (V2.0)...4 1.1 Overview...4 1.2 Computer Disposition Request...4 1.3 Convention...4 Chapter 2 Install & Uninstall...5 2.1 Install

More information

Central Management System

Central Management System Central Management System Software Installation Guide Ver. 1.5.0.101115.001 ... ii System Introduction... 3 Client/Server Architecture...3 System Requirements... 4 System Setup...4 Multiple Monitor Configuration...5

More information

Chapter 2 Preparing Your Network

Chapter 2 Preparing Your Network Chapter 2 Preparing Your Network This document describes how to prepare your network to connect to the Internet through a router and how to verify the readiness of your broadband Internet service from

More information

NVMS - 1000 USER MANUAL. Version 2.1.0

NVMS - 1000 USER MANUAL. Version 2.1.0 NVMS - 1000 USER MANUAL Version 2.1.0 Contents 1 Software Introduction... 1 1.1 Summary... 1 1.2 Operation Environment... 1 1.3 Install and Uninstall... 2 1.3.1 Install the Software... 2 1.3.2 Uninstall

More information

ACTi Streaming Explorer User s Manual Ver 2.1.09

ACTi Streaming Explorer User s Manual Ver 2.1.09 ACTi Streaming Explorer User s Manual Ver 2.1.09 2011/06/24 Overview Streaming Explorer is a Web tool used to manage devices remotely. The Functions provided include Connection, PTZ, DI/DO, Motion, Camera

More information

RASplus (Remote Administration System)

RASplus (Remote Administration System) RASplus (Remote Administration System) Digital Video Recorder Software User Guide Document 800-05056 Rev C 11/09 Revisions Issue Date Revisions A 09/09 New document based on 900.0857 rev 6.00 with updates

More information

SMS Remote Software User Manual. Pro Series & Contender Series DVRs

SMS Remote Software User Manual. Pro Series & Contender Series DVRs SMS Remote Software User Manual Pro Series & Contender Series DVRs Table of Contents Chapter 1 Overview 1 1.1 In This Manual 1 1.2 Overview 1 1.3 SMS Features 1 1.4 Product Information 1 1.5 System Requirements

More information

SEC-PCC10 SEC-PCC20 SEC-PCC30 PCI SECURITY CARD

SEC-PCC10 SEC-PCC20 SEC-PCC30 PCI SECURITY CARD SEC-PCC10 SEC-PCC20 SEC-PCC30 PCI SECURITY CARD ADVANCED ENGLISH MANUAL 0 Installation 1. Turn off the PC s power and unplug the power cable. 2. Open the PC s cover and plug the capture card into an empty

More information

Network Client. Troubleshooting Guide FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

Network Client. Troubleshooting Guide FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS Network Client Troubleshooting Guide 1 Network Client Troubleshooting Guide The first section of this guide answers some frequently asked questions (FAQs) about the operation of Intellex and the Network

More information

Alliance 8300 Administration Manual and Operation Guide

Alliance 8300 Administration Manual and Operation Guide Alliance 8300 Administration Manual and Operation Guide P/N 1068767 REV 4.0 ISS 26JUL11 Copyright Trademarks and patents Manufacturer Certification Contact information Customer support 2011 UTC Fire &

More information

Multi Client (Integration)

Multi Client (Integration) Multi Client (Integration) Installation and User s Guide Ver 12.10.x *All contents of this document may change without prior notice. INDEX 1. Index 01 2. Introduction 02 3. Installation 03 4. Using Multi

More information

CamGuard Security System CamGuard Security System Manual

CamGuard Security System CamGuard Security System Manual CamGuard Security System Manual JMC Electron Co.,LTD Brief Introduction... 3 Features... 3 System Requirements... 3 Configuration... 4 Add Camera... 4 Device Options... 4 About Alarm... 5 Alarm Actions...

More information

Getting Started with IntelleView POS Administrator Software

Getting Started with IntelleView POS Administrator Software Getting Started with IntelleView POS Administrator Software Administrator s Guide for Software Version 1.2 About this Guide This administrator s guide explains how to start using your IntelleView POS (IntelleView)

More information

ivms-4500 (iphone) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V3.1)

ivms-4500 (iphone) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V3.1) ivms-4500 (iphone) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V3.1) UD.6L0202D1029A01 Thank you for purchasing our product. This manual applies to ivms-4500 (iphone) mobile client software; please read it carefully

More information

Contents. 1.2 Software Installation... 1

Contents. 1.2 Software Installation... 1 Software Manual Contents 1 Software Installation... 1 1.1 Overview...1 1.2 Software Installation... 1 2 Introduction To Basic Function...5 2.1 Login System... 5 2.2 CMS Operating Interface...5 2.2.1 Operating

More information

Chapter 6 Using Network Monitoring Tools

Chapter 6 Using Network Monitoring Tools Chapter 6 Using Network Monitoring Tools This chapter describes how to use the maintenance features of your Wireless-G Router Model WGR614v9. You can access these features by selecting the items under

More information

Professional Surveillance System User s Manual

Professional Surveillance System User s Manual Professional Surveillance System User s Manual Version 4.06 Table of Contents 1 OVERVIEW AND ENVIRONMENT... 1 1.1 Overview... 1 1.2 Environment... 1 2 INSTALLATION AND UPGRADE... 2 2.1 Installation...

More information

SMS (Server Management Software) Digital Video Recorder. User s Manual

SMS (Server Management Software) Digital Video Recorder. User s Manual SMS (Server Management Software) Digital Video Recorder User s Manual Contents 1 - Introduction 2 1.1 About this manual 2 1.2 Configuration 2 1.3 SMS Functions 2 1.4 Product Information 2 1.5 System Requirements

More information

IP Power Stone 4000 User Manual

IP Power Stone 4000 User Manual IP Power Stone 4000 User Manual Two Outlet Remote AC Power Controller Multi Link, Inc. 122 Dewey Drive Nicholasville, KY 40356 USA Sales and Tech Support 800.535.4651 FAX 859.885.6619 techsupport@multi

More information

DS-7200HWI-SH/A Series DVR. Technical Specification

DS-7200HWI-SH/A Series DVR. Technical Specification DS-7200HWI-SH/A Series DVR Technical Specification Notices The information in this documentation is subject to change without notice and does not represent any commitment on behalf of HIKVISION. HIKVISION

More information

Client Software-4000(V2.00.02) User Manual

Client Software-4000(V2.00.02) User Manual Client Software-4000(V2.00.02) User Manual Index Chapter 1 Welcome to Client Software-4000 (V2.0)... 1 1.1 Overview... 1 1.2 Computer Disposition Request... 1 1.3 Convention... 1 Chapter 2 Install & Uninstall...

More information

Advanced System Management Software

Advanced System Management Software C O N F I G U R A T I O N Advanced System Management Software For use with WS5000 version 2.x models C3691M-C (2/13) 2 C3691M-C (2/13) C3691M-C (2/13) 3 Contents About Endura.........................................................................................................

More information

ReadyNAS Surveillance

ReadyNAS Surveillance ReadyNAS Surveillance Add-on Manual Firmware: RAIDiator 4.2.17 or later 350 East Plumeria Drive San Jose, CA 95134 USA May 2012 202-11009-01 2012 NETGEAR, Inc. All rights reserved No part of this publication

More information

QSD2316L DVR User s Manual

QSD2316L DVR User s Manual QSD2316L DVR User s Manual H.264-200 FPS /240 FPS 16-channel digital video recorder All rights reserved Rev 062408 QSD2316L DVR User s Manual CAUTION Please read this user manual carefully to ensure that

More information

WEB CONFIGURATION. Configuring and monitoring your VIP-101T from web browser. PLANET VIP-101T Web Configuration Guide

WEB CONFIGURATION. Configuring and monitoring your VIP-101T from web browser. PLANET VIP-101T Web Configuration Guide WEB CONFIGURATION Configuring and monitoring your VIP-101T from web browser The VIP-101T integrates a web-based graphical user interface that can cover most configurations and machine status monitoring.

More information

Preface Version 1.0 (1808. rev. 2)

Preface Version 1.0 (1808. rev. 2) A brand that is integrated into Samsung s network products, stands for a convenient world (Polis) made safe (Polis) through Samsung s superior network performance (Internet protocol). With products, clear

More information

TDP43ME NetPS. Network Printer Server. Control Center. for Ethernet Module

TDP43ME NetPS. Network Printer Server. Control Center. for Ethernet Module Panduit Corp. 2010 TDP43ME NetPS PA26306A01 Rev. 01 11-2010 Network Printer Server Control Center for Ethernet Module NOTE: In the interest of higher quality and value, Panduit products are continually

More information

User Manual ivms-4200 Client Software. Version 1.02

User Manual ivms-4200 Client Software. Version 1.02 User Manual ivms-4200 Client Software Version 1.02 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1. Overview... 3 Chapter 2. Starting ivms-4200... 3 2.1 User Registration... 3 2.2 Wizard for Importing Device... 3 2.3 User

More information

IPSe - NVSe Network Video Recorder

IPSe - NVSe Network Video Recorder IPSe - NVSe Network Video Recorder Software Manual model no. IPSe8-X IPSe16-X IPSe32-X NVSe8-X NVSe16-X NVSe32-X NVSe64-X Please carefully read these instructions before using this product. Save this manual

More information

IDM. Reference Guide. Integrated Data Manager. Document 900.0562 Rev 1.06 05/09

IDM. Reference Guide. Integrated Data Manager. Document 900.0562 Rev 1.06 05/09 IDM Integrated Data Manager Reference Guide Document 900.0562 Rev 1.06 05/09 Reference Guide Revisions Issue Date Revisions 1.00 01/06 New document. 1.01 11/06 Revised sections for License, Device and

More information

PowerVideo Plus. EverFocus Central Management Software. for Networked Video Devices Management. User s Manual

PowerVideo Plus. EverFocus Central Management Software. for Networked Video Devices Management. User s Manual EverFocus Central Management Software for Networked Video Devices Management User s Manual Copyright EverFocus Electronics Corp. Release Date: January, 2013 Copyright 2012 EverFocus Electronics Corp. All

More information

MAC CMS User Manual 1

MAC CMS User Manual 1 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1. Overview... 4 Chapter 2. Starting CMS Client... 4 2.1 User Registration... 4 2.2 Wizard for Importing Device... 4 2.3 User Login... 9 2.4 Control Panel and Main Menu Bar

More information

PC-ZViewer User Manual

PC-ZViewer User Manual PC-ZViewer User Manual For further help, please visit www.zmodo.com Contents Preface... 3 Statement... 3 Intended Reader... 3 Terms in this Manual... 3 Software Introduction... 3 Operating Environment...

More information

This section will focus on basic operation of the interface including pan/tilt, video, audio, etc.

This section will focus on basic operation of the interface including pan/tilt, video, audio, etc. Catalogue Basic Operation... 2 For Internet Explorer... 2 For Other Non-IE Web Browsers... 5 Camera Settings... 6 System... 6 About... 6 PT Setting... 7 Backup and Restore Setup... 8 NTP Setting... 8 System

More information

ivms-4500(android) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V1.0)

ivms-4500(android) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V1.0) ivms-4500(android) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V1.0) Thank you for purchasing our product. This manual applies to ivms-4500 (Android) mobile client software, please read it carefully for the better

More information

CX Series. Video Recording Server. Quick Start Guide CX784 / CX788 / CX7816. Version 1.05.00

CX Series. Video Recording Server. Quick Start Guide CX784 / CX788 / CX7816. Version 1.05.00 CX Series Video Recording Server CX784 / CX788 / CX7816 Quick Start Guide Version 1.05.00 Contents 1.Introduction...1 1.1.Packages Contents...1 1.2.Hardware Features...2 1.3.Functional Features...4 1.4.Hard

More information

ivms-4500(iphone) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V1.0)

ivms-4500(iphone) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V1.0) ivms-4500(iphone) Mobile Client Software User Manual (V1.0) Thank you for purchasing our product. This manual applies to ivms-4500 (iphone) mobile client software, please read it carefully for the better

More information

APPLICATION NOTE. The DMP Software Family DMP COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS

APPLICATION NOTE. The DMP Software Family DMP COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAMS APPLICATION NOTE Contents The DMP Software Family... 1 Stand-Alone Link Software... 1 Add-on Modules for Link Software... 1 System Link End-User Panel Management Software... 2 Simple Registration and Activation...

More information

Enterprise Management Suite

Enterprise Management Suite Light Version 02.01V 0 Tale of Contents II. INSTALLING... 4 III.EXECUTING EMS... 6 IV. FEATURES... 7 1. EMS Overview... 7 1. Online/Offline button... 7 2. Device Manager... 8 3. Tree... 10 4. EMS Log...

More information

A&H Software House Inc. Web: www.luxriot.com Email: sales@luxriot.com. Luxriot

A&H Software House Inc. Web: www.luxriot.com Email: sales@luxriot.com. Luxriot A&H Software House Inc. Web: www.luxriot.com Email: sales@luxriot.com Luxriot Luxriot Product Features Luxriot is equipped with Unique, Advanced and Industry Standard Surveillance Features: Luxriot is

More information

ivms-4200 Client Software Quick Start Guide

ivms-4200 Client Software Quick Start Guide ivms-4200 Client Software Quick Start Guide Notices The information in this documentation is subject to change without notice and does not represent any commitment on behalf of HIKVISION. HIKVISION disclaims

More information

CDVS-7000 Series Remote Software Users Guide

CDVS-7000 Series Remote Software Users Guide CDVS-7000 Series Remote Software Users Guide Crest Electronics, Inc. Version 12.1005 Remote Surveillance Program The remote surveillance program enables users of the Crest 7000 series DVRs to connect remotely

More information